INTERNAL REPORT
June 1994
ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING AND ASSESSMENT PROGRAM-
SURFACE WATERS
FIELD OPERATIONS MANUAL FOR LAKES
Edited by
John R. Baker, Glenn D. Merritt, and Donna W. Button
Lockheed Environmental Systems & Technologies Co.
Las Vegas, Nevada
Contract No. 68-CO-0049
Work Assignment Managers
W. L. Kinney
Exposure Monitoring Research Division
Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory
Las Vegas, Nevada 89193-3478
and
S. A. Peterson
Environmental Research Laboratory
Corvallis, Oregon 97333
ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING SYSTEMS LABORATORY
OFFICE OF RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
LAS VEGAS, NEVADA 89193-3478
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH LABORATORY
OFFICE OF RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
CORVALLIS, OREGON 97333
ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING SYSTEMS LABORATORY
OFFICE OF RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROJECTION AGENCY
CINCINNATI, OHIO 45219
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
June 1994
NOTICE
This research has been funded by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency through its
Office of Research and Development (ORD) and was conducted with our research partners under
the management of the Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory-Las Vegas. This document
is intended for internal Agency use only. This work is in support of the Environmental Monitoring
and Assessment Program. Neither the EPA nor ORD endorses or recommends any trade name or
commercial product mentioned in this report. The products are mentioned solely for the purpose of
description and/or clarification.
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
June 1994
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section
Page
Notice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ii
Figures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi
Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. viii
Acknowledgments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. x
Acronyms and Abbreviations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Section
Page
1
INTRODUCTION.'. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1 .1 Overview of EMAP Surface Waters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1-1
1.2 Indicator Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1-2
1.2.1 Physical Habitat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1-3
1.2.2 Fish Assemblage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.2.3 Fish Tissue Contaminants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1.2.4 Water Chemistry and Associated Measurements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.2.5 Zooplankton. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.2.6 Sediment Diatoms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.2.7 Benthic Invertebrate Assemblages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1.2.8 Lake Assessment or Site Characteristics ......................1-11
1.2.9 Riparian Bird Assemblage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1-11
1.3 Objectives and Scope of the Field Operations Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1-12
1 .4 Reference.................................................. 1-13
2
DAILY OPERATIONS SUMMARY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1 Sampling Scenario. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.2 Recording Data and Other Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
3
BASE SITE ACTIVITIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . '.' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1 Predeparture Activities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1.1 Daily Itineraries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1.2 Instrument Checks and Calibrations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.1.3 Equipment Preparation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.2 Postsampling Activities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3.2.1 Equipment Cleanup and Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3.2.2 Shipment of Samples and Forms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3.2.3 Communications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3-14
4
LAKE VERIFICATION AND INDEX SITE LOCATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1 Lake Verification at the launch Site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2 lake Verification at the Index Site location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.3 Equipment and Supply List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
iii
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
June 1994
TABLE OF CONTENTS (continued)
Section
Page
5
HABITAT ASSESSMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5. 1 Temperature and Dissolved Oxygen. . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1 .1 Calibration of the Dissolved Oxygen Meter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1.2 Profile Measurements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.2 Shoreline Physical Habitat Characterization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.2.1 Locating Each P-Hab Station. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.2.2 Physical Habitat Characterization Form and Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5.2.3 The Habitat Sketch Map Form and Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
5.3 Littoral Macrohabitat Characterization and Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
5.4 Equipment and Supply List. . . . . . . . . . . .'. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
6
FISH SAMPLING. . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 1
6.1 Physical Habitat Descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.2 Selecting Fishing Sites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6.2.1 Fish Sampling Effort Required. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.2.2 Selecting Sites for Midlake Gill Nets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.2.3 Selecting Sites For Littoral Trap Nets and Gill Nets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6.2.4 Selecting Sites for Seining. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
6.2.5 Judgment and "Extra" Sampling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .". 6-13
6.2.6 Recording Gear Type Placement Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6.3 Predeployment Preparation of Fishing Gear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6.4 Deployment Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6.4.1 Gill Nets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
6.4.2 Trap Nets and Minnow Traps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
6.4.3 Fish Tally Form and Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
6.5 Retrieval Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
6.5.1 Gill Nets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
6.5.2 Trap Nets and Minnow Traps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
6.5.3 Seines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
6.6 Processing Fish. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
6.6.1 Species JD and Tally. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
6.6.2 External Anomalies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
6.6.3 Length. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
6.6.4 Tissue Contaminant Samples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
6.6.5 Museum Vouchers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
6.7 Equipment and Supply List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
iv
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
June 1994
TABLE OF CONTENTS (continued)
Section
Page
7
WATER AND SEDIMENT SAMPLING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.1 Secchi Transparency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.2 Water Sample Collection. . . . . . . . . . . . . .". . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7.3 Chlorophyll a Sample Collection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7.4 Zooplankton.................................................. 7-7
7.5 Sediment Diatom Sample Collection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -1 0
7.6 Equipment and Supply List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
8
BENTHIC INVERTEBRATE SAMPLING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.1 Site Selection and Sample Collection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.2 Sample Processing. . . . . . . . . . . : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8.3 Equipment and Supply List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8.4 Qualitative Zebra Mussel Survey. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8.4.1 Species Characteristics and Probable Habitat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8.4.2 Collection and Data Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
9
FINAL LAKE ACTIVITIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-'
9. 1 General Lake Assessment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.1 .1 Lake Site Activities and Disturbances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.1.2 General Lake Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.1.3 Shoreline Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ". . . . . . . . 9-5
9.1.4 Qualitative Macrophyte Survey. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.1.5 Environmental Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
9.2 Data Forms and Sample Inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
9.3 Launch Site Cleanup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-'0
Appendix
Page
A
Lake Visit Checklists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
B
Field Data Forms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .". . . . . . . . . . B-1
v
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
June 1 994
Figure
2-1
2-2
2-3
3-1
3-2
3-3
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-8
5-9
5-10
5-11
6-1
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-7
6-8
FIGURES
Page
Day 1 field sampling scenario. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Day 2 field sampling scenario. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Day 3 field sampling scenario. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Overview of base site activities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Performance test and calibration procedures for the YSI dissolved
oxygen meter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Sample container labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
lake verification and index site activities summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
lake Verification Form Side 2 ............................... 4-3
lake Verification Form Side 1 ............................... 4-6
lake verification checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Typical temperature and dissolved oxygen profile of a thermally
stratified lake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Performance test and calibration procedures for the dissolved
oxygen meter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
lake Profile Form Side 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
lake Profile Form Side 1 .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Dissolved oxygen and temperature profile procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . : . . 5-7
Habitat Sketch Map Form Side 1 ............................. 5-9
Physical Habitat Characterization Form Side 1 """"""""'" 5-11
Physical Habitat Characterization Form Side 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Physical Habitat Characterization Comments Form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5-13
Physical habitat characterization plot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Physical habitat assessment checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Summary of Fish Sampling Activities (page 1 of 2)--Day 1. """"'" 6-2
Summary of Fish Sampling Activities (page 2 of 2)--Day 2. """"'" 6-3
Physical Habitat Sketch Map Form, Page 2 .................,.... 6-9
Fish Tally Form--lakes Page 1 .............................. 6-16
Types of gill net sets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
The Fish Tally Continuation Form--lakes Page 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
The Fish Tally Form Page 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
Fish length Form--lakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
Fish Tissue Sample Tracking Form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
vi
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
June 1994
FIGURES (continued)
Figure
Page
6-9
6-9
6-9
6-9
6-9
6-9
Fish related activities equipment checklists (Page 1)
Fish related activities equipment checklists (Page 2)
Fish related activities equipment checklists (Page 3)
Fish related activities equipment checklists (Page 4)
Fish related activities equipment checklists (Page 5)
Fish related activities equipment checklists (Page 6)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 6-52
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 6-53
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 6-54
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 6-55
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 6-57
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-4
Water and sediment sampling activities summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Sample Collection Form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Sediment coring tube and sectioning apparatus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 7-13
Water and sediment sampling checklist (page 1) """""""'" 7-14
Water and sediment sampling checklist (page 2) ................, 7-15
8-1
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-5
8-6
8-7
Benthic invertebrate sampling activities summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Lake Profile Form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Process for selecting benthic sampling sites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Benthos Collection Form Side 1 ...................... . . . . . . . . 8-6
Benthos Collection Form Side 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Benthic invertebrate sampling checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 8-13
Zebra mussel (Dreissena polymorpha) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 8-14
9-1
9-2
9-3
Final lake activities summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Lake Assessment Form Side 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Lake Assessment Form Side 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
vii
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
June 1994
Table
2-1
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
4-1
4-2
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5 .
6-6
6-7
6-8
6-9
6-10
6-11
6-12
6-13
6-14
6-15
6-16
6-17
6-18
6-19
TABLES
Page
Guidelines for Recording Field Data and Other Information. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Magellan NA V 5000 Initialization Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Stock Solutions, Uses, and Methods for Preparation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Postsampling Equipment Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Sample Tracking Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 2
Weekly Generation of Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 5
Magellan NA V 5000 Global Positioning Systems Survey Procedures. . . . . 4-5
Locating the Index Site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
General Guidelines for Collecting Physical Habitat Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Steps Required to Complete Physical Habitat
Characterization Form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 7
Fish Littoral Macrohabitat Classification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Fish Littoral Microhabitat Classification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Number of Fish Sampling Stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Selecting Gill Net Locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . 6-8
Selecting Littoral Sampling Sites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Selecting Seining Sites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Onshore Preparation of Trap Nets and Minnow Traps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Onshore Preparation of Gill Nets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Setting Each Epilimnetic Gill Net. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Setting Each Bottom Gill Net--Hypolimnion and Metalimnion """'" 6-23
Setting Each Trap Net. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Retrieving Each Gill Net. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Retrieving Each Trap Net and Minnow Trap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Night Seining with the Beach Seine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Night Seining with the Short Seine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
General Fish Processing Chronology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Tallying, Examining, and Measuring Fish. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
Examining Fish for External Anomalies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
Final Selection of Fish Tissue Sample. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
Fish Tissue Sample Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
Overview of Fish Vouchering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
viii
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
June 1 994
TABLES (continued)
Table
Page
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-6
Secchi Disk Transparency Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . " . . . . . . . . 7-3
Operation of Van Dorn Sampler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Syringe and Cubitainer Sample Collection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Procedures for Collection and Filtration of Chlorophyll a Sample. . . . . . . . 7-8
Zooplankton Collection Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Collection Procedure for Sediment Diatom Cores. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 7-11
8-1
8-2
8-3
Collection Protocol for Benthic Sampling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Processing Benthic Sample. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 8-10
Qualitative Zebra Mussel Survey. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 8-16
9-1
9-2
9-3
Site Activities and Disturbances Observed at the lake. . . . . . . . . . .. . . 9-3
General lake Information Noted During Lake Assessment. . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Shoreline Characteristics Observed During Final Lake Assessment. . . . . . 9-6
ix
-------
- --~------_.._-- ~~---
INTERNAL REPORT
June 1 994
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
The editors wish to acknowledge the many contributions of Steve Paulsen (University of
Nevada, Las Vegas), Technical Director for the Environmental Monitoring and Assessment Program
(EMAP) Surface Waters Resource Group, as well as the Surface Waters participants in general who
have at times made contributions to and reviewed the plans for the 1 994 field work and this
document.
Ken Karwowski, Drew Major, and Laura Eaton (U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service); David Halliwell,
Pradeep Hirethota, Michael Connerton, Bryan Bernard, Ken Klubek, and John Kennon (College of
Environmental Science and Forestry at the State University of New York); and Diane Switzer and AI
Pratt (EPA Region 1) helped to. work out protocols and provided valuable comments on the plans for
1 994 field work.
Ray Thompson (EPA Region 1) and Randy Braun (EPA Region 2) provided essential support in
obtaining access permission from land owners. .
The editors would also like to thank Lockheed Environmental Systems & Technologies Co.
personnel Jan Aoyama and Pat Craig for their excellent word processing and editorial support, and
Bob Sheets for graphics and production support. The cooperation of the Michigan Sea Grant
Program, who provided the zebra mussel illustrations, is greatly appreciated.
The editors wish to extend special acknowledgment to the individual section authors for their
continuing development and improvement of this document. Section authors and their affiliation
are:
U.S. EPA Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory, Las Vegas, Nevada
Wesley L. Kinney
Lockheed Environmental Systems & Technologies Co. (Contract Number 68-CO-0049)
John R. Baker
Glenn D. Merritt
David V. Peck
ManTech Environmental Technologies, Inc. (Contract Number 68-C4-0019)
Thomas R. Whittier
Technology Applications, Inc. (Contract Number 68-C1-0022)
Roger Yeardley
Computer Sciences Corporation (Contract No. GS09K90BHD-001)
Victoria C. Rogers
Oregon State University (CR81B606 and CR816738)
Alan Herlihy
Phillip R. Kaufmann
Dartmouth College (Cooperative Agreement CR819689-01-0)
Richard Stemberger
Queens University (Cooperative Agreement CR821898)
Sushil S. Dixit
University of Nevada, Las Vegas (Cooperative Agreement CR818526-02)
Peter Vaux
x
-------
ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS
AERP
BPJ
ANC
cdfs
chi a
DBMS
ODT
01
OIC
OITI
DO
DOC
DOOs
EMAP
EMAP-SW
EPA
GIS
GPS
ha
10
IES
IFD
MATC
NIST
NSWS
OSHA
PAHs
PCA
PCBs
PE
PDR
P-Hab
PIRLA
ppm
OA
OA/OC
OAPjP
OC
SCS
SO
SRM
STARS
TIME
TL
TP
USFWS
USGS
VAX
YSI
INTERNAL REPORT
June 1994
Aquatic Effects Research Program
Best Professional Judgment
acid neutralizing capacity
cumulative distribution functions
chlorophyll a
data base management system
dichlorodiphenyltrichlorethane
deionized
dissolved inorganic carbon
diatom-based trophic index
dissolved oxygen
dissolved organic carbon
data quality objectives
Environmental Monitoring and Assessment Program
Environmental Monitoring and Assessment Program-Surface Waters
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Geographic Information System
Global Positioning System
hectare
identification
Indicator Evaluation Study
Industrial Facility Discharge File
maximum allowable tissue concentration
National Institute of Standards and Technology
National Surface Water Survey
Occupational Safety and Health Administration
polynuclear aromatic hydrocarbons
principal component analysis
polychlorinated biphenols
performance evaluation
portable data recorder
physical habitat
Paleolimnological Investigations of Recent lake Acidification
parts per million
quality assurance
quality assurance/quality control
quality assurance project plan
quality control
Soil Conservation Service
. Secchi disk transparency
standard reference material
Sample Tracking and Reporting System
Temporally Integrated Monitoring of Ecosvstems
total length
total phosphorus
United States Fish and Wildlife Service
United States Geological Survey
virtual address extension
Yellow Springs Instrument system
xi
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Introduction
June 1994
SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), in cooperation with other federal and
state organizations, has designed the Environmental Monitoring and Assessment Program (EMAP)
to periodically assess the condition of the Nation's ecological resources. This document provides
background and procedures for field personnel working with the EMAP Surface Waters Resource
Group, one of seven EMAP ecological resource groups. The EMAP Surface Waters Resource Group
focuses on monitoring and assessment of the condition of lakes and streams. This manual covers
field operations for lakes.
1.1 OVERVIEW OF EMAP SURFACE WATERS
EMAP will assist decision makers, both within and outside the Agency, to evaluate
the cumulative effectiveness of current environmental regulations in protecting the Nation's natural
resources, prioritize issues of concern and regions in which action is needed, and set environmental
policy. This Program is a strategy to identify and bound the extent, magnitude, and location of
degradation or improvement in the environment. When EMAP has been fully implemented, the
program will contribute to answering the following .critical questions:
.
What is the current extent of our ecological resources (e.g., estuaries, lakes, streams,
forests, and grasslands) and how are they distributed geographically?
.
What percentage of resources appears to be adversely affected by pollutants or other
anthropogenic environmental stresses?
.
Which resources are degrading or improving, where, and at what rate?
.
What are the relative magnitudes of the most likely causes of adverse effects?
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Introduction
June 1994
.
Are adversely affected ecosystems improving as expected in response to cumulative
effects of control and mitigation programs?
To answer these questions, the various, integrated monitoring networks within EMAP will
focus on the following objectives:
.
Estimate the current status, extent, changes, and trends in indicators of condition of
the Nation's ecological resources on a regional basis with known confidence.
.
Monitor indicators of pollutant exposure and habitat condition and seek associations.
between human-induced stresses and ecological condition that identify possible causes
of adverse effects.
.
Provide periodic statistical summaries and interpretive reports on ecological status and
trends to the EPA Administrator and to the public.
The EMAP Surface Waters resource group intends to estimate the condition of lakes,
reservoirs, streams, and rivers on a national scale as well as on relatively broad, regional scales.
The design of the program, which utilizes an integrated, probability-based monitoring framework
based on a systematic grid, is explained in detail in Paulsen et al. (1991) and Larsen and Christie
(1993). Data obtained from the program will allow estimation of the spatial extent and
geographical distribution of various classes of surface waters. Additionally, the program will
estimate the current status and changes or trends in indicators of ecological condition.
1.2 INDICATOR SUMMARY
Each of the following subsections describes biotic assemblages, environmental measures, or
attributes of indicators for EMAP Surface Waters lakes. In order to provide background
information for field personnel, these sections address the rationale for these measures and the
significance of various elements of the methodologies.
1-2
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Introduction
June 1994
1.2.1 Physical Habitat
The magnitude of aquatic ecosystem degradation and loss due to physical habitat
alterations in the United States may exceed that due to other human activities. The physical
habitat shoreline and littoral surveys that the Surface Waters field teams conduct serve three
purposes. First, this habitat information is absolutely essential to the interpretation of what lake
biological assemblages "should" be like in the absence of many types of anthropogenic impacts.
Second, the habitat evaluation is a reproducible, quantified estimate of habitat condition, serving as
a benchmark against which to compare future habitat changes that might result from anthropogenic
activities. Third, the habitat information the field teams collect has been selected specifically to aid
in the diagnosis of probable causes of ecological impairment in lakes.
In addition to the shoreline and littoral survey, the physical habitat description of each lake
includes many map-derived variables such as lake surface area, shoreline length, and shoreline
complexity. Furthermore, an array of information including watershed topography and land use
supplements the physical habitat information. The shoreline and littoral survey concentrates on
information best derived "on the ground.. As such, these survey results provide the all-important
linkage between large watershed-scale influences and those things that directly affect aquatic
organisms day to day. Together with water chemistry, the habitat measurements and observations
describe the variety of physical and chemical conditions that are necessary to support biological
diversity and foster long-term ecosystem stability. These characteristics of lakes and their
shorelines are the very things that are often changed as a result of anthropogenic activities.
The shoreline and littoral habitat survey employs a randomized, systematic design with 10
equally spaced observation stations located around the shore of each sample lake. Teams go to the
field with premarked lake outlines showing these stations. The observations at each station include
quantitative and semiquantitative observations of vegetation structure, anthropogenic disturbances,
and bank substrate onshore. In-lake littoral measurements and observations deal with littoral water
depth, bottom substrate, nearshore fish cover, and aquatic macrophyte cover. These observations
will be condensed (with quantifiable confidence) into descriptions applicable to the whole lakeshore
and littoral zone. For example, team observations will lead to quantitative descriptions such as the
mean canopy or aquatic macrophyte cover along the lakeshore, the extent of shoreline disturbed by
various human activities, and the dominant littoral substrate in the lake.
1-3
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Introduction
June 1 994
1 .2.2 Fish Assemblage
The major objectives for the fish assemblage indicator work are to collect an index sample
of the fish assemblage at each lake and to use the data derived from these samples to develop
metrics of biological integrity. For EMAP an index sample of lake fish is collected by (a) catching all
except rare species; (bl catching enough individuals to determine relative proportions of abundant
and common species, which species are uncommon or rare, and the general population structure of
abundant and common species; and (c) catching nonadults of naturally reproducing species.
Because of the various habitats in lakes, the habitat preferences of different species, and
habitat specificity of sampling gear, there is no single method to index fish assemblages in all lakes.
Therefore, EMAP Surface Waters uses a combination of gear types in a variety of habitats. The
challenge is to index fish assemblages in large numbers of lakes of varying sizes, physical
structures, and accessibility using multiple teams to collect samples and data. At each lake the
team assesses the presence and proportion of major fish habitats. All habitats are sampled
regardless of their expected productivity (gear are not placed to maximize catch), using a stratified
random protocol. Linoral habitats are classified by presence and type of cover and by substrate
type. Areas of extensive human modification are considered to be a habitat type. Samples are
collected in as many as five of the most extensive linoral habitats at each lake, as close as possible
to randomly chosen physical habitat stations.
Fish are collected with passive gear--gill nets set overnight in oxygenated midlake areas,
trap nets set overnight in linoral habitats, and minnow traps placed in shallow water with cover
near the trap nets. After sunset, appropriate locations are seined. The fish are identified to species
and examined for external gross pathology. long-lived species are measured for length (short-lived
species are recorded by size class). Specimens of all small fishes are preserved for archival storage
in a museum. At most lakes a sample consisting of five large fish is collected for tissue
contaminant analysis.
. We plan to evaluate several metrics of lake fish assemblages as indicators of biological
integrity including (1) species richness as a measure of assemblage diversity, (2) numbers of exotic
species and individuals relative to native species as a measure of biological stress and resiliency of
the native fauna, and (3) proportion of individuals sensitive to human perturbation relative to
proportion of tolerant species. In addition, we will evaluate combining several metrics into an
1-4
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Introduction
June 1994
overall index of biological integrity reflecting changes in the species structure related to individual
stressors, combinations of stresses, or reductions in impacts.
1 .2.3 Fish Tissue Contaminants
As an indicator of accumulation of toxic chemicals in the lake, levels of contaminants in fish
tissue can be used to estimate regional hazards to predators of fish, either wildlife or human, and to
track how this changes with time. The fish tissue contaminants indicator will also be used in
conjunction with other indicators (physical habitat, water chemistry, land use, population density,
other records of relevant anthropogenic stresses) to indicate probable causes of lake degradation,
when it is shown by the response indicators to occur. Analyses of fish tissue by EMAP Surface
Waters will be conducted for contaminants such as a number of organochlorinated pesticides, PCB
congeners, and heavy metals.
It would be optimal in representing fish bioaccumulation of contaminants, to collect samples
of both top predators and bottom feeders from each lake. However, since the resources don't exist
to analyze two separate composite samples from each lake, the EMAP Surface Waters fish tissue
contaminants indicator will focus on top predators (although we plan to get some fish from every
lake). Top predators were chosen primarily due to their ecological significance, being likely prey of
the consumers of main concern--piscivorous birds (including endangered raptors), mammals (e.g.,
mink, otter), and man. Bottom feeders are considered secondary target fish (lowest in the ranking
order) .
Various studies on fish tissue contaminants have focused on different parts of the fish;
whole fish, fillets, livers. The EMAP Surface Waters group will focus on whole fish because of the
Program's focus on the ecological health of the whole lake (as opposed to a focus solely on human
health concerns). Whole fish are a good ecological indicator and a better indicator of risk to
piscivorous wildlife than fillets, as wildlife (and some human consumers, Le., subsistence
fishermen) are likely to consume more parts of the fish than just the fillets. It will also be possible
to say something about risks to human health by analyzing whole fish. In addition, whole fish
present fewer logistical problems for field crews (no gutting required in the field; use of dry ice for
preserving and shipping is not necessary) and the analytical laboratory (no filleting necessary).
1-5
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Introduction
June 1994
Repeated lake samplings within the index period for fish tissue will answer two questions:
"Will repeat visits yield the same types and numbers of fish?" and, most importantly, "Will the 5-
fish composites from each of two visits yield the same value for level of contaminants in that
lake?" In trying to answer these questions and provide reproducible (useful) data, the field crews'
efforts to apply the protocol for sampling, handling, and shipping in a consistent manner are very
important.
1 .2.4 Water Chemistry and Associated Measurements
The primary functions of the lake water samples collected from the Van Dorn sampler and
the in situ water column measurements are to determine acid-base status, trophic state, and
classification of water chemistry type. lake water collected in Cubitainers is used to measure
major cations and anions, nutrients, turbidity, and color. The syringe samples are analyzed for pH,
dissolved inorganic carbon, and monomeric aluminum species (believed to be toxic to fish under
acidic conditions). Water samples are collected in sealed syringes to minimize contact with the
atmosphere; the pH, dissolved inorganic carbon, and aluminum present in the water sample will all
change if the lake water equilibrates with atmospheric carbon dioxide. Both the Cubitainers and the
syringes need to be shipped as soon as possible by overnight express mail because the syringe
samples need to be analyzed and the Cubitainer samples need to be stabilized (filtration and/or
acidification) within a short period of time (72 hours).
The filter paper from the lake water filtration is used to determine the chlorophyll
concentration, an indicator of algal biomass in the lake. The filtration (and filter paper) should be
shielded from light as much as possible because light breaks down chlorophyll.
Throughout the water chemistry sampling process it is important to take precautions to
avoid contaminating the sample. Many of the lakes have a very low ionic strength (i.e., very low
levels of chemical constituents) and the samples can be contaminated quite easily by perspiration
from hands, sneezing, smoking, suntan lotion, insect repellent, other chemicals used during sample
collection (e.g., the narcotizing agent used for zooplankton or formalin), or fumes from gasoline
engines.
'-6
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Introduction
June 1994
1.2.5 Zooplankton
Zooplankton are important components of the open water environment of lakes and ponds.
Most species are microscopic and consist of crustaceans (copepods, cladocerans, and opossum
shrimp), rotifers ("wheel-animals"), pelagic insect larvae (phantom midge), and aquatic mites. In
lakes of the northeastern United States, more than 200 species have been recorded. Zooplankton
are important elements of the food chain where they transfer energy from algae (primary producers)
to larger invertebrate predators and fish. The zooplankton species assemblage respond to
environmental stressors such as nutrient enrichment, acidification, and fish stocks. The effects of
environmental stress can be detected through changes in species composition and abundance, body
size distribution, and food web structure.
Body size (0.05 to 15 mm long) and swimming abilities vary greatly among zooplankton
species. Some species can swim fast enough to avoid being caught by the net. Therefore, we use
two kinds of nets to optimize capture of size-based fractions--a coarse mesh net for fast swimming
macrozooplankton (~600 pm long) and a fine mesh net for the microzooplankton (< 600 pm long).
The net is hauled from about 0.5 m off the bottom to the surface in the deepest part of the lake. It
is important to avoid bottom sediments which clog the net pores and make the sample unusable. If
bottom sediments occur in the sample, the net must be washed out and the procedure repeated.
The net should be towed slowly (about 0.5m/sec) to reduce the pressure wave at the "bow" of the
net. Some species can detect this frontal wave and swim out of the path of the net. The reducing
collar on the fine mesh net decreases the volume of water passing through the net, thus increasing
the filtration efficiency of the net and reducing the pressure wave problem. Because the net
phytoplankton and debris are collected primarily in the fine mesh sample, laboratory preparation and
processing is greatly facilitated for the macrozooplankton fraction. Finally, it is important to
thoroughly rinse the nets to avoid contaminating later samples with species that may adhere to the
inner sides of the net. Placing the nets into a mild bleach solution will help alleviate this problem
and reduce the possibility of spreading resistant stages of exotic species to other lakes.
As the summer progresses, wind-driven mixing will enlarge the warm water epilimnion and
reduce the cold water hypolimnion. This mixing becomes increasingly important in small, shallow
(10 to 15 m deep) lakes where the later summer, cold water hypolimnion may be only 1 to 3
meters thick. Therefore, when sampling such lakes, it is very important to take the tow at the
deepest spot. Missing the deep spot by 1 or 2 meters of depth can miss such a cold water stratum
1-7
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Introduction
June 1994
and greatly confound interpretation of the true species assemblage in such lakes. This possibility is
a concern for fish as well as zooplankton samples.
1.2.6 Sediment Diatoms
The diatom indicator is unique in that it can potentially tell us the "original" or pristine
condition of the lake. None of the other indicators can provide this information. Thus, sampling
the sediments in a precise and consistent manner is particularly critical. To assess the original
condition, sediments dating from that time need to be collected. A general understanding of the
diatom indicator and the sampling and analysis process will enhance sample collection.
The diatom cell wall is composed of silicon dioxide and is preserved in lake sediments.
Markings on the cell wall are used to distinguish species and even varieties. Dozens of different
species occur in any lake and its drainage basin, many of which end up in the sediments at the
center of the lake. Each of the species has slightly different environmental requirements; for many
species, these requirements are known. By studying the diatom community, it is possible to make
inferences about the previous conditions in the lake and its basin. To study the microscopic cells,
the sediments are cleaned of organic matter with strong oxidizing agents and slides are made. The
analysis is made by identifying and counting 500 individual cells. Any contamination of the
samples can produce significant errors in the resulting interpretation. Samplers must be careful not
to contaminate the bottom sample with higher levels of the core or with lake water or with the
tools used to collect the sample (i.e., the corer, core tube, and spatulas) and not to mix the top
layer with the deeper sediments, which would obscure small changes in community structure which
are critical to monitoring trends.
The 1991 pilot study indicated that some productive lakes were not sampled at a deep
enough level to get a sample of sediments representing the preindustrial condition. Samplers
should make an effort to get at least a 45-cm core from all lakes that have a secchi reading of 2.5
meters or less. Some judgment will be necessary. For example, if the lake is artificial, there is no
point in sampling through its sediments into the soil profile below. For most other lakes a core 35
cm in length will be fine.
Since an undisturbed sediment sample is needed, outboard motors should not be used in
shallow lakes near the sampling site nor should there be vigorous use of paddles or oars. If for
1-8
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Introduction
June 1994
some reason the first core is not satisfactory, a second try should be made in another spot. If the
boat is well-anchored, the second try could simply be on the other side of the boat. If a corer
begins to malfunction frequently, another should be acquired. The team should keep good notes--
for example, if it is not possible to get a 45-cm core in a lake that seems to be very productive, the
notes should explain the situation.
1 .2.7 Benthic Invertebrate Assemblages
Bottom dwelling invertebrates have long been used as indicators of water Quality
throughout this country and abroad. In the United States their use as living monitors of
environmental conditions has principally been applied in environmental assessments of rivers and
streams. However, European biologists have used benthic invertebrates for purposes of classifying
lakes as to trophic status since the 1920s. Although their use for this purpose has not been as
widespread in North America as it has been in Europe, these organisms show great potential as
indicators of the biotic integrity and ecological condition of this Nation's lakes and reservoirs.
Freshwater benthic invertebrates are those. organisms that spend at least part of their life
cycles in or upon the substrates of aquatic systems. They are represented by forms that cling to,
burrow in, or crawl over the sediments or other substrata of waterways and waterbodies. The
larger forms that can be seen with the unaided eye and retained by a U.S. Standard No. '30 mesh
sieve (28 meshes per inch and openings of 595 p) are the benthic macrofauna or
macroinvertebrates. It has become customary within the EPA to focus on these larger forms
because they are relatively easy to separate from debris and to identify. This bias toward the larger
animals undoubtedly can be traced back to the days when invertebrates were sampled principally to
provide an estimate of the forage available for fish, since most of the animal biomass within and
upon a unit area of substrate is contained within the larger animals. Secondly, the very early
instars of insect larvae are difficult to identify reliably and, until fairly recently, good taxonomic
descriptions of small oligochaetes (naidid worms) were not available.
In the lake sediment sample, the small benthic invertebrates that pass through a No. 30
mesh sieve may far outnumber those larger animals retained by the sieve. Because these small
organisms contribute substantially to the total taxonomic diversity and standing stock of all benthic
assemblages, to exclude them from the analyses of invertebrate samples could result in the loss of
considerable information about the biological integrity of the system in question. For this reason
1-9
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Introduction
June 1994
we have elected not to restrict our analyses to the macroinvertebrates, but to include all true,
identifiable benthic animals that are retained by a U.S. Standard No. 60 mesh sieve (60 meshes per
inch and openings of 250 p). Excluded from the analyses are the copepods, cladocerns, and other
. .
forms that are not necessarily true benthic dwellers or that are not reliably identifiable by most
aquatic biologists beyond broad taxonomic groups.
Currently there are a number of indices of biotic integrity for invertebrate assemblages in
streams, but these indices have not been widely applied to lake assemblages. Considerable
research is needed to evaluate and modify those indices for application to lake benthos. It is our
intent to focus on the most promising metrics and indices for purposes of validating their use as a
measure of biological integrity of lakes and reservoirs.
Benthos sampling is restricted to the sublittoral zones of EMAP grid lakes. Single modified
K-B (Glew) corer samples are taken in the soft, weedless sediments at similar depths at 10
approximately evenly spaced locations around the perimeters of each lake. Each of the 10 sites
corresponds to the 1 0 physical habitat observation stations located during the physical habitat and
lake shoreline survey. In thermally stratified lakes, the samples are taken in well-oxygenated areas
at depths equal to or less than the depth where the upper limits of the metalimnion intersect the
lake bottom. In nonstratified lakes, samples are collected in weedless areas at depths greater than
1 M.
Only the upper 13 em of each core sample is retained for analysis, as the uppermost
sediments contain the majority of the animals. We will composite the top portion of core samples
from alternate sites at each lake (i.e., composite five samples per lake into a single sample) and to
process the amount of pooled material required to yield 150 identifiable individuals. This
procedure is accomplished by dividing the composited sample into 8 equal fractions and processing
individual fractions until 150 animals have been sorted from the debris. Once the target number of
animals has been achieved, the entire fraction of the sample being examined is completely
processed. If a minimum of 150 animals cannot be obtained from the initial 5-sample composite,
the remaining 5 samples is composited and the process repeated until at least 150 animals have
been sorted from the composited fractions. Once the individuals have been identified, the numbers
are normalized to numbers per tenth of a square meter of substrate surface area.
1-10
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Introduction
June 1994
In addition, a qualitative survey for the exotic zebra mussel will be made at each physical
habitat station. and at the launch site. The crews will look for mussels attached to hard substrates
and collect and preserve an example if any are found. This activity is meant to record and
document whether the presence of adult zebra mussel is detected or not for each lake. The larval
forms may be detected in the zooplankton collections.
1.2.8 lake Assessment or Site Characteristics
Observations and impressions made on the lake by the field teams are extremely valuable
for ecological value assessment, development of associations and stressor indicators, and data
verification and validation. Thus, it is important that observations of the field teams about lake
characteristics be recorded for future data interpretation and validation. The form provided for this
purpose is designed as a template for recording pertinent field observations. It is by no means
comprehensive and any additional observations should be recorded in the "Comments" section.
The form should be completed at the end of the lake sampling, taking into account all observations
the sampling team has made while on site.
1.2.9 Riparian Bird Assemblage
The riparian bird assemblage measures are being developed as an indicator of riparian zone
condition and its role linking aquatic condition with terrestrial sources of disturbance. Observations
in the 1 993 Demonstration are intended to evaluate measurement variablility among EMAP grid
lakes during the spring index period and to determine which species and guild combinations provide
the most information about ecosystem condition. Other goals are to correlate avian guild rankings
of sensitive and tolerant taxa, trophic groups, wetland dependent species, and habitat specialists
with the range of conditions presented at the sampled lakes. Observations are made by
cooperators from the University of Maine. Teams of ornithologists generally visit the EMAP grid
lakes between late May and early July each year. At each lake, a crew traverses a shore transect
by canoe around the shore, stopping every 200 m to record birds seen or heard within a 5-minute
period and to record habitat information.
1-11
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Introduction
June 1994
1.3 OBJECTIVES AND SCOPE OF THE FIELD OPERATIONS MANUAL
This document describes the field protocols and operations for continuing investigations of
the EMAP Surface Waters lakes. Field operations activities are described in two separate
documents. The field operations manual (this document) describes field protocols, OA/OC
procedures, and operations directly related to EMAP Surface Waters that are consistent across all
regions. Section 2 provides a summary of daily field operations. Section 3 describes base site
activities both before departure to a site and after sampling. Sections 4 through 6 describe the
protocols for the first day in the field, and Sections 6 through 9 describe protocols for activities
conducted the second day at a site. Checklists for equipment. and supplies required to conduct
various activities are presented as Appendix A. Appendix B contains a complete set of blank field
data forms.
The second document, a regional activities plan, contains operations and safety information
and other procedures that apply to a specific region or project. This volume is developed by the
various organizations in a region implementing the field program and will vary from region to region
because of different regional requirements.
A field quick reference handbook containing tables and figures summarizing protocols and
other pertinent information from the field operations m8nual and the Regional Activities Plan is
provided to each crew. This waterproof handbook is the primary field reference used by field teams
after an intensive 2- to 3-week training program. Each field team are also provided with an
information management handbook containing instructions for using computers and associated
hardware and software for tracking samples and generating sampling status reports. The field
teams are also required to keep the field operations manual available in the field for further protocol
clarification. In addition, each crew is provided a copy of the integrated OA plan for EMAP-SW
(Chaloud and Peck, 1994) that contains more detailed information regarding OA/OC activities
associated with general field operations, sample collection, and measurement data collection for
specific indicators, and data reporting activities.
1-12
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Introduction
June 1994
1.4 REFERENCES
Chaloud, D. J., and D. V. Peck (editors). 1994. Environmental Monitoring and Assessment
Program: Integrated Quality Assurance Plan for the Surface Waters Resource Group--1994
Activities. EPA/600/X-91/080. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Las Vegas, Nevada.
Larsen, D. P., and S. J. Christie, eds. 1993. EMAP Surface Waters 1991 Pilot Report.
EPA/620/R-93/003. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Research Laboratory,
Corvallis, Oregon.
Paulsen, S. G., D. P. Larsen, P. R. Kaufmann, T. R. Whittier, J. R. Baker, D. V. Peck, J. McGue,
R. M. Hughes, D. McMullen, D. Stevens, J. L. Stoddard, J. Lazorchak, W. Kinney, A. R.
Selle, and R. Hjort. 1991. EMAP-Surface Waters Monitoring and Research Strategy Fiscal
Year 1991. EPA/600/3-91/022. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental
Research Laboratory-Corvallis, Oregon.
1-13
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Introduction
June 1994
NOTES
1-15
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Introduction
June 1994
NOTES
1-16
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Introduction
June 1994
NOTES
1-17
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Introduction
June 1994
NOTES
1-18
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Daily Operations Summary
June 1 994
SECTION 2
DAILY OPERATIONS SUMMARY
by
John R. Baker and David V. Peck
2.1 SAMPLING SCENARIO
Two days are required to sample most lakes. A third day is allotted for predeparture and
postsampling activities (e.g., cleaning equipment, repairing gear, shipping samples, and travel to the
next lake). In a normal week, if there is no down time due to weather or supply problems, a
sampling team can sample two lakes over 6 days. larger lakes (> 74 ha) require additional travel
time on the lake and 3 to 4 days are scheduled to sample these lakes.
A field team is usually composed of three to four people. Additional people are used on
teams sampling large lakes or hike-in lakes. Two people are always in the boat to execute the
sampling activities and ensure safety. The remaining team member{s) usually remains on shore to
provide logistical support. Team members should rotate between boat and shore activities.
A daily field sampling scenario showing how the work load may be split between team
members is presented in figures 2-1 through 2-3. Each field team should work with and modify
this scenario, defining roles and responsibilities for each team member, to organize field activities
efficiently. Most roles and responsibilities should be defined by the end of the training program.
The sequence of sampling events presented in figures 2-1 through 2-3 cannot be changed
without prior direction from the Communications Center. The sequence is based partially on the
need to protect some types of samples from potential contamination and to minimize holding times
once samples are collected. The following sections further define the sampling sequence and the
protocols for sampling activities.
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Daily Operations Summary
June 1 994
DAY 1 ACTIVITIES
ARRIVE AT LAKE SITE
I
SHORE (1 Person)
. Set up staging area
. Prepare fishing gear. forms. and supplies
. Prepare for benthos sampling (if done on
Cay 1)
BOAT (2 Persons)
. Verify lake and launch site
. Lold lake profile and physical habitat equipment and
ro~ .
. Launch boat. locate and anchor at index site
. Conduct lake profile
. Mark index site
. Conduct habitat characterizations
. Locate benthos sampling sites. collect benthos samples.
and conduct zebra mussel survey (if feasible on Day 1)
RETURN TO SHORE
-
DETERMINE FISHING GEAR DEPLOYMENT
I
SHORE (1 Person)
. Prepare forms and voucher jars
. Assist with loading boat
. Continue preparing staging area
. Prepare for night seining
. Preserve benthos samples (if collected) and
prepare for transport
BOAT (2 Persons)
. Lold boat
. Deploy fishing gear
RETURN TO SHORE
I
SHORE (1 Person)
. Prepare for night seining
BOAT (2 Persons)
. Check gill nets (If necessary)
RETURN TO SHORE
I
SHORE (3 Persons)
. Process fish from gill nets (if necessary)
. Prepare for night seining
NIGHT SEINING
I
BOAT (3 Persons)
. Conduct seining
-
RETURN TO SHORE
SHORE (3 Persona)
. Process fish from seining
. Load equipment and supplies
. Clean up launch site
. Trailer boat (if necessary)
. Review data forms
FtOOPS9>t PPT
RETURN TO CAMP OR BASE SITE
. Contact Communications Center
-
Figure 2-1. Day 1 field sampling scenario.
2-2
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Daily Operations Summary
June 1994
DAY 2 ACTIVITIES
I
ARRIVE AT LAKE SITE
SHORE (1 Person)
. Set up staging area
. Prepare for fish tissue processing
. Prepare equipment and supplies for water and
sediment sampling
BOAT (2 Persons)
. Load fISh processing supplies and forms
. Launch boat
. Retrieve fIShing gear
. Tally fISh for each gear set
. Prepare vouchers and tissue specimens
I
RETURN TO SHORE
SHORE (1 Person)
. Process fish tissue samples
. Prepare voucher jars for transport
. Prepare equipment and supplies for benthos
sampling (if not completed on Day 1)
BOAT (2 Persons)
. Loadequiprnent and supplies for water and
sediment sampling
. Locate index site. determine Secchi transparency,
and collect samples
,
RETURN TO SHORE
SHORE (1 Person)
. Check and prepare water and sediment
samples for transport
. Clean and organize equipment for loading
FLOOPS9ol PPT
BOAT (2 Persons)
. Load equipment and supplies for benthos sampling (if
nol collected on Day 1) .
. Locate physical habitat stations and sampling sites
. Collect samples and conduct zebra mussel survey(if
nol accomplished on Day 1)
. Remove site mart(ers
I
RETURN TO SHORE
SHORE (3 Persons)
. Check and prepare benthos samples for transport
. Complete Lake Assessment Form
. Conduct final review of data forms and samples
. Load vehicle and boat
. Clean up staging area
. Inspect and clean boat, molar. and trailer to prevent
transfer of nuisance species
RETURN TO CAMP OR BASE SITE
. Contact CommunicatiorlS Center
"""
Figure 2-2. Day 2 field sampling scenario.
2-3
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Daily Operations Summary
June 1994
DAY 3 ACTIVITIES
TRAVEL TO NEXT CAMP OR BASE SITE
I
I
POST -SAMPLING ACTIVITIES
1 Person
. Prepare samples and fonns for shipment
2 Person.
. Clean boat. trailer, and equipment
. Inventory supplies
. Repair equipment
MEET FIELD COORDINATOR
(every 7 to 10 day..
. Transfer fish voucher samples
TRAVEL TO AIR COURIER FACIUTY
. Generate shipping forms with Sample Tracking and .
Reporting System
. Ship samples
. Ship completed data fonns
. Ship tracking diskettes
ARRIVE AT NEXT BASE SITE
. Prepare for predeparture activities
. Contact Communications Center to file status report and
itinerary for next lake
PREDEPARTURE ACTIVITIES
I
1 Person
. Review lake dossier
. Prepare itinerary
. Confirm access permission
2 Person.
. Perform meter performance checks
. Check and load equipment and supplies
. Conduct safety checks
FlOOPSIU PPT
Figure 2-3. Day 3 field sampling scenario.
2-4
-
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Daily Operations Summary
June 1994
Day 1
Sampling activities on the first day will extend past dusk. The team should arrive at the
lake before midmorning to accomplish all of these activities. The sampling sequence for Day 1 is:
.
verify lake and locate index site
.
conduct depth profile measurements of dissolved oxygen and temperature
.
conduct physical habitat characterization. (Optional: collect benthos sample and
conduct zebra mussel survey.)
.
deploy fishing gear
.
check gill nets (if required by permit) and conduct night seining activities.
Protocols for these activities are described in Sections 4 through 6.
Day 2
A full day is required for Day 2 sampling activities. The team should arrive at the lake in
the early morning to complete the sampling at a reasonable time. The sampling sequence for Day 2
is:
.
retrieve fish gear and tally fish
.
process fish tissue samples
.
prepare fish voucher specimens
.
determine Secchi disk transparency
.
collect water chemistry samples and filter chlorophyll sample
2-5
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Daily Operations Summary
June 1994
.
collect zooplankton samples
.
collect sediment diatom samples
.
collect benthos samples (if not previously collected) and conduct zebra mussel
survey.
Protocols for these activities are described in Sections 6 through 9.
A third day is allotted for these lake activities on large lakes (> 74 ha) with only half the
fish gear set out on Day 1; the first half of the gear is retrieved and the second half is set out on
Day 2. On Day 3 the second half of the gear is retrieved and the remainder of Day 2 activities are
completed.
Day 3
Section 3 discusses Day 3 activities at a base site that consist of preparations required
before departing for a lake site and of postsampling activities required after leaving the lake site.
2.2 RECORDING DATA AND OTHER INFORMATION
During the 2- to 3-day period visit to a lake, a field crew is required to obtain and record a
substantial amount of data and other information for all of the various ecological indicators
described in Section 1. In addition, all the various samples collected need to be identified and
tracked, and associated information for each sample must be recorded.
It is imperative that field and sample information be recorded accurately, consistently, and
legibly. Measurement data that cannot be accurately interpreted by others besides the field crews,
and/or samples with incorrect or illegible information associated with them, are lost to the program.
The cost of a sampling visit coupled with the short index period severely limits the ability to
resample a lake because the initial information recorded was inaccurate or illegible. Some
guidelines to assist field personnel with information recording are presented in Table 2-1.
2-6
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Daily Operations Summary
June 1994
Activity
TABLE 2-1. GUIDB.INES FOR RECORDING RB.D DATA AND OTHER INFORMATION
Guidelines
Data Recording
Data Qualifiers
(Flags)
Review of Data
Forms
Field Measurements:
Record measurement values and/or observations on data forms preprinted
on water-resistant paper.
Record information on forms using No.2 pencil only (fine-point indelible
fine-tipped markers can be used if necessary).
Record data and information using correct format as provided on
data forms.
Print legibly (and as large as possible). Clearly distinguish letters from
numbers (e.g., 0 versus 0, 2 versus Z, 7 versus Tor F, etc.), but do
not use slashes.
In cases where information is to be recorded repeatedly on a series of
lines (e.g., fish species codes or physical habitat characteristics), do
not use "ditto marks" (") or a straight vertical line. Record the
information that is repeated on the first and last lines, then connect
these using a wavy vertical line.
When recording comments, print or write legibly. Make notations in
comments field only; avoid marginal notes, etc. Be concise, but
avoid using abbreviations and/or "shorthand" notations. If you run
out of space, attach a sheet of paper with the additional information,
rather than trying to squeeze everything into the space provided on
the form.
Use only defined flag codes and record on data form in appropriate field.
K
Q
U
Fn
Measurement not attempted and/or not recorded.
Failed quality control check; remeasurement not possible.
Suspect measurement; remeasurement not possible.
Miscellaneous flags (n = 1, 2, etc.) assigned by a field crew
during a particular sampling visit (also used for qualifying
samples) .
Explain all flags in comments section on data form.
Field crew reviews data forms for accuracy, completeness,
and legibility before leaving lake.
Data forms from all crews are reviewed for consistency, correctness, and
legibility by a Field Coordinator and/or at the Communications Center
before transfer to Information Management Center.
(continued
2-7
-------
,-
INTERNAL REPORT
Daily Operations Summary
June 1994
Activity
Sample Labels
Sample Collection
Information
Sample Qualifiers
(Flags)
Review of Labels
and Collection
Forms
TABLE 2-' (continued)
Guidelines
Sample Collection and Tracking
Use adhesive labels with preprinted ID numbers and a standard recording
format for each type of sample.
Record information on labels using a fine-point indelible marker. Cover
completed labels with clear tape.
Record sample ID number from label and associated collection
information on sample collection form preprinted on water-resistant
paper.
Record information on forms using No.2 pencil only (fine-point indelible
fine-tipped markers can be used if necessary).
Record collection information using correct format as provided on
the collection form.
Use only defined flag codes and record on sample collection form in
appropriate field.
.
K
Sample not collected or lost before shipment; resampling not
possible.
Suspect sample (e.g., possible contamination, does not meet
minimum acceptability requirements, or collected by non-
standard procedure)
Miscellaneous flags (n = 1, 2, etc.) assigned by a field crew
during a particular sampling visit (also used for field
measurements) .
U
Fn
Explain all flags in comments section on sample collection form.
Field crew compares information recorded on labels and sample collection
form for accuracy before leaving lake.
Field crew reviews labels and collection form for accuracy, completeness,
and legibility before leaving lake.
Sample collection forms from all crews are reviewed for consistency,
correctness, and legibility by a Field Coordinator and/or at the
Communications Center before transfer to Information Management
Center.
2-8
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Daily Operations Summary
June 1994
NOTES
2-9
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Daily Operations Summary
June 1994
NOTES
2-10
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Daily Operations Summary
June 1 994
NOTES
2-"
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Daily Operations Summary
June 1994
NOTES
2-12
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Base Site Activities
June 1994
SECTION 3
BASE SITE ACTIVITIES
by
Glenn D. Merritt, David V. Peck, and Victoria C. Rogers
Field teams conduct a number of activities at their base site. These include tasks that must
be completed both before departure to the lake site and after return from the site (Figure 3-11. A
full day is allotted to these predeparture and postsampling activities. Close attention to these
activities is required to ensure that the field teams know where they are going, access is possible
and permissible, equipment and supplies are at the lake in good order to complete the sampling
effort, and samples are shipped appropriately. All activities are coordinated through the Field
Coordinator who provides team supervision.
3.1 PREDEPARTURE ACTIVITIES
Predeparture activities include development of sampling itineraries, instrument calibration,
equipment checks and repair, supply inventories, and sample container preparation. Procedures for
these activities are described in the following sections.
3.1.1 Daily Itineraries
The Field Coordinators are responsible for developing sampling schedules and Team leaders
are responsible for developing daily itineraries. The Team leader reviews each lake dossier to
ensure it contains the appropriate maps, contacts, copies of permission letters, and access
instructions. Additional activities include confirming the best access routes, calling the landowners
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Base Site Activities
June 1994
BASE SITE ACTIVITIES
BASE OR CAMP SITE
Team Leader Crew Members
. Prepare itinerary . Test and calibrate oxygen meter
. Make access contacts . Initialize GPS (if necessary)
. Prepare sample containers and
labels
. Pack equipment and supplies using
checklist
SAMPLE LAKE
NEXT BASE OR CAMP SITE
Crew Members
. Clean and check boat. trailer, and equipment
. Charge or replace batteries
. Refuel vehicle and boat
. Obtain ice and other consumable supplies as
needed
Team Leader
. Review forms and labels
. Enter sample tracking information into computer
. Package and ship samples and data forms
. File status report with Communications Center
. Review lake dossier information
FlOOPS94 PPt
Figure 3-1. Overview of base site activities.
3-2
-
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Base Site Activities
June 1994
or local contacts, confirming lodging plans, and coordinating rendezvous locations with individuals
who must meet with field teams prior to accessing a site. This information is used to develop an
itinerary. Each Team leader is required to provide the Field Coordinator (through the
Communications Center) with a team schedule for each week of sampling. Schedules include
departure time, estimated duration of excursion, routes of travel, location of any overnight stops
(including telephone number), and estimated time of arrival at the final destination for each lake and
for each day. The portable computer is furnished with Automap~, a software package that
provides general assistance in planning routes to the site. Changes in the itinerary 'during the week
must also be relayed by the Team Leader through the Communications Center to the Field
Coordinator as soon as possible. Miscommunications can result in the initiation of expensive search
and rescue procedures and disruption of carefully planned schedules. Communications
requirements and schedules are described in the regional activities plan.
3.1.2 Instrument Checks and Calibration
Each of the field teams is required to test and calibrate instruments prior to departure for
the lake site. Field instruments include a Yellow Springs Instrument (YSI) Model 57 dissolved
oxygen (DO) meter equipped with a 60-m cable and a Magellan NA V 5000 Global Positioning
System (GPS) receiver. Additional backup instruments are available through the Field Coordinator if
instruments fail the performance tests or calibrations described in the following subsections.
3.1.2.1 Dissolved Oxygen Meter Performance Test--
Test and precalibrate the DO meter prior to departure from the lodging location. The DO
meter performance test (and calibration procedure) is summarized in Figure 3-2. Turn on the
instrument, place the function selection switch to "ZERO," and adjust the electronic zero. Verify
that the salinity switch is turned to the "ZERO-FRESH" position. Set the function selection switch
knob to "RED LINE" and align the needle with the red line using the adjustment knob. . Replace the
batteries if the instrument will not adjust to the red line. These checks and adjustments ensure that
the batteries are charged and the electronics are functional.
Follow this procedure by checking the membrane of the DO probe. If bubbles are present,
if the membrane is discolored, or if the membrane is torn, use a backup probe and replace the
3-3
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Base Site Activities
June 1994
DISSOLVED OXYGEN METER PERFORMANCE CHECK
. TURN METER ON
. ADJUST ELECTRONIC ZERO
. ADJUST SAUNITV KNOB (O-FRESH)
FAIL
REPLACE
BATTERIES
OR METER
FAIL
. INSERT PROBE INTO CAUBRAnON
CHAMBER
. OPEN AIR VALVE
. IMMERSE IN WATER BATH FOR
15 MINUTES TO EQUIUBRATE
FAIL
REPLACE
PROBE
ANDIOR
OR METER
. CAUBRATE METER TO THEOREnCAL O2
VALUE FOR WATER-SATURATED AIR AT
CHAMBER TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE
NO
, TAKE METER TO LAKE
FlDOPS94 PPT
&90
Figure 3-2. Performance test and calibration procedures for the YSI dissolved oxygen meter.
3-4
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Base Site Activities
June 1994
membrane on the original probe. (Note: new membranes must stabilize for 24 hours before use if
possible.) .
To test whether the DO meter can be calibrated, place the probe in an air-filled calibration
chamber. Submerge the chamber in a water bath with the air valve open and the air tube above
water. After thermally equilibrating for 15 minutes, determine the chamber temperature by turning
the function selection switch to "TEMPERATURE." Check temperatures measured with the
thermistor against an accurate thermometer. If temperatures differ by more than :t 1.0 °C, replace
the probe. Determine the theoretical DO concentration for water-saturated air at the chamber
temperature by using the temperature and altitude-correction factor tables provided on the back of
the meter or in the manufacturer's operation manual. Multiply the theoretical DO by the altitude-
correction factor (estimated to the nearest 100-ft elevation) to get the calibration DO value. Then
set the function selection switch to one of two DO scales, and adjust the DO calibration knob to
the calibration DO value. Do not record the predeparture (at the base site) performance test
information. The meter will be calibrated again at the lake. Calibration information will be recorded
at that time.
If the instrument will not pass the predeparture performance test and calibration, replace
the meter and/or probe. After the test, turn the meter off, fill the calibration chamber with tap
water, and insert the probe for storage. Each field crew has a copy of the manufacturer's
calibration procedures and maintenance information.
3.1.2.2 GPS Battery Check and Position Initialization--
Turn on the GPS receiver and check the batteries prior to departure. During the self-test
procedure the display indicates battery operation by displaying n battery power." Low battery
power is indicated by a battery symbol that appears in the lower right-hand corner of the display.
This symbol remains until the batteries are replaced. Replace batteries immediately if a battery
warning is displayed.
WARNING: The batteries must be replaced when you see the second warning display:
"REPLACE BATTS OR LOSE DATA." If shut off within 2 minutes of this display, the unit will retain
memory for a month. In addition. changing the battery pecks must be completed within 2 minutes
or the memory will be lost.
3-5
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Base Site Activities
June 1 994
Initialize the GPS receiver prior to departure. Instructions for initializing the unit are in
Table 3-1. Initialization will be effective at sites located within 300 miles of the current location.
TABLE 3-1. MAGELLAN NAV 5000 INITIALIZATION PROCEDURES
1.
Turn unit ON.
2.
At the "READY" display, push "SETUP."
3.
Press "CLEAR" to erase previous position.
4.
Enter latitude of a known reference point to nearest degree (from a USGS quadrangle map).
Trailing zeroes are entered automatically. Press "-" to get "N" display. Press "ENTER" to
store. a
5.
Enter longitude of the reference point to nearest degree (from a USGS quadrangle map).
Trailing zeroes are entered automatically. Press "-" to get W displayed. Press "ENTER" to
store. a
6.
Press "~" and then "CLEAR" to erase altitude. Enter altitude to the nearest 50 feet. Press
"ENTER" to store.
7.
Initialization completed. Turn unit OFF or press "POS" for position.
a Entering the latitude and longitude to the nearest degree in steps 4 and 5 will approximate
position within 300 miles of present location.
3.1.3 Equipment Preparation
To ensure that all activities at a lake can be conducted completely and efficiently, field
teams are required to check all equipment and supplies before traveling to a lake site. In addition,
they are required to label and assemble packets of sample containers.
Check the inventory of supplies and equipment prior to departure using the lake-visit
checklists. Appendix A contains a complete set of checklists. Use these checklists to ensure that
all needed materials are taken to each lake; use of the lists is mandatory. Pack meters, probes, and
sampling gear in such a way as to minimize physical shock and vibration during transport. If
necessary, prepare stock preservation solutions as described in Table 3-2. Follow the regulations of
the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). Those pertaining to formalin are in 29
3-6
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Base Site Activities
June 1994
CFR 1910.1048 (see regional activities plan). Add 10 mL of saturated sucrose solution to 4 mL of
stock formalin (100%; pH 7-8) to each of two zooplankton sample bonles, using either a syringe or
a bonle labeled with the appropriate volumes. Seal the jars with electrical tape prior to departure
and place each jar in a 1-qt Ziploc bag.
TABLE 3-2. STOCK SOLUTIONS, USES, AND METHODS FOR PREPARATION
SOLUTION USE PREPARATION
Bleach Clean nets, other gear, and inside Add 400 mL Clorox to 3,600 mL
(10%) of boat. distilled water.
Sucrose To equalize osmotic pressure of Add 320 g granular sucrose per liter of
(saturated) zooplankton samples. distilled water. Chill. Add 1 to 2 mL
formalin per liter as preservative.
Borax Preservative for fish vouchers and Add 400 g Twenty Mule Team Borax
Buffered for zooplankton samples. to each 20-L carton of 100% formalin.
Formalin8 Test with pH paper.
(pH 7-8)
Carbonate Preservative for benthic Add 500 g Na2C03 to each 20-L
Buffered invertebrate samples. carton of 100% formalin. Test pH
Formalinb with paper.
(pH 10)
8 Handle formalin according to 29 CFR 1910.1048.
b High pH solution required to preserve moll.
In addition, inspect the vehicles, boats, and trailers every morning before departure. Pay
particular anention to the trailer hitch, electrical connections, tiedowns, and air pressure in tires and
the boats. Refuel vehicles and conduct maintenance activities the night before a sampling trip.
Check trailer lights, turn signals, and brake lights before departure.
Label sample containers before departing from the base site. Figure 3-3 illustrates the
preprinted labels. Label and package the sample containers into sample kits prior to"departure.
Container labels should not be covered with clear tape until all information is completed during
sampling at the lake. Store an extra kit of sampling supplies (syringes, syringe valves, Cubitainers,
bonles, chlorophyll filters, foil, gloves, and labela) in the vehicles. Inventory these extra supply kits
prior to each lake visit.
3-7
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Base Site Activities
June 1994
3.2 POSTSAMPLING ACTIVITIES
Upon return to a lodging location after sampling, the team reviews all labels and completed
data forms (with the Field Coordinator when possible) for accuracy, completeness, and legibility
and makes a final inspection of samples. If information is missing from the forms or labels, the
Team Leader attempts to fill in the information accurately. The Team Leader will initial all data
forms after review. If obtainable samples are missing, the lake must be rescheduled by the Field
Coordinator for complete sampling. Other postsampling activities include: inspection and cleaning
of sampling equipment; inventory and sample preparation; sample shipment;' and communications.
3.2.1 Equipment Cleanup and Check
Equipment cleaning procedures are given in Table 3-3. Inspect all equipment, including
nets, boat, and trailer and clean off any plant and animal material. This effort ensures that
introductions of nuisance species such as water-milfoil and zebra mussels do not occur between
lakes. Prior to leaving a lake, drain all bilge water or live wells in the boat and discard all water
from the fish buckets. Inspect, clean, and handpick plant and animal remains from vehicle, boat,
motor, and trailer that contact lake water. Be especially careful that all nets are cleared of any fish
or fish parts. Dry out gill nets, trap nets, seines, and minnow traps and inspect and remove any
remnants of vegetation or animal life. If weather is rainy and fishing gear cannot be dried out, then
use a different (backup) set of gear, if available. If an additional set of gear is not available,
disinfect with a 10 percent chlorine bleach solution (bleach). Take care regarding application of
bleach to nets. Do not damage lawns or other property. Pavement is a preferred location for
treatment of trap nets with bleach solution. If a commercial carwash facility is available, wash
vehicle, boat, trailer, and fishing gear and thoroughly clean (hot water pressurized rinse - no soap).
3.2.2 Shipment of Samples and Forms
The field team ships samples as soon as possible after collection. Samples are usually
shipped on the full day allotted for predeparture and postsampling activities. The regional activities
3-8
-------
EMAP-SW FISH VOUCHER TAG
LAKE NAME: STATE:-
LAKE ID: . STATION ID:
----- -
DATE: - '_'93
IIIIID mn ~III m~ nm IUlIIUI Iln
1234$
LAKE ~fY~~9Y;~'~;:'t~~
DATE: :-'...........>'.?3.............'....:. . ...... ..................."..
..." ...'"
'. .IDlwmn nmmu 1DI11D1111111111"
.. 1234$ ...
WATER CHEMISTRY
DATE: - '-'-
I Dim mn ~III DIDion om lID 011
123456
INTERNAL REPORT
Base Site Activities
June 1994
CHLOROPHYLL
DATE: -'- ,-
VOLUME: ml
I Dnn 001 Rill nm Ilin nliliDl no
123456
BENTHOS - CORE
lAXEID:_____L
DATE: -'-'-
STA110H: -
SAMI'LE TYPE: R1 OTHER: --
Immll mllmn 1III/IDIlim 110
123456
FISH TISSUE
DATE: -'-'.-
IDIDI mu mil mnnmnunmnu
123456
ZOOPLANKTON - FINE , COARSE
LAKEID: ----- L
TOW LENGTH:
m
I OIDIum 0111 DlDlIIn IDII IIDIIll
123456
SEDIMENT CORE - TOP' BOTTOM
LAKEID: _____L
DATE: -'-'-
INTERVAL: FROM - TO - 11m
CORE I.ENGI1I: - 11m
I DlOI DIU Dill mn Ion IOIIIUI 1111
123456
Figure 3-3. Sample container labels.
3-9
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Base Site Activities
June 1994
TABLE 3-3. POSTSAMPLING EQUIPMENT CARE
1. Clean for biological contaminants (e.g., water milfoil, zebra mussels, and alewife).
- Prior to departing a lake, drain all bilge and live-well water from the boat and discard water in
fish buckets.
- At the lake, inspect motors, boat, and the trailer for evidence of plant fragments especially in
or near the propeller and water intakes. Remove all plant fragments.
- At the lake or base site, dry out gill nets, trap nets, seines, and minnow traps, and inspect
and remove any remnant vegetation or animal life. If the weather is rainy and fishing gear
cannot be dried out, then use a different (backup) set of ge.ar, if available. If an additional
set of gear is not available, disinfect gear with 10 percent bleach solution.
- If a commercial car wash facility is available, take vehicle, boat, trailer, and fishing gear and
thoroughly clean (hot water pressurized rinse - no soap).
2. Clean and dry other equipment prior to storage.
- Rinse chlorophyll filtration chamber three times with distilled water after each use.
- Briefly soak zooplankton nets in a dilute bleach solution (10 percent) and dry after each use.
- Rinse core sampler, sectioning apparatus, and siphon with tap water at the base site.
- Rinse coolers with water to clean off any dirt or debris on the outside and inside.
3. Check fish nets for holes and repair, if possible; otherwise, set damaged gear aside and locate
replacements.
4. Inventory equipment and supply needs and relay orders to the Field Coordinator through the
Communications Center.
5. Remove DO meters and GPS from carrying cases and set up for predeparture checks and
calibration. Examine the DO membranes for cracks, wrinkles, or bubbles; replace if necessary.
6. Recharge all batteries overnight if possible (12-V wet cells, computer battery). Replace others
(GPS, DO meter) as necessary.
7. Recheck field forms from the day's sampling activities. Make corrections and completions
where possible, and initial each form after review.
8. Replenish fuel.
3-10
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Base Site Activities
June 1994
plan gives specific information within a region for shipping destinations and times. Initiate sample
tracking at this time using the notebook computers, bar-code readers, and the Information
Management Handbook. Log samples into the sample tracking and reporting system (STARS). For
more detailed information refer to the Information Management Handbook. If the computer and
bar-code reader are inoperable, complete the tracking information by hand on the backup forms
provided. Sample tracking activities are summarized in Table 3-4.
Ship samples of fish tissue, chlorophyll, and water in coolers packed with ice. Line each
shipping cooler with a large 30-gallon garbage bag. Inside, contain the ice separately within
numerous (as many as possible) 1-gallon Ziploc bags and ensure the ice is fresh before shipment.
Use block ice when available; it should be sealed in a 30-gallon garbage bag. White or clear bags
will allow for labelling with a dark indelible marker. All bags of ice must be labeled as "ICE" with an
indelible marker to prevent any leakage of water from being misidentified by couriers as a possible
hazardous material spill.
The composite fish tissue sample(s) is prepared, bagged, and chilled at the lake, as
described in Section 6. Package these samples as follows. Upon arrival at the base site, open the
cooler and the cooler liner. Remove the bags of ice and replace them with fresh bags of ice. Put in
as many bags of ice as will fit into the cooler. Then seal the cooler liner. Close the cooler.
Package and label the cooler for shipping as described in the regional activities plan.' Ship fish
tissue samples with sediment core samples the same day they are processed, whenever possible.
If not possible, they must be shipped the next day.
The chlorophyll sample is collected and wrapped in foil and placed into a 1-quart Ziploc bag
as described in Section 7. Make sure that the label with bar code is on the foil and all entries are
complete, and cover the label with clear plastic tape. Place each 1-quart sample bag in a 1-gallon
Ziploc bag. Place the Ziploc sample bags inside the cooler liner. Surround the outer Ziploc bag
with bags of fresh ice. Then seal the cooler liner. Ship the chlorophyll samples with its
corresponding water chemistry samples on the day of collection whenever possible. If not possible,
they must be shipped the next day.
To ship the Cubitainer and syringes, line the shipping cooler with a garbage bag. Place
another garbage bag in the cooler, and place the samples in the second bag. For each sample
3-11
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Base Site Activities
June 1994
TABLE 3-4. SAMPLE TRACKING PROCEDURE
1. Upon return from the sample site, turn on the computer. To begin entering tracking data, type
STARSa and press enter. The sample tracking screen will be displayed.
2. Use the bar code scanner to enter LAKE ID, STATION ID, CREW ID, SAMPLE CLASS
(BENTHOS, FISH TISSUE, FISH MUSEUM, CORE, ZOOPLANKTON, CHLOROPHYLL, AND
WATER CHEMISTRY), and SAMPLE TYPE using the Information Management Handbook.
Using the bar code reader, scan the bar code of the corresponding sample. If the lake was not
sampled, press F2 and fill in the required information.
3. Press F4 to save the record. Repeat the process for all routine samples. For audit samples,
after entering the FN (for sample type), you will be prompted by the screen to enter the audit
number. For blank samples (if used), enter FB for sample type.
4. After all data have been entered for the day, press F9 (for PRINT menu) to generate shipping
forms. A menu will appear with the various sample types. Select the type and a list of the
sample tracking numbers available for shipping will appear. The samples marked with the
default "Y" will be listed and included on the shipping form printout. If a sample will not be
shipped, use the arrow key to locate the sample and press N. Continue until all samples to be
shipped have been tagged.
5. Press ESC to start printing. Check printer to ensure that shipping and sample tracking form(s)
are being printed. A shipping form should be printed for each cooler shipped. The program will
ask if the printing was successful. If so, exit; if not, toggle for "no" and it will reprint
automatically.
6. Samples are ready to be shipped to the respective laboratories or locations. The shipping
formes) should be placed in a Ziploc bag(s) and taped to the inside of the cooler top.
7. If this is Tuesday or Friday, prepare a backup disk; place a diskette in drive A of the computer
and press F1 0 from the main menu to initiate the backup.
8. Remove the diskette from drive A and place in prelabeled and stamped diskette mailer and mail
it by US mail.
9. Exit the program by pressing F5 or ESC and turn off the computer.
10. Recharge the computer battery by leaving it plugged in overnight.
a Sample Tracking and Reporting System--see Information Management Handbook.
3-12
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Base Site Activities
June 1994
ensure that the Cubitainer and each of the four syringes have identical bar codes. Ensure all entries
are complete and close the bag of samples. Place bags of ice around it. Then close the cooler liner
(outer garbage bag). Ship water samples on the day of collection, whenever possible. If not
possible, they must be shipped the next day.
For sediment core samples, open the hard plastic (Tupperware) box and ensure that the
labels with bar codes are complete, covered with clear plastic tape, and attached to each of the
two bags of sediment (top and bottom). Close the Tupperware box and seal it with clear tape.
Place the box in the shipping cooler and ship with fish tissue samples.
Zooplankton samples are preserved in 10 percent sucrose borax buffered formalin and
sealed at the lakeside as described in Section 7. For zooplankton samples, ensure that there is a
different label with bar code taped on each of the two jars (coarse and fine). If a sample required
an additional jar, make sure the bar code number of the corresponding labeled sample is recorded
on the label. Verify that each jar is sealed with electrical tape and sealed in a quart-sized Ziploc
bag. Place both quart-sized Ziploc bags in a gallon-sized Ziploc bag. Zooplankton samples can be
packaged with benthic samples for transport.
Fish voucher specimens are preserved in 10 percent borax buffered formalin (4 percent
formaldehyde) and sealed at the lakeside as described in Section 6 and the Regional Activities Plan.
Voucher samples are placed in hardshell plastic coolers and surrounded with crumpled newspaper,
vermiculite, or other absorbent material. The Field Coordinator will periodically take coolers of
voucher specimens to the museum and supply the team with cases of empty containers. In some
instances the team may deliver vouchers directly to the museum and obtain empty bottles. In other
cases, samples and containers may need to be shipped by courier. If shipping by courier, label
shipping containers and complete airbills as directed in the Regional Activities Plan for such
samples.
To improve their fish identification skills, the crew may examine their voucher specimens,
but it is essential to maintain voucher integrity and specimen quality and to follow appropriate
safety precautions. Handling of specimens should be very limited during the first 72 hours after
collection to allow the fish tissue to harden. Open only one bottle at a time to prevent inadvertent
mixing of vouchers, and return specimens to the bottle when finished. Handle specimens with
3-13
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Base Site Activities
June 1994
forceps and protective clothing only (see the Regional Activities Plan). Open bottles and examine
vouchers in a well-ventilated area, preferably outdoors.
Benthic invertebrate samples are preserved in 10 percent carbonate buffered formalin (4
percent formaldehyde) and sealed at the lakeside as described in Section 8 where up to 20 500-ml
jars are placed in each hard shell plastic cooler and surrounded with crumpled newspaper or
vermiculite. Zooplankton samples can be shipped with benthic samples. label shipping containers
and complete airbills as directed in the Regional Activities Plan for such samples.
3.2.3 Communications
A regional communications center (see regional activities plan for regional locations and
telephone numbers) is the central point of contact for information exchange among field crews, the
EMAP-SW management and QA staffs, the information management team, analytical laboratories,
and the public. The Communications Center also monitors all aspects of field sampling activities,
including coordinating and tracking field sample shipments to the analytical laboratories and
supplying replenishment requests.
Requests to replenish consumable supplies can be made weekly but are not restricted to
that frequency. When possible, crews should inventory their supplies after each lake visit and
submit requests well in advance of exhausting on-hand stocks. Requests for supplies can be
shipped with the lake data package by overnight courier. Should supplies need to be replenished
more quickly, notify the Communications Center by telephone and the appropriate sources will be
contacted.
As specified in the Regional Activities Plan, each field Team leader must call the
Communications Center and provide a brief description of the activities for the previous week,
including lakes visited, samples shipped, problems encountered, and requests for information; the
Team leader must then generate weekly sampling status reports (Table 3-5) for transmission by
overnight express mail. A weekly report will be compiled from reports submitted by the Team
leaders and distributed to the management team, other Team leaders, and any interested
individuals.
3-14
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Base Site Activities
June 1994
TABLE 3-5. WEEKLY GENERATION OF REPORTS
1. Once a week, generate the weekly and sample tracking reports. After starting the sample
tracking system (type STARSa and press enter), press F9 (for PRINT menu) to generate reports.
A menu will appear with a list of report choices. Select the Weekly Report option to generate
the weekly report. Check the printer connection.
2. Place a disk in drive A: of the computer and press F10 from the main menu to initiate a backup.
3. Send the generated reports with any other data or field forms to the Field Coordinator via
Communications Center staff by overnight express shipping.
4. Mail floppy diskette in prelabeled diskette mailer through U.S. mail at end of the week.
a Sample Tracking and Reporting System--see Information Management Handbook for
the user's guide to this system.
3-15
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Base Site Activities
June 1 994
NOTES
3-17
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Base Site Activities
June 1 994
NOTES
3-18
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Base Site Activities
June 1994
NOTES
3-19
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Base Site Activities
June 1994
NOTES
3-20
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
lake Verification and Index Site location
June 1 994
SECTION 4
LAKE VERIFICATION AND INDEX SITE LOCATION
by
David V. Peck and John R. Baker
Sampling the correct lake and locating the index site (deepest point on the lake) are critical
to the sampling design and to making regional lake population estimates about condition. Data
collected from the wrong lake are of no value to EMAP-SW. When verifying the identity and
location of a lake, the GPS is a valuable tool; however, lake verification must be ascertained from
all available information (e.g., maps, road signs, and GPS). Do not sample the lake if there is
reason to believe it is the wrong lake. Contact the Field Coordinator (via the Communications
Center) to resolve discrepancies.
Rigorous quality assurance practices are observed in the field. To assure accuracy,
completeness, and legibility in recording, field forms are completed by one individual. and checked
by another to verify that all pertinent information is included. Activities described in this section
are summarized in Figure 4-1.
4.1 LAKE VERIFICATION AT THE LAUNCH SITE
Record directions to the lake and a description of the launch site on the Lake Verification
Form Side 2 (Figure 4-2) regardless of whether the site is sampled or not. This information is very
important and will be used in the future when the lake is revisited by another sampling team.
Provide information about signs, road numbers, gates, landmarks, and any additional information
you feel will be useful to another sampling team in relocating this lake. It is also helpful to describe
the distance traveled (miles) between turns. Also describe the launch site on the same form. For
example: Can the boat be launched with a trailer? Are there fees? Is the launch paved or does it
consist of soft sand? What landmarks are at the launch?
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Lake Verification and Index Site Location
June 1994
LAKE VERIFICATION ACTIVITIES
2 DAYS BEFORE VISIT
Team Leader
. Contad landowner to inform of visit and confirm access
DAY 1 ACTIVITIES
3 Persons
. Review lake dossier for diredions and access requirements
. Travel to lake (2 vehicles)
. Record directions on Lake Verification Form
ARRIVE AT LAUNCH SITE
I
VERIFY LAKE (1 Person)
. Describe site on Lake Verification Form
. Verify lake, complete verification form:
- Compare lake shape to map outline
- Take GPS reading, compare to lake coordinates
. Determine if fake meets target criteria for sampling
. Record location on verification form map
PREPARE BOAT
(2 Persons)
. Launch boat
. Set up sonar unit
LOCATE INDEX SITE
,
SHORE (1 Person)
. Set up staging area
. Prepare equipment for other Day 1 activities
BOAT (2 People)
. Travel to area of deepest water
. Determine index site uSing sonar
. Anchor and mark site, record location on
verification form map
. Take GPS reading, record on verification form
=LOOPS94 PPT
Figure 4-1. Lake verification and index site activities summary.
4-2
.,..
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
lake Verification and Index Site Location
June 1994
lAKE. ID: JL:t... () .a....Q.. L
LAKE vaaRCA110N FORII(c:anIh8d)
VISIT . (cird8J:
,
2
EXPLANAT10N FOR NOT SAMPlING THE LAKE {continued from front sidel
REvIEWED BY (lNITIALI:~
Rev. 6/94 lIakeva,1.94)
Lake Verification Form 2
Figure 4-2. Lake Verification Form Side 2.
4-3
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
lake Verification and Index Site location
June 1994
The field team must verify that the lake is correctly identified and located. Lake verification
is based on map coordinates, locational data from the GPS when possible, and any other evidence
such as signs or conversations with local residents. Table 4-1 provides operational instructions for
the GPS receiver. The Lake Verification Form Side 1 (Figure 4-3) is used to record locational
coordinates for the lake. Record on the lake Verification Form the lake coordinates provided in the
regional activities plan and the lake dossier. If a GPS fix is obtained, check the GPS box and record
the latitude, longitude, and the type of satellite fix (20 or 3D) for the launch site. Compare the
dossier map coordinates recorded for the lake with the GPS coordinates displayed for the launch
site. Check the Lake Verification Form to see if the two sets of coordinates are within :t 1.0
minute of latitude and longitude. If a GPS fix is not available, do' not record any information but try
to obtain the information at a later time during the visit. A fix may be taken at any time during a
lake visit and recorded on the form. Mark the location of the launch site with an "L" on the lake
outline on the Lake Verification Form Side 1 (Figure 4-3).
In addition to the GPS, use as many of the following methods as possible to verify the site:
1.
Obtain confirmation from a local person familiar with the area.
2.
Identify confirming roads and signs.
3.
Compare lake shape to that shown on the topographic map included in the lake dossier
(USGS 7.5 minute map or equivalent).
4.
Determine lake position relative to identifiable topographic features shown on the map.
If the lake shape on the map on the Lake Verification Form Side 1 (Figure 4-3) and on the
USGS map do not correspond with each other or with the actual lake shape, check "Not Verified"
and provide comments on the Lake Verification Form. The lake should !lQ1 be sampled if there are
major differences in lake shape and the sketch map cannot be used for locating physical habitat
stations described in Section 5.
At each lake, evaluate whether or not the lake meets the EMAP definition of a lake:
.
~ 1 ha in total surface area
.
~ 1 00 square meters of open water
4-4
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Lake Verification and Index Site Location
June 1 994
TABLE 4-1. MAGELLAN NAV 5000 GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEMS SURVEY PROCEDURESII
1.
Turn the unit ON. Initialization of unit is required if it is moved more than 300 miles from last
position fix.
2.
At the "READY" display, push "SETUP." Press" ~" once and check if the mode is "AUTO."
Otherwise, use the "...." key to move to "AUTO." Then push "paS" for position.
3.
If fix is "3D," note it on the Lake Verification Form. If fix is "2D," go to "SETUP," press "~"
once, press clear; type in the altitude (h) and "ENTER," then push "paS" and write down the
2D fix.
4.
For both 2D and 3D fixes, push "~" twice and note the lowest signal quality (SO) and
geometric quality (GO)b as a number from 0-9 on the Lake Verification Form.
5.
If battery warnings appear, make sure that the unit is turned off immediately and the fresh
battery pack is inserted in the unit (six size AAs are needed).
6.
Turn unit OFF.
a For additional information on navigation, see the Magellan Manual.
b If GO s 3, the crew should try to obtain another fix because the geometric quality is inadequate.
4-5
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
lake Verification and Index Site location
June 1994
LAKE VERIFICATION FORM.
LAKE NAME: J.. WtJ6 'fJ~
LAKE 10: 11.. -1-1l..D...Q L
TEAM 10 (CIRCLE': Z 3
DATE OF VISIT:
MODE OF ACCESS:
I
e
2
.--
~
4
&
8
7
.
.
10
aTHI!R: -
A- INDICATEa NOImI
MARK Str1!: L - LAUNCH X. IIIDIX
~
.,£ .-
() ~ ...
()... -
O~ ~
..'\:.-
~ () -
..~:
.. - ..
~-.l<;:
11
~~
LAKE VERIFICATION 1NFORMATION
lAKE SHAPE COMPARES TO MAP?
a YES
a GlIB
a NO
lAKE VERIFIED BY ,.1 .u that 8Pply) :
a Othe, IDee crib. H.,.,:
a LOCAL COIffACT
ah-
aR0AD8
a TOPO. MAP
a NOT VERIFIED IEKpI8in in Com_nul
COORDINATES
lATITUDE Idd mm..'
N...,..
LONGITUDE Iddd mm ..,
WMt
TYPE OF QP8
AX
8IOIIA&.
au.wrv
GIOMEnIIC
au.wrv
Ate QP8 Coordin8188
wIt % 1 min. of m8P1
M.p:
If 'L'- '!1.-
'1~.L'- .a.
~S:.16..1'l'
1l'-7oft .~~.
fJ 1, 1..S'D. .!/.,-.
Di7.JP.'J.~'
a zD)(3D ..!L-
a 2D 3D L
~ )LYES
-'- )(YES
aNO
aNO
18unch Sit.:
Indu Sit.:
LAKE
SAMPLED?
REASON NOT SAMPUD 1EXJU8I1B.OW1:
a NOT VISITED
aNON-TARGET
a IHACCENIIIU!
o OTHER
Explanation:
CItEat - F
EXJII.ANATIOfI .
~ OIIIACIt.
~YES
ONO
D
REvIEwED BY (1NITIALI:.2f..-
Rev. 6/94 Cl8keverl.941
L8k. V.rifieation Form 1
Figure 4-3. Lake Verification Form Side 1.
4-6
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
lake Verification and Index Site location
June 1994
.
~ 1 meter in depth
If the lake does not fit this definition, check "nontarget" on the bottom of the lake Verification
Form (Side 1) and provide an explanation for not sampling the lake. Add any additional explanation
as required.
4.2 LAKE VERIFICATION AT THE INDEX SITE LOCATION
Estimate the deepest point in the lake (designated as the "index site") by using sonar and a
bathymetric map (if available in the dossier for the lake) and by observing the lake shape and
surrounding topography. Table 4-2 outlines sonar operation and procedures for finding the index
site. Once in the general area, use the sonar unit to locate the deepest point. When an acceptable
site is located, anchor the boat. lower the anchor slowly to minimize disturbance to the water
column and sediment and document the coordinates of the index site by GPS (if satellite coverage
is available) and record on the lake Verification Form, Side 1 (Figure 4-3). If satellite coverage is
not available at that time, try again during the sample collection activities on Day 2. Identify the
index site on the sketch map with an "X. on the Lake Verification Form, Side 1 (Figure 4-3).
Compare the dossier coordinates recorded for the lake with those GPS coordinates recorded
for the index site. Check on the lake Verification Form Side 1 (Figure 4-3) if the two sets of
coordinates are within f: 1 .0 minute of latitude and longitude. If coordinates at the launch site or
the index site are not within f: 1 .0 minute of the map coordinates listed in the regional activities
plan and the dossier, question whether or not you are at the correct lake. Information collected
through the other methods described in the previous subsection should always be considered
before deciding whether or not the identity of a lake can be verified. If the lake is sampled and
coordinates are not within criteria or the lake shape does not match, provide comments justifying
your actions on the lake Verification Form Side 2 (Figure 4-2).
4.3 EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLY LIST
The checklist for equipment and supplies required to conduct protocols described in this
section are provided in Figure 4-4. It is similar to but may be different somewhat from the checklist
in Appendix A, which is used at a base site to assure that all equipment and supplies are brought
4-7
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Lake Verification and Index Site Location
June 1 994
TABLE 4-2. LOCATING THE INDEX SITE
1. Attach transducer bracket to boat transom; position transducer so that streamlined end faces
forward; connect the power supply and the transducer to the sonar unit.
2. Operate SONAR as follows:
a.
Turn ON unit.
b.
Press" Metric."
c.
Press "Menu" three times so that it displays the option for setting digital displays.
d.
Press "Temperature function ON."
3. Use the sonar in the area expected to be deepest. Mentally note the location of maximum
depth.
4. Return to the location of maximum depth. Anchor the boat.
5. Determine coordinates using GPS. Record GPS coordinates on Side 1 of the lake Verification
Form.
Note: Total time to locate index site should be s 30 min.
4-8
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Lake Verification and Index Site Location
June 1994
LAKE VERIFICATION CHECKLIST
Number Needed
Each Lake
Dossier for lake to be sampled 1
Clipboard 1
Lake Verification Form 1
Field notebook 1
Field Operations Manual 1
Field Quick Reference Handbook 1
EMAP pamphlets 20
Sampling permit 1
Sonar 1
Pigtail adapter for 12-V battery 1
Transducer with bracket and C-clamp 1
12-V wet cell battery (charged) in battery 1
case
GPS unit with manual, reference card, extra 1
battery pack
Anchor with 50 m line 1
Float to attach to anchor 1
Figure 4-4. Lake verification checklist.
4-9
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
lake Verification and Index Site location
June 1 994
to and are available at the lake. Field teams are required to use the checklist presented in this
section to assure that the equipment and supplies are organized and available on the boat in order
to conduct protocols correctly and efficiently.
4-10
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
lake Verification and Index Site location
June 1994
NOTES
4-11
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
lake Verification and Index Site location
June 1 994
NOTES
4-12
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
lake Verification and Index Site location
June 1994
NOTES
4-13
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
lake Verification and Index Site location
June 1994
NOTES
4-14
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Habitat Assessment
June 1994
SECTION 5
HABITAT ASSESSMENT
by
Philip R. Kaufmann and Thomas R. Whittier
Habitat assessment at a lake includes measures of temperature and dissolved oxygen at the
index site and a characterization of physical habitat within the riparian and littoral zones. Very rigid
quality assurance practices are observed in the field. To assure legibility and completeness in
recording, field forms are completed by one individual and checked by another.
These habitat
assessment data are used for characterizing lake habitat and also for selecting the placement of fish
gear and benthic sampling sites. These activities are discussed in sections 6 and 8, respectively.
5.1 TEMPERATURE AND DISSOLVED OXYGEN
In assessing lake habitat measure the vertical distribution of temperature and dissolved oxygen
(DO). Most lakes deeper than 3 to 5 m are thermally stratified during the summer. The metalimnion
is defined as the middle area of the water column where the vertical temperature gradient is greater
than or equal to 1.0 DC per meter of depth (see Figure 5-1). These profiles are used to characterize
the pelagic (open water) habitat by determining the depths of the top and bottom of the metalimnion
(if present) and the extent of oxygen depletion. This information is used to select gill net sites (Section
6) and benthic sampling sites (Section 9). All measurements are taken in a vertical profile at the index
site and follow lake verification and index site location activities described in Section 4. The DO meter
must be tested and calibrated at the lake index site just prior to measuring the vertical profile.
5.1.1 Calibration of the Dissolved Oxygen Meter
The DO meter performance test and calibration are summarized in Figure 5-2 and described in
detail in Section 3. Each field crew also has a copy of the manufacturer's calibration procedures
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Habitat Assessment
June 1 994
TEMPERATURE AND DISSOLVED OXYGEN PRORLE OF A THERMALLY STRATIFIED LAKE
DEPTH (m)
~LOOPS!M PPT
o
TEMPERATURE (.C)
DISSOLVED O2 (mglL)
10
.
c
15
20
5
o
5
10
HYPOUMNION
11 Temp. < 1 8C1m
15
20
Figure 5-1. Typical temperature and dissolved oxygen profile of a thermally stratified lake.
-
5-2
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Habitat Assessment
June 1994
DJSSOL VED OXYGEN METER CAUBRA TlON
INITIAL METER CHECK
. Turn meter on
. Adjust electronic zero
. Adjust Salinity knob
to "o.FRESH" position
SETUPCAUBRA~ONCHAMBER
. Insert probe into calibration chamber
. Open air valve
. Immerse in water bath for 15 minutes to
equilibrate
FAIL
CAUBRATE METER
. Calculate theoretical O2 value for water-
saturated air at chamber temperature and
pressure
. Adjust meter reading to calibration value
CONDUCT LAKE PROFILE
MEASUREMENTS
FI.OOPSg4 PPT
6194
Figure 5-2. Performance test and calibration procedures for the dissolved oxygen meter.
5-3
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Habitat Assessment
June 1 994
and maintenance information. Record calibration information on the lake Profile Form Side 2 (Figure
5-3). If the instrument will not calibrate, repeat the calibration procedure. If the meter still fails to
calibrate, record an "K" flag on the lake Profile Form to denote that measurements could not be
obtained.
5.1.2 Profile Measurements
After calibrating the DO meter, attach a messenger (for weight only) to the probe cable near
the probe and measure vertical profiles of temperature and DO at the predetermined depth intervals--as
indicated on the lake Profile Data Form Side 1 (Figure 5-4). The deepest measurements taken at each
lake will always be at 1.0 m above the bottom (or the length of the cable if the depth is > 50 mi.
Figure 5-5 illustrates the general process for conducting the profile measurements. For shallow lakes
( < 3 m) measure DO and temperature at the surface and at 0.5 meter intervals, until 1.0 above the
bottom. For lakes deeper than 3.0 meters, measure DO and temperature at the surface,
1.5 m, 2.0 m, and every meter thereafter through 15 m (or until reaching 1.0 meter above the bottom).
After that, measure every 5 m starting at 20 m (or until 1.0 meter above the bottom). If the DO drops
below 2.0 during this process, raise the probe until you find the depth where the DO is ~2.0 mg/L
(within 1.0 meter). Record this depth, which is the maximum depth for fishing gear, then continue the
profile at even 5 meter intervals (20, 25, .....). Do not lower the probe closer than 1.0 m from the
bottom to avoid permanent damage to the membrane and/or probe.
Note the top ("T") of the metalimnion (the top depth interval where there is a change in
temperature greater than or equal to 1.0 °C/m) and the bottom ("8") of the metalimnion (top of the
depth interval where there is change in temperature less than 1.0 °C/m) on the lake Profile Data Form.
The metalimnion in some lakes may extend to the bottom. If this occurs, note the bottom of the
metalimnion as the last depth measured.
After completing the DO and temperature profile, clip an orange float to the anchor line leaving
the anchor, line, and float at the index site so that it can be easily located the next day. This procedure
should not be followed if there is a chance of theft or the presence of the float presents a safety
problem. If the marker float cannot be left, the index site will have to be relocated the next day using
the procedure described in Section 4.
5-4
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Habitat Assessment
June 1994
~ LAKE ID: JL Y- ...12 .fL..a. L
LAKE:PRORtE.FORM' (c:ontInulCl)
VISIT II: CD . 2
I
MEMBRANE CHECK
OXYGEN METBI CAUSRATJON INFORMATION
RED LINE: r"
LAKE ELEvAnON
IFROM ToPO. MAp OR ALTIMETtR):
SATURATID at. TEIIP.:
ELEvAnON CORIIECTION FACTOR:
x
The calibr.tlon value i8 oIIt8ined by rnuItIpIyIno !he
utur.t.d O. concentr.tion ti- 8ft .levatian _wan
I.ctor (both v..... ... oIIUlined 110m t8bI88 p-- on !he
b.ck 01 the --. 01' th., ... provided In !he
m.nut.C1ur8r'. _.u- -.II. AcIju81!he_-
r..ding to the C81ibr.1ian v"".
CAUBRATION VALUE:
RAG"
MaiL
FT
COMMENTS .
TEMPERATURE'&: DISSOLVED OXYGENPRORLE".(continued)
FaIt~'>.11S.~ ~- AT& 811T18VAUI
O2 TEMP; . .,.:'. ., O2 TEMP.
META-', " tDEmtlml META-
DEPTH lml (mgtU (OCI LIIINION' (mgtU (OCJ " 'IJMNJON
XX.X FLAG rr;'\,,' >:. XX~. " XXoX xx.x FLAG !T;81"
XX.X xx.x
OEPTH &
FLAG
COMMENTS
REvIEWED By (INITIAL):
~
Rev. 6/94 (prolil.I.94)
1.81<. Profile Form. 2
Figure 5-3. Lake Profile Form Side 2.
5-5
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Habitat Assessment
June 1994
LAKE PROFILE: FORM
LAKE NAME: "-. WOJ: II ,.,.~l" DATE OF PROFILE: 71 A/ 19'4 VISIT: (i) 2
LAKE ID: IV y fl. .D... D.... L SITE ID IClrcle,:(iNDEX '" OTHER:
TEAM ID (circlel: 1 (2) 3 4 5 8 7 8 9 10 OTHER:'
PRECIPITATION Icircle': (NONe LIGHT HEAVY
- (RIPPLD")
SURFACE CONDITIONS Icircle': fLAT CHoPPY WHITECAP.
ODOR? )(NO D YES Description:
SCUM? XNO D YES Description:
INDEX SITE DEPTH: - L L . ~ M CHECK (~ IF SONAR NOT USED: [J
FLAG: I COMMENTS:
DISSOLVED OXYGEN & TEMPERATURE PROFILE
IDepths 01 Me.surements0(m): Surface. 1~&~2; 3~ 4. &~6~:7/.t:9: 10~ 11}12. 13. .14. 1&~ 20.25. 30; 35. ~..45.
and 50 ml.. Allo Indude rudlngl.8t1'm'aboY8battom.
O2. TEMP. ......... 0 1EMP~ . <: IEI''''
2.
DEPnf (m) (mgJU c.a 1..-, '. DEPI1f CMJ :(ingJU .t.a UIIIIIaI,.'
XX.X XX.Jt xx.z RAG IT;'" D:.I(.: XX.;Z xx.x RAG rr..,.
SURFACE g.9 !ll J 1I.t"J 'I.'" ,"J 0 I
I.~ t;-.~ ~/" ItIJ" :t.G' J'!In
~n PO. g .1'n 1'1." ,,, II..
.~.n ~.t;' !J.,., ,&I." ':'-'1 lI.fI'
"of) 9.~ !J.", Ir." "" , I. f?
-r:~ 7. t:J 1ft. gt ...,.. '''.0 I.Q II. 'I
~.~ ~'7 J~.t.. ,,,. ~ ., I 111/
"J.t:) 'I.'" 1&1..1.
~.t:J &I.. J'J. '-
q.tJ £(.1 '12.. R
/t'J. n 1/.1./ I~,~
SURFACE tDup.) Sf,CZ .2/. J
Is THE DUPUCATE 02READINO WITHIN :0.5 MoiL OF THE INITIAL SURFACE READINO? )( YES D No
CHECK HERlIF AODmDNAL PROFILE MEASUREMENTS ARE RECORDED ON THE IU!VERSE SIDE:
, If the SI1e aepth II :S :1 m. 1.e rUdings et ene aurf8Ce. every 0.5 m. end 1 m 8bove rh8 bottom.
~ METAUMNION . defined 81 the region of the profHI wh"l the temp..sture ch8l'lOh et e rete of 1 °C or gr88t.. p.. mlt.. of depth.
Indicllte thll depth of thl top 01 thl metlllmnlon with II -r. 8I'Id the bottom of the m8t8llmnlon (wh8l'l the rete of ch8l'l1l8 b8COlTl81
less then 1 °C ptr met.., with . '.'. Once met8llmnion Is 8l'lcount..8d. tllel rud!ngs every 1 met.. until bottom of the metelimnion
Is rellched. Rlcord the depth of the top of thl rn8t8IImnIon on rh8 B8I'Ithos Semple Loc8tIon 8I'Id CoI8c:tIon Form.
FLAG CODES: K- NO II~ OII08I8IYA'nOII1IIAOE: u- .-cr -~ 011 O8I8IYA- Q. ~CCB'fAIU QC CHEat ASSOCIATBI WIIM
IlEASUfl£MENT: F1. F2. ETC. - -CEU A- I'I.AG8 - IV EACH AEUI _. I!XPLUI AU. I'I.AG8 . toIIIIIIITS IICTIOII 081 UCIt OIl FOMI. o..iJ
REvIEWED By 11N1T1AL':~
lIev. 6/94 (profile' .941
Lake Profile FOIrn- ,
Figure 5-4. Lake Profile Form Side 1.
5.6
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Habitat Assessment
June 1 994
DISSOLVED OXYGEN AND TEMPERATURE PROFILE
CHECK METER AND PROBE AND
CAUBRATE
YES
MEASURE TEMP. AND 02 AT
SURFACE, EVERY 0.5 m, AND 1 m
ABOVE BOTTOM
NO
RETRIEVE PROBE TO
SURFACE FOR DUPUCATE
MEASUREMENT
LOWER PROBE TO NEXT
PREDETERMINED DEPTH
SHOWN ON PROFILE FORM
RECORD O2 AND TEMP. READINGS
ON LAKE PROFILE FORM
NO
RAISE PROBE BY 0.5 OR 1 METER
INTERVALS UNTIL 02 15 ~ 2 mgJL
RECORD TEMP. AND 02 READINGS ON
LAKE PROFILE FORM FOR DEPTH
WHERE 02 15 ~ 2 mgIL
~lOOPS9" PPT'
LOWER PROBE 101m
ABOVE BOTTOM;
RECORD READINGS ON
LAKE PROFILE FORM
RETRIEVE PROBE;
CONDUCT DUPLICATE
MEASUREMENTS AT
SURFACE
COMPLETE LAKE
PROFILE FORM,
NOTING TOP AND
BOTTOM OF
METALIMNION
&Ii<
Figure 5-5. Dissolved oxygen and temperature profile procedure.
5-7
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Habitat Assessment
June 1 994
5.2 SHORELINE PHYSICAL HABITAT CHARACTERIZATION
Lake physical habitat and shoreline disturbances are characterized based on a lake shoreline and
littoral habitat survey of 10 physical habitat (P-Hab) sampling stations spaced evenly around each lake.
These station locations (marked A through J) are shown on preprinted outlines of each individual lake
(Habitat Sketch Map Form Side 1, Figure 5-6). General guidelines for collecting habitat data at lakes
are provided in Table 5-1.
5.2.1 Locating Each P-Hab Station
Starting at the nearest boat access point, proceed by boat around the lake near the shore,
observing bank, shoreline, emergent, and subsurface characteristics. Using the lake outline on the
Habitat Sketch Map Form Side 1 (Figure 5-6) and a topographic map, locate and stop at each of the
10 P-Hab stations. Mark each station with a ribbon, then position the boat at a distance of 10m ( - 30
ft, offshore), anchor if necessary, and make the semi-quantitative measurements enumerated on the
Physical Habitat Characterization Form sides 1 and 2 (figures 5-7 and 5-8).
Entering data qualifiers ("flags") on the Physical Habitat Characterization Form is slightly
different than for the other data forms. As there is no defined "FLAG" field for each variable, flags are
entered into the data field itself. For any particular measurement variable, if no effort is made to collect
data, or if you make an effort but for some reason are unable to obtain data, enter a "K" flag in the
data field. Explain on the separate Physical Habitat Characterization Comments Form (Figure 5-9) why
data could not be obtained. If you collect data for a variable but have reason to believe it is suspect
(or it was collected using a nonstandard protoco!), enter a "U" flag in the data field. On the comments
form, record the data value itself and explain why you think it is suspect (or describe what nonstandard
procedure was used and why).
Make every reasonable attempt to record physical habitat observations and measurements for
all 10 P-Hab stations. However, there are circumstances where this is impossible. In such cases,
record a "K" flag in each field to clearly indicate on the form that no observations were made at that
particular station. In some cases, the mapped lakeshore may be different from what you actually see
in the field. If, for example, a bay is dry or inaccessible because of excessive vegetation and shallow
5-8
-------
PHYSICAL HABITAT SKETCH MAP FORM-lAKES
LAKE NAME: J.. tAl DE B
LAKE 10: 1L::L.1L.tL.fl. L
START:T1ME:.L.lL : .1.. D..
TEAM 10 (circle):
3
2
5
8
9
4
8
7
1-' : NYOO 0-
1-"". WtS'8EVS
AU": j'1I.~ h"
seAL./:
t- rOO ...t,~,
INTERNAL REPORT
Habitat Assessment
.June '994
VISIT #:
1
2
10
ENO T1ME: 4-~:.2.. ~
OTHER: -
Skotch and label riparian. 1n-18Ic.. 8Itar81iM. and Huor" fl8h habIta18 8ItIUftd the laic., U81ng ........ below. To Identify Unor" flah hobh.UI on tho
m.p. comp- . faur-ch8lac:t8' code .: IDl8tvltlanaellCowr cI-IlCoww typaI!8ub81r... typal. EXAMPLE: NCV8 for Natur", Co.....,
V ovotodan. 8and/gr....1.
RFAIIIAN AND ~ CODES: WET - _d8ncI: SCH -be""': R8D -...........: PRK - park: FaT - f- ALT - 8h8r8d aharalin8:
DCK - docklo'; MNA - m.....; CAP - c:ropIancI: 1'T1I- pa8tUN; LA. -landfilldurnp; IND - inck81ry; MNa - rnkIIng; Laa -logging:
FLM-fIo.ting m.crophyt88; S8M-8Ubmorl8e1rna"""'yt88; £MM- .-vem III8«OIIhyt88; 81L-8hooI or rock8.
UTTORAL ASH HA8lTAT CODES: 'DlSTUlllAIICI): Human. N....... MI.ucI. 'COYBI'" "01: eo-. Open. Mlael. 'COVIII TYPII: N_. 8auJdo,.
Artificial atrueturo. FIll. V.ga'.UleI. Woody, MI_d. '_ft1V'll: Mud/muclc, 8anel/gr."". Cobblolboulde... "clracll.
I
Rov.6/94 (lkotmap1.94'
Figure 5-6. Habitat Sketch Map Form Side 1.
5-9
Ph.,.;caI Habl'a' Sketch Map Farm. 1
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Habitat Assessment
June 1994
TABLE 5-1. GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR COLLECTING PHYSICAL HABITAT DATA
At Each Phvsical Habitat (P-Hab) SamDlina Station:
1.
Locate station by eye using maps, and mark with ribbon.
2.
Position boat at observation point 10m from shore. Limit observations to an area 15 m (50
ft) wide, 15 m (50 ft) back from shore, and 10m (30 ft) from shore to the boat. Sampling
area and zones are illustrated in the quick reference handbook.
3.
Define shore as either current waterline OR boundary between open water and edge of dense
vegetation (terrestrial, wetland, or emergent vegetation) or extensive very shallow water.
4.
Record riparian habitat (inland from the shore) information on the first side of Physical Habitat
Characterization Form. Record littoral habitat (in the lake) information on the second side.
5.
For most categories multiple items may have heavy (3), moderate (2), or sparse (1) cover
rating.
6.
Shoreline Vegetation Cover: assess extent of habitat and cover provided in each "layer."
The same plants may provide habitat in more than one layer.
7.
Shoreline Substrate: assess substrate out of water, within 1 m of waterline (or shore).
8.
Human Influence: for each of the types of human activities or disturbances, record presence
within shorelinellittoral plot (V") or adjacent/behind plot ("B"). If an item is both inside and
outside the plot, mark V."
9.
Assess bank angle: assess angle immediately at waterline (or shore) and 1 m back.
10.
Station Depth: depth 10m (30 ft) from shore. Measure with PVC-sounding tube, line, or
sonar.
11.
Bottom Substrate: assess visually and/or with sounding tube and/or anchor.
12.
Fish Cover: score (0, 1, 2) the areal cover and abundance of fish concealment features
shown on the form.
13.
Littoral Habitat Classification: use these 4-letter codes to describe littoral microhabitat
(current station) on Physical Habitat Characterization Form and to describe littoral
macro habitat on Habitat Sketch Map Form.
14.
Possible fishing gears: determine if it is possible to deploy trap nets, gill nets, or seines at
each site.
5-10
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Habitat Assessment
June 1994
PHYSICAL HABITA T'CHARACTERIZA TlON' FORM-lAKES
LAKE NAME: L. "'J~c ncuf: DATE OF VISIT: 7' '1 'tI'I VISIT #: ti) 2
LAKE ID: Il Y ~ a.... Jl. L TEAM ID Icn:I8l: , rD 3 . I . 7 1 I 10 OTMEII: -
NEW STA110N lD'Uf~
RIPARIAN PlOT' 8TATlClNlDi 'A< ';'.", p', c~, . D' E F Q, H, I J
VECETA110N TYN ~LAYBI'> 6111 1M JIll JM All AI' AI ... ~ ... M
N-1IOI8. D- OIQD.. C-cow.. M-88J _,_'0.6 TO 6.' 1M 1M 1M M n M M M At M
AIIEAI. COVIMGE CA~ O-Auurr , -.......1<10,.), Z-MOIIIM1W110'TO CO,.}, 3::...HrAw 140 TO 711,., 4.VBlYlEAw I> 71'1"
_LA'" TIiID a 0.3. DIM I ~ ~ -' I"J I '1 ~ I 2.
1>1-- TIiID < 0.3 II DIM !1 .. ,~ ..2. t!J ~ ~ ~ ~ 3
.............. ~S_.~ !1 ~ .2. ~ 1 ~ ~ 4 '4 ,
_-0.8..1., TAU.~.~..~ ~ I I I ..2. I ('J I .2. I
w_--.--- '" ':t .2. .~ .1 I 'f &./ .J ,1
--- HBIU.~..~ ~ I !.l ~ .~ ~ I I 1. ,/
1<0.8-- ST- WA'I1II 0II1IUmA'fID VllllrA,.. 0 () t:) 0 2.. ~ j#"j Q ~ 0
IANB 011-- n I .2. 2. t:J ~ ~ t) 0 /
8IDIIoaI1> -.., - -...... 0 " Q tJ 0 C) t":J 0 CJ f::j
~IZIIO._..,--...- I ,., 4 _1 2... t:J J t:J (!j ,'t
-'IE COIIU/IlllAVEL 12. UO.., --.- - ~ '" () I I .:t t ~ 3 t::J
nIlE WIII8I 1'\ '" CJ Q 0 I') 0 r:J t"J 0
--- LOosE SAM) 10.08... 2.., G8I'n --'
fIUR" tJ " ~ t") I') 0 0
OTMEII I'M SOIJ8-lc 0.08.., _T - ~ I") ~
VlDlTATID .:l. f"J ~ .! .1 .~ .1 , .3 .3
OTMEII cr.u. -- 0 0 0 0 0 0 0, 0 0 (!;)
AJiIQLE: V --~. s. 3O-78".O.c" (;. t;. ~ &- (; t;. ~ ~ (;. V
110II1II
FEA TURD VEJmCA&. &.AU UVB. D_'.' D.~ A2. IJ.~ 41 ".1 IJ.J. ".1 1).1 IJ.2 fJ.2
1-"N8 punt
DIITAIICI FIIOII WA1IIIU8 TO ~A'I1II MA8 ,., ltJ I.d 0., 1.0 FJ J.t) 1.0 lv., I.D It'. 3
HUMAN INFLUENCE 0'. ASSENT OIECIC (.IJ 8, 'PfIESD4T wmllil PlOT B - OBSERVED ADJACENT TO OR BEHIIIO PlOT
--- f') ,/ c, 8 0 13 0 " t:) 0
CO.R1IIICIIIL /"} ,) L U 0 0 t:) I'J t:J 0
PAM FAcanu I'J () I'. tj f"') t!) c:; () t:) ",
DocuI8OAtI " ~ (") a LJ 10 () 0 0 0
WAW. DIDI. 011 R.-rI n t!) t!J f!.. IJ rJ " '" n t!'J
LmIII. TIIAIH D~. 011 LA-.. " ,') ~ I"'J " n ,l) ~ " '"
ROADS 011 RAuIOAD I"J (") I"J ,/ n I#J rJ t'J I""J (f)
Row CIIM8 n n n rJ ~ ~ (") 0 I'J ~
PAI1UIII 011 HA'tfIEU) i'J rJ 0 I"J ~ " " i f"') /)
OIIC:IWD ,0 ~ " I'. I) I'J t) ( ~ '"
u- t:J ./ ~ J /"'t ./ n t. {) M
OTMEIIIExPlAIIIIII COMIIBfTII ~ n /) l ~ n ,., '" ", 0
REVIEWED BY IINITIALI: ~
Rev. 6/94 Iphab1.941
PhyelC81 Habitat Ch8lactarizatlon Farm . 1
Figure 5-7. Physical Habitat Characterization Form Side, 1.
5-11
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Habitat Assessment
June 1 994
LAKEfD: N..:i.-Q 0 Q L PHY8ICAL HAllTATCHMACTIIIIZAT10N FORM e-*"*U VI8IT': (1 2
NEW STA110N 1D'0f~:
LITTORAL PLOT STATION 10: Ao, a'" C" D . F' 0 " t J
nATION DEPTH AT'O. -..-e., c,g 1./ ,/'J.g 1'1. ., I'J, f' A,L i I," l.~ ,,-, ...,.
SURFACE FILM TYPE IS- 8CU11. A- ALGAL MAT. P- OI.Y. N-N~ N A/ A./ A/ AI ,v # ;1/ A/ ,A/
BOTTOM sUBS'T1'IA TE: A"'" CIIVIIIACIE 0- ~ 1- 8IU8' e <1Kt 2- MClll8lAW no 10 ~) 3..""VY e40 TO 7&~' 4.V- IDW I> 7&,.,
IBIIIoCIt 1 >.000 -: ~ 'nWI A CARl I"J ,., ~ ,.., ~ I""J .., ,., ,., ,.,
--- 1250 . .000 .w. M8rnAU. . CAllIIZII , ,, I I '" ,., I A '" ,..,
COI8U 184.250 -: ~ uu.. ~ IIZII ~ ,., I 1 t!::J ~ ..2. '1 .2. 3
QMYB. e2 TO 84 -: LADYa» TO ~ uu.1IZII .:J. "I ,., ~ "" 2 .s. ~ ;t ~
.... 10.08 TO 2 -: Gm1Y UIWEEII FINGIJI8' I I 3' I " 2. I I I I
8LT. QAY. 011 MIICIt e < 0.08 -: !lOT GI8I'TT1 '" " ..., I'J ~ t:J ,., ~ rJ f""j
W_O- I I J I"J !l 2 I I"J !1 2.
COLQIIIBL-BLACII. OY-_Y. IUI-"'-. RO-RED. N-NCINI 011 on8II IC. ~ ~ tr ..... -~ ~ k "'V J{
""'... ..,
ODOIIIS-H.&. A-AlllDXIC. P-OI.. c-~ N-NCINI 011 OTMBI' It. ~ Ie. ~ Ai A) JC.. I( A.I /(
MACROPHYTE8 AREAL COVERAGE: 0-AUmT'1-8No-e<10'" 2.MDDlRAlII10,TO'~' 3-HlAVYC40TG7&~'4..VIIIY ....VYf>7&~'
8I..-rT r ~ , I I I I , I t
--' I I'J ,.. ~ , I ;') ,.., I I"J
FI.DA'" I'J I"'} I') I "1. n I!J " 0 l~
TOTAL WIlD CO\I8I I ~ I .!:l '3 "- I I .t.. J
DO MACIIMM'tTD EXTI8 IAUWANt' IV 011 Nil M u ', ,,' V y " N V Y
FISH COVER 0- AUmT 1 -~ lIlT""'" 2-...-rW IICIIBAWTG''''-' _Yr~
AQUATIC WEED8 I I"!} , ., ~ I I I I I
5NAG8 > 0.3 .. DWIETEII " d f"j ~ 2 I"'J I " ,., ,.,
BRUSH OR WOODY DEBJU < 0.3 .. DIAMETEII . t , " 2.. , I I"J I L
INUNDATED lNE TREEI > 0.3 .. DIAMETEJI ;, J'} ,., ,., ~ tJ l:J ,'J ~ CJ
OVERHANGlNa VEGETATION < 1 . MOVE SURFACE I'J ,") " t!J ~ I I I'J CJ I
ROCK LEDGE8 OIIIMAIII' DIIOPOFF. 0 '" ,., If't A '" ,., 2. I!:) ~
BOULDEIII I " I I "' '' I I'J f"j t.i'J
HUMAN STRUCTURES IE.a.. DoCltl. LANDINGS. PIuNaI. RIPIW'. ETC.' I'J 0 '" ,., ,., ,., ~ ~ 0 ()
UTTORAL MICROHAIITAT a..uaIFlCATiON
01STUlllAllCl RSIIIIE IH - HUMAN N - NA 1UIIAL M -_I ~ U A/ A/ JrJ A/ u AI A/ ,v
COVIll cu.u IC-COVIII. O-ONII. M-MDIIDI .till n lilt ~ ~ At M t::. M AI\
COVER TYPE IN-- A-- F-....-- v--.w--- 101--' JIlt. U At - M J&A - - AA AA
SUUTIIATEIM---.8--'" C-- 8-_1 .s ~ s ~ - ~ < s .s ..s
GIAIIIG-Ckl.-. T-T- -. 8--. 0--1 -r .~ ~ ~ .,. -r ~-r r.. ~ tif""
;,';. I:J I'J . t"} 0
GIAIII.OCA~ 1D8T. . Oil. TO ......,. _. ~IITATI 0 D t"j 0 "
FlAG CODES: K- llEA.-on' 011 OUSIYATIOIIIIOT 0ITA8IBI: U- IUSPEC'i 1IEAIUIIII'.wT 011 Cl8l8VAtIIIII: r1.-': ~ETC.- IMC. FIA08--1T
EACH FIElD CIIEW. ExftAIIII AU. RAGa 011 _RATE ~ _.
REvIEWED 8Y UNIT1AL):~
Phy81ca1 H8bita1 Charactarlzatlon Form . 2
Rev, 6/94 (pheb1.941
Figure 5-8. Physical Habitat Characterization Form Side 2.
5-12
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Habitat Assessment
June 1 994
PHYSICAL HABlTATCHARACTERlZA110N COMMENT FORM P8ge 1. of 1-
LAKE ID: N. .Y .f2 12. Q. L VISIT II: 6) 2
TEAM ID lcirdel: 1 (2) 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 OTHER:
STA,.. "P"--AI'C8-:
ID ~ VAIIIULI AM. ~ 011 AM ex.uuTlOll
G B~ulC. ~ P ,,,, ~......... F3 AJtJ ........
"P'.. "/~" .~-~ ~..
~..rJor. -I I~ .-...-
A n. -- , (' "L ,.. /< ' .M .,." _III1IIIISA~
R /' / /' .".
~ ( ( ( (
'" \ \ \ '-
r. J ) ) )
II t ( I (
:r ., ,,, "_, ..~ I( .$.,'1_- '1'"- u..- 7ft a....u~' ..
A ? ~ ,,~..,~ k ~ "111M ~M.6 "m _MJ
A / /' " /
f' ( ( ( (
~ \ \ \ \
, ) '\ ) )
II ( r ( (
:r R. oS "ht!.JJl. l< ~...-It~.."'1:.-II..... -'- ,.
FlAG caoEl: K. IIO-.-IINTOIIOUIIIYA,..ATTDII"RD: U-IUUlCTIIIA8'~GllOUIIIYA11OII; Q. _C:Cll'TA8Uac-_nDWInt
MEAaUIIEIIEWT: F1. F2. ETC.. 18c:. RACI8 - IV fAc:H FIEUI t:IIfM. IEDuI8 AU. RACI8 011_,. COI8Bfn _.
CHECK HERE IF INFORMATION IS RECORDED ON OTHER SIDE OF FORM
REvIEWED 8Y IINrTlAl.) :Jc(J
Rev, 6/94 (ph8baI.94)
Physical H8b1tat ChataCl!8rizalion Com- Form . 1
Figure 5-9. Physical Habitat Characterization Comments Form.
5-13
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Habitat Assessment
June 1994
water, show the new shoreline clearly on the Habitat Sketch Map Form Side 1 (Figure 5-6). If one
or more of the P-Hab stations are "'ost" as a result of the lakeshore changes, reposition one or
more new P-Hab stations identified by an "X" following the station letter. The new stations shall
be placed at approximately the same interval along the shore as the rest of the P-Hab stations.
Note, for example, that two "lost" stations Band C may be replaced by one new station BX,
equidistant between stations A and D. On the Physical Habitat Characterization Form (figures 5-7
and 5-8), change station "B" to "BX", and indicate that no observations were made at station C by
entering "K" flags. If more stations must be added than were "lost," there will be more than 10
stations on the lake. Use an additional Physical Habitat Characterization Form to record the data,
indicating the new or additional stations by writing "X", "V", or "Z" after the appropriate station
letter.
If the lakeshore you observe in the field is radically different than that shown on the map
outline and you are sure you are at the correct lake, redraw the P-Hab station locations. Vour new
map will need to have 10 stations equidistant around the shoreline. One way to do this in the field
is by laying a string to measure the shoreline of new outline, dividing that length by 10, then using
the string to layout the 10 station locations. Include a comment stating why, in your judgment,
the lakeshore is different than on the original outline (e.g., drought, flooding, or lake dredging).
At each P-Hab station, make observations and measurements of the shoreline from the boat
which is 10m offshore (estimated by eye). It is important to be at the proper distance from shore,
and to limit bank and shoreline observations at each station to the area that is within your field of
vision. The littoral and riparian observation plots have fixed dimensions (Figure 5-10) that are
estimated by eye. Littoral measurements pertain to the water and lake bottom in the 10m (30 ft)
distance between the boat and the shoreline and extending 15 m (50 ft) along the shore. Riparian
observations at each station pertain to the adjacent land or wetland area that is 15m wide and
extends 15 m back onto land. The bank angle and shoreline substrate observations refer to a
narrower shoreline zone that extends 1 m landward from the waterline.
The shoreline boundary is defined as the approximate interface between "lake-like"
conditions and riparian or wetland conditions. In cases where the lake shoreline is not obvious
(e.g., where there is evidence of large seasonal change in lake level) define the shoreline as the
5-14
-------
PHYSICAL HABITAT CHARACTERIZATION PLOT
HABITAT STATION OBSERVATION PLOT
15m
SHORELINE
ZONE
(1 m)
~LDOPS9
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Habitat Assessment
June 1994
current waterline. In cases where the lake shoreline is not visible, define the lake shoreline as the
approximate boundary between open water and swamp or marsh conditions into which your boat
could not easily move.
5.2.2 Physical Habitat Characterization Form and Instructions
Use the ranking system based on areal coverage in evaluations of riparian vegetation,
shoreline substrate, littoral bottom substrate, and aquatic macrophytes. The five entry choices
range from 0 (absent) to 4 (> 75% cover) and are defined in Table 5-2 which lists steps required
to complete the Physical Habitat Characterization Form (figures 5-7 and 5-8). When ranking cover
or substrate type, mixtures of more than one class might all be given sparse (1), moderate (2), or
heavy (3) rankings. One dominant class with no clear subdominant class might be ranked "4" with
all the remaining classes either sparse (" 1") or absent ("0"). Two dominant classes with more than
40 percent cover can both be ranked "3."
For the fish cover entry fields, check "0" for absence of listed habitat features, "1" if they
are present but sparse, or "2" if they are moderate or abundant. On the human influence entry
fields, check V" if present within the shoreline/littoral plot, use "B" if visible but adjacent or behind
(outside) the plot, or "0" for absence of listed habitat features. A wavy vertical line through all or
part of a column may also be used to denote" absent." If, for some reason, you cannot make
measurements at a station, record a "K" flag in all data fields for that station. This is very
important, as we have no other way of determining whether your intent is to record the absence of
features or to denote a missed station.
5.2.2.1 Riparian Habitat (Directions for Page 1 )--
Riparian habitat includes riparian vegetation cover, shoreline substrate, bank type and
evidence of lake level changes, and human influences. Record all measures or observations for
these categories on the Physical Habitat Characterization Form Side 1 (Figure 5-7).
5.2.2.1.1 Riparian vegetation cover-- To assess riparian vegetation observe the visible area
from the shoreline back a distance of 15 m (50 ft) from the shore. If the high water mark is more
5-16
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Habitat Assessment
June 1 994
TABLE 5-2. STEPS REQUIRED TO COMPLETE PHYSICAL HABITAT CHARACTERIZATION FORM
A. General
1. After completing the temperature and DO profile, begin shoreline survey, filling in the
Physical Habitat Characterization Form at each of the 10 physical habitat (P-Hab) sampling
sites, anchoring when necessary. Sketch in major features of riparian and shoreline habitats
on habitat sketch map and label each using codes provided on the Habitat Sketch Map
Form.
2. Survey plot dimensions:
RiDarian Veaetation - 15 m along shoreline and 15 m back onto land.
Shoreline Substrate and Bank Anale - 15 m along shore and 1 m back.
Littoral (in lake) - 15m along shoreline and 10m out into lake.
3. The semi-quantitative ranking for vegetation, substrate, and aquatic macrophytes is:
a. Very heavy (greater than 75% coverage)
b. Heavy (40 to 75% coverage)
c. Moderate (10 to 40% coverage)
d. Sparse (present, but less than 10% coverage)
e. Absent
B. Riparian Habitat (Side 1 of the form)
= 4
= 3
= 2
= 1
= 0
1. Divide shoreline vegetation into 3 categories:
a. Greater than 5 m high = canopy layer
b. 0.5 to 5 m high = understory layer
c. Less than 0.5 m high = ground cover layer
(Grasses or woody shrubs and tree branches can occur in more than one layer.
cover layer may be vegetation, water, barren ground, or duff.)
The ground
2. Record the type of vegetation (none, deciduous, coniferous, or mixed [at least 10 percent
of the areal coverage is made up of the alternate vegetation type)) in the two tallest
shoreline vegetation layers (canopy and understory).
3. Estimate the areal cover (A-3 above) of the shoreline vegetation, including the following
vegetation classes:
a. Canopy layer: "Trees greater than or less than 0.3 m diameter at chest height."
b. Understory layer: "Woody shrubs and saplings" and nonwoody "herbs, forbs, and
grasses. "
c. Ground cover layer: "Woody shrubs and saplings," nonwoody "herbs, forbs, and
grasses," "standing water," "barren ground," or "duff."
4. Rank the shoreline substrate 1 m into the riparian plot for areal coverage in particle size
classes shown on the Physical Habitat Characterization Form.
(Continued)
5-17
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Habitat Assessment
June 1 994
TABLE 5-2. Continued
5. Describe the angle of the shoreline bank back 1 m from the edge of the water):
a. V
b. S
c. G
= near vertical/undercut, greater than 75 degrees
= 30 to 75 degrees (steep)
= 0 to 30 degrees (gradual)
6. Estimate the vertical and horizontal distances between the present lake level and the high
water line.
7. For the listed human influence types, enter V" if present within the shoreline/littoral plot
(A-2 above), "S" if visible but outside and adjacent to the plot or within your field of vision
behind the plot, or "0" if absent. .
C. Littoral Habitat (Side 2 of the form)
1. Measure lake depth 10m from shore at each P-Hab station, noting new location if the point
has to be relocated for some reason.
2. Note the presence or absence of water surface scums, algal mats, or oil slicks.
3. Determine the lake bottom substrate visible from the boat. If the bottom is not visible,
attempt to collect a sample or characterize by remote sensing with a sounding tube (e.g.,
PVC tubing).
4. Rank the littoral substrate sediment particle size, using classes shown on the Physical
Habitat Characterization Form, according to areal extent, making multiple probes if the
bottom is not visible. Areal extent (coverage) codes are the same as shown in A-3 above.
If the bottom is covered with logs, sticks, or other organic debris, choose "woody debris."
If the substrate is concealed by vegetation and remote sampling is not possible, use "Not
observed" flag (K). .
5. Note sediment color and odor if a sample can be collected.
6. Rank the areal coverage (as described in A-3 above) of the three aquatic macrophyte types:
submerged, emergent, and floating within the 10-by 15-m swath between your boat and
the shoreline. If you cannot see or probe the bottom with tube or anchor, move closer to
shore and note your new location in the white space in the "Sottom Substrate" section.
7. For the listed types of fish cover observed from the shore to the boat (10m offshore) and
15 m along shore (A-2 above), enter "0" for absent, "1" if the cover type is sparse, and
n 2" if moderate or abundant.
8. Fish microhabitat classification for 10m by 15 m littoral area:
a. Select a single one-letter code for each of the following: disturbance regime, cover
class, cover type, and substrate type.
b. Select one or more one-letter codes to indicate all possible fish collection methods for
the site.
5-18
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Habitat Assessment
June 1994
than 15m away from shore, this area includes parts of the shore that are sometimes inundated. If
the Rshoreline" boundary (defined as the approximate interface between "lake-like" conditions and
riparian or wetland conditions) is an inundated wetland, then this area includes the wetland
vegetation.
Conceptually divide the shoreline vegetation into three layers:
. Canopy (> 5 m high)
. Understory Layer (0.5 to 5 m high)
. Ground Cover Layer «0.5 m high).
Note that several vegetation types (e.g., grasses or woody shrubs) can potentially occur in more
than one layer. Similarly note that some things other than vegetation are possible entries for the
"Ground Cover" layer (e.g., water or barren ground), as indicated in Table 5-2.
Before estimating the areal coverage of the vegetation layers, record the type of vegetation
(Deciduous, Coniferous, Mixed, or None) in each of the two taller layers (Canopy and Understory).
Consider the layer "MixedR if more than 10 percent of the areal coverage is made up .of the
alternate vegetation type.
5.2.2.1.2 Shoreline substrate--Rank, by areal coverage, very heavy, heavy, moderate,
sparse, and absent" particle size classes of the substrate that is visible in the 1-m wide strip nearest
to the lake shoreline. These size estimates are made by eye from the boat, using the size classes
defined on the Physical Habitat Characterization Form Side 1 (Figure 5-6). If the inorganic substrate
is obscured by vegetation, choose "Vegetated"; if there is another type le.g., organic flotsam),
record its coverage rank in the "other" category and then identify the category in the comments
section.
5.2.2.1.3 Bank type and evidence of lake level changes--Choose one of the bank angle
descriptions that is dominant for the current shoreline within your field of vision and 1 m into the
riparian plot: V = Near vertical/undercut (> 75 degrees, S = Steep; > 30 to 75 degrees, hard to
walk up bank; or G = Gradual, 0 to 30 degrees, easy to walk up). Estimate the vertical difference
5-19
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Habitat Assessment
June 1994
between the present level and the high water line; similarly, estimate the horizontal distance up the
bank between current lake level and evidence of higher level.
5.2.2.1.4 Human influences--Check ("\I") any and all of the human activities and influences
that you observe within the defined lake and riparian observation areas. If present adjacent to the
plot or within your field of vision behind (outside) the defined observation area, enter "B." Enter
"0" if human activity is not present in either case.
5.2.2.2 Uttorm Habitat (Directions for Page 2)--
Lake depth at the habitat survey stations is taken using the sonar, calibrated Secchi disk
line, or the marked PVC sounding rod. Measure depth at each of the P-Hab stations, 10m (30
feet) offshore. Note the presence or absence of water surface scums, algal mats, or oil slicks; use
the codes provided on the form. All measures or observations in these categories are recorded on
the Physical Habitat Characterization Form Side 2 (Figure 5-7).
During the littoral portion of the habitat work, look for and collect an example of any
freshwater mussel firmly attached to hard substrates. . Also do this at the launch site. Procedures
are detailed in the benthos section (Section B) of this manual.
5.2.2.2.1 Bottom substrate--To characterize littoral bottom substrate, restrict observations
to the substrate you can see from the boat. If you can't see the bottom, collect a sediment sample
using a long tube (e.g., the 3-m PVC sounding rod). Probe the bottom beneath the boat with the
sounding rod (you may have to move closer to shore). Soft sediment can be brought to the surface
for examination. Hard sediments can be "felt" with the sounding rod. Sandy substrate can be
"felt" or "heard" by twisting the sounding rod and detecting grittiness. If you had to move into
shallow water to observe sediment characteristics, flag the observation and record (in the
comments section of the form) the depth where you observed the sediment. Rank the substrate
sediment particle sizes that have very heavy, heavy, moderate, sparse, and absent areal coverage
(A-3 in Table 5-2). Base these ran kings on visual observations and judgments using the general
size classes defined on the form. If the bottom is covered with logs, sticks, or other organic debris,
choose "woody debris." If the substrate is obscured by vegetation and you cannot obtain a PVC
sounding rod sample, enter a "K" flag to denote "no observation made." However, probing with
the sediment tube usually makes it possible to determine if the sediment is soft (therefore either
Sand or Silt/Clay/Muck).
5-20
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Habitat Assessment
June 1 994
Sediment color and odor are subjective observations to be noted with codes shown on the
form. Enter the code for "None/Other" if sediment color does not match one of the codes. For
sediment odor, example entries are "H2S" (sulfurous, ronen egg), "Anoxic" (sewage odor),
"Chemical" (strong odor like turpentine, paint, etc.), "Oil/petroleum", or "None/Other" (including
musty, no odor, organic, and fishy odors). If "Other" is noted, explain the observation on the
comment form.
5.2.2.2.2 Aquatic Macrophytes--To characterize aquatic macrophytes, separately estimate
the areal coverage (as defined in Table 5-2) for each of the three aquatic macrophyte types
(submerged, emergent, and floating) present within the lake area between your boat and the
shoreline. Emergent vegetation has erect portions above the water surface. Floating refers to
either rooted or nonrooted vegetation. Count any plant as being in only one of these types. Then
estimate the coverage of all combined types of aquatic macrophytes in the same area. You may
have to probe the bonom with the PVC sounding tube or your anchor if the water is turbid.
Indicate (yes or no) if the aquatic macrophytes extend further out into the lake than the area
included in your observation area (i.e., more than 10m or 30 ft from shore).
5.2.2.2.3 Fish Cover--Evaluate the presence and abundance of the fisted types of fish
cover features that are in the water and shoreline within the 10-m by 15-m linoral portion of the
field of vision at each P-Hab station (Table 5-2). Enter "0" for cover types that are absent, "1" for
those present but sparse, or "2" for those that are moderate or abundant. These features are
within or partially within the water and conceal fish from aquatic and terrestrial predators such as
larger fish, oners, kingfishers, and ospreys.
"Aquatic Weeds" may include submerged, floating, or emergent forms and may provide
concealment or protection for fish. "Snags" are considered to be inundated or partially inundated
tree boles, branches, or rootwads with diameter ~0.3 m (1 ft). "Woody debris or brush" is defined
as inundated dead or living woody vegetation that is <0.3 m diameter, whereas "Inundated Live
Trees" refers to the inundated portions of trees ~O.3 m in diameter. "Overhanging Vegetation" is
defined as that which is < 1 m from the water surface, because this low overhanging vegetation
provides concealment from fish-eating birds. Do not include higher overhanging vegetation, which
might provide perches for birds such as kingfishers. "Rock Ledges or Sharp Dropoffs" include
overhanging banks, submerged rock shelves, and steep sloping rock walls that can provide cover
for fish. "Boulders" (>basketball size) also offer fish cover and concealment. "Human Structures"
5-21
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Habitat Assessment
June 1 994
include docks, barges, houseboats, swimming platforms, tires, car bodies, and habitat enhancement
structures (e.g., log rafts) that can provide cover for fish.
5.2.2.2.4 Uttoral Habitat Classification (four-letter fish habitat codes and possible fishing
gear)--The final three tasks relate to fish sampling. Examine the P-Hab station and assign a four-
lener habitat code. Assess the P-Hab site to determine whether a gill net, trap net, or seine may be
deployed there and use the four-Iener codes to map the entire shoreline, including areas between
the P-Hab stations (Section 5.3).
5.2.3 The Habitat Sketch Map Form and Instructions
Information about linoral and riparian macrohabitat characteristics and human activities
between the 10 P-Hab stations is valuable. Record this information in comment fields and sketch it
in on the map outline, using the codes provided on the Habitat Sketch Map Form Side 1 (Figure 5-
6). These sketch maps should include features near the P-Hab stations as well as those in
between. As you proceed by boat along the shoreline of the lake, sketch in the location and extent
of residential development, forest cover, wetlands, farmland, and other important riparian features.
Also record the location and extent of other important features like lake inlets, outlets, mid-lake
reefs, beaches, rock walls, and aquatic weed beds (floating, emergent, and submerged).
In cases where the mapped lakeshore (given on the Habitat Sketch Map Form Side 1) may
be different from what you actually see in the field (see Section 5.2.1), show the changes clearly
on the habitat sketch map. If, for example, a bay is dry or inaccessible because of excessive
vegetation and shallow water, show the new shoreline clearly on the lake habitat sketch map.
Draw the positions of the "new" physical habitat stations along the redrawn shoreline, identifying
them by an "X" following the station lener (see Section 5.2.1).
5.3 LITTORAL MACRO HABITAT CHARACTERIZATION AND MAPPING
Linoral macrohabitat characterization is used both to document fish habitat extent and to
select linoral sampling sites (Section 6.2). A hierarchical classification system is used; it has four
levels. The first classification level refers to disturbance: is there maior human influence in the
linoral zone (not the shore) or is this area in a more or less natural state (including largely recovered
areas)? The second level refers to the presence of cover: Is there cover for fish, open water, or a
5-22
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Habitat Assessment
June 1994
mixture? The third level defines the kind of cover: human influence includes "structures" (docks,
boats, floating platforms, etc.) and "fill" (revetment boulders, trash, etc.); natural areas include in-
lake vegetation, boulders, or woody materials or a mixture. The fourth level describes substrate.
Littoral habitat characterization both classifies microhabitat at individual physical habitat (P-
Hab) stations (Section 5.2) and assigns macrohabitat types to shoreline segments around the entire
lake. In order to assign macrohabitat types (Table 5-3), quickly develop an idea of the number and
kinds of major habitats on the whole lake (even before going onto the water and while locating the
index site). During the shoreline survey and physical habitat assessment (Section 5.21, classify the
macro habitat types using four letter codes (Table 5-3) and mark boundaries between the
macrohabitat classes on the sketch map on the Habitat Sketch Map Form Page 1 (Figure 5-6).
Ideally, subdivide the entire littoral habitat into a maximum of 4 or 5 macrohabitat types, but
generally not more than the number of littoral fish sampling stations allowed in Section 6.2.1.
During the initial mapping and evaluation, keep this number in mind. For the whole lake, a
macrohabitat type needs to cover a total of ~ 10% of the extent of the entire littoral habitat to be
considered a major macrohabitat type.
Table 5-3 summarizes the process for characterizing lake macrohabitats. This process
emphasizes large-scale habitat areas that characterize broad stretches of the littoral zone and avoids
fragmenting the shoreline. Individual classification segments should not be less than" 5 percent of
the shoreline. For example, if a long stretch of shore (hundreds of meters) has no major human
influence, is mostly open with a muddy bottom, and has the occasional 1-2 m weed patch, that
area is all Natural-Open-None-Mud (NONM). The weed patches are too rare and small to rate them
as a major macrohabitat type in that stretch. However, if the weed patches were larger and/or
more common but still scattered, that stretch is all designated Natural-Mixed-Vegetated-Mud
(NMVM), rather than a series of small Natural-Open-None-Mud (NONM) and Natural-Cover-
Vegetated-Mud (NCVMI areas. Some lakes will consist entirely of one littoral macrohabitat.
Information on the microhabitat at each of the P-Hab stations is recorded on the Physical
Habitat Characterization Form Page 2 (Figure 5-8). This information will aid the process of locating
fish sampling sites. As described in Section 6.2, littoral fish sampling will be done at a set of the
P-Hab stations, as close as possible to the actual stations. At each station assess and record: (1)
the littoral microhabitat, using the four-letter code system in Table 5-3; (2) whether or not the
5-23
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Habitat Assessment
June 1994
TABLE 5-3. FISH LITTORAL MACRO HABITAT CLASSIFICATION
1. Upon arrival at the lake and during bathymetric, dissolved oxygen, and temperature profile
measurements, make a preliminary assessment of what the major littoral habitats appear to be.
Think in terms of broad-scale habitat sections and using the hierarchical classification below.
2. While circling the lake for the physical habitat assessment, sketch the extent of major littoral
habitats on the Habitat Sketch Map Form. Use the 4-letter hierarchical codes (e.g., HCAM)
below to describe habitat types.
1 st level (in-lake disturbance)
Human or Natural or Mixed
2nd level (in-lake cover)
~over (major fish cover) or Q,pen or Mixed (patchy)
3rd level (cover type)
Artificial Structure (docks, boats) or fill (revetment,
boulders, etc.) or ~egetated or Woody or Ioulders or
Mixed (a combination) or None
4th level (main substrate)
Mud/Muck or ~and/gravel or ~obble/Boulder or Bedrock
3. Avoid sketching fragments. Habitat segments must be ~5% of shoreline and total at least
10% for the whole lake.
4. After completing the shoreline survey, finalize the habitat classification and transfer
macrohabitat classes to the map on the Fish Sampling Sites Form. Draw these classes outside
lake outline, leaving the lake area of the map clear to denote sampling site locations. Use the
Habitat Sketch Map Form: the sketch map (page 1) is the preliminary working version (kept as
part of the data) and the map on page 2 for assigning fish sampling sites is the clean final
version of the littoral habitat classification.
5-24
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Habitat Assessment
June 1994
station's microhabitat is representative of the !:!J.!£!.Qhabitat; if not, estimate the distance from the
station to the nearest representative location; (3) which fish sampling methods could be used at
that station (or nearest representative location), if any. Microhabitat classification steps are
detailed in Table 5-4.
Finally, because in many lakes places suitable for using either the beach seine or the
minnow seine will be in short supply, look for any possible seining sites while traversing the
shoreline. Note these locations (and which gear will work) on the sketch map as you move around
the lake.
5.4 EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLY LIST
A checklist of equipment and supplies required to conduct protocols described in this
section is shown in Figure 5.11. This checklist is similar to but may be different somewhat from
the checklists in Appendix A, which are used at a base site to assure that all equipment and
supplies are brought to and are available at the lake. The field teams are required to use the
checklist presented in this section to assure that equipment and supplies are organized and available
on the boat in order to conduct the protocols efficiently.
5-25
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Habitat Assessment
June 1994
TABLE 5-4. FISH LITTORAL MICROHABITAT CLASSIFICATION
At each P-Hab station, after completing the habitat assessment, make the following evaluations and
record them on the Physical Habitat Characteristic Form Page 2.
1. Classify the littoral habitat for that station, using the same 4-letter system described in the
Macrohabitat Classification Table. Microhabitat assessment refers just to the area of the
station. Record the information on the Littoral Habitat Classification section of the Physical
Habitat Characterization Form Page 2.
2. Use this assessment to evaluate whether the station's microhabitat is representative of the
overall macrohabitat determined for that shoreline area.
a. If the station microhabitat is representative (i.e., it has the same four-letter code as shown
on the sketch map), then record a zero (0) in the "distance to repres. location" box.
b. If not, look in both directions for the nearest location you judge to be representative of the
macrohabitat. Estimate and record the distance (in 10s or 100s of meters as appropriate)
and direction (L = left, R = right when facing shore).
3. Assess whether gill nets, trap nets, or seines are usable at that site or the nearest
"representative" location. More than one type of gear may be usable. Criteria for determining
possible fish collection gears for each sampling station are as follows:
Gill nets
a. Depth >1.5 m
b. No ledges or steep drops to distort the net.
c. No snags to rip the net
Trap nets
a. Depth ~2.5 m at frame mouth (15 m from shore), preferably < 1.5 m
b. No ledges or steep drops to distort the net
c. Few snags
Seines
a. Depth S depth of net (1.2 m)
b. Bottom smooth, snagless, wadeable.
4. Record the first initial of all appropriate methods for that location (best gear first). It is possible
that conditions preclude any sampling there. In that case, record an N (None) and the reason(s)
in the comments section.
5-26
-------
PHYSICAL HABITAT ASSESSMENT CHECKLIST
Number Needed
Each Lake
Sonar 1
Transducer with bracket and C-clamp 1
12-V wet cell battery (charged) in battery 1
case
GPS unit with manual, reference card, extra
battery pack 1
Anchor with 50-m line 1
Float to attach to anchor 1
Surveyor's tape 1 roll
Habitat Sketch Map Form 2
Physical Habitat Characterization Form 2
Physical Habitat Comments Form 3
Field notebook 1
Sampling permit 1
Quick reference handbook 1
PVC sounding rod, 3-m length, marked in 1
0.1 m increments
Inflatable viewing box 1
00 meter 1
Figure 5-". Physical habitat assessment checklist.
5-27
INTERNAL REPORT
Habitat Assessment
June 1994
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Habitat Assessment.
June 1994
NOTES
5-29
-------
~
INTERNAL REPORT
Habitat Assessment
June 1994
NOTES
5-30
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Habitat Assessment
June 1994
NOTES
5-31
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Habitat Assessment
June 1994
NOTES
5-32
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1994
SECTION 6
FISH SAMPUNG
by
Thomas R. Whittier, Peter Vaux, David V. Peck, and Roger B. Yeardley
Fish are collected by overnight sets of trap nets, minnow traps, and gill nets, and by seining
after sunset. The proportions and locations of major habitats are determined before fishing begins,
and each habitat is sampled regardless of its expected productivity. Thus, fish sampling is stratified
by habitat and random within habitats. The fish are identified to species and examined for external
gross pathology. Long-lived species are measured for length. Specimens of small fishes are
preserved for species confirmation and museum archival. Five large fish are collected for tissue
contaminant analysis. Very rigorous quality assurance practices are observed in the field. To
ensure legibility and completeness in recording sample information, one individual completes field
forms and labels. Another person checks the forms and labels to verify that all pertinent
information is included. Activities described in this section are summarized in Figure 6-1.
6.1 PHYSICAL HABITAT DESCRIPTIONS
The field team records physical habitat descriptions on the first day (before fish sampling
begins) and uses these descriptions to determine locations for sampling as well as to document the
presence, location, and extent of the lake habitats. For EMAP-SW purposes two primary habitat
types are assessed and sampled differently: the linoral and the pelagic. The pelagic (open water)
habitats (Section 5.1) are characterized by depth profiles of temperature and dissolved oxygen
(DO). The linoral (shallow and near shore) habitat characterizations (Section 5.3) are made during
the shoreline physical habitat assessment (Section 5.2).
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1994
FISH SAMPLING ACTMTlES
DAY 1 ACTIVITIES
SHORE (1 Person)
. Prepare trap nets
. Prepare minnow traps
. Prepare gill nets
. Prepare Fish Tally fonns
BOAT (2 Persons)
. Condud lake profile
. Habitat charaderization:
. Map littoral macrohabitats on Habitat Sketch Map
- Assess gear suitability and habitat at each station
. Coiled benthos samples (optional)
RETURN TO SHORE
,
SHORE (3 Persons)
. Oetennine lake's habitats
. Allocate effort among gear types
. Seled sampling locations
. Mar1t sampling sites on Site location Map and transfer
macrohabitat extent from Habitat Sketch Map
. Load nets Into boat
SHORE (1 Person)
. Complete preparing gill nets
. Prepare materials for voucher specimens
. Prepare for night seining
BOAT (2 Persons)
. Deploy trap nets and minnow traps
. Deploy gill nets (after 6 PM)
~LDOPSg... PPT
RETURN TO SHORE
I
BOAT (2 or 3 Persons)
CHECK GILL NETS IF REQUIRED (10 PM)
. Retrieve gill nets
. 10 and tally fish colleded
. Set aside candidate specimens for tissue sample
- Preserve voucher specimens
- Redeploy gill nets
BOAT (3 Persons)
NIGHT SEINING (after dusk)
. Travel to seining sites
. Condud seining
. Record effort info on Fish Tally Fonn
. 10 and tally fISh
. Set aside candidate specimens for tissue
sample
. Preserve voucher specimens
Figure 6-1. Summary of Fish Sampling Activities (page 1 of 2)--Day 1.
6-2
...
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1994
FISH SAMPUNG ACTIVITIES
DAY 2 ACTIVITIES
SHORE (1 Person)
. Prepare for fish tissue sample processing
BOAT (2 Persons)
RETRIEVE GILL NETS
. ID and tally fISh colleded
. Set aside candidate specimens for tissue sample
. Preserve voucher specimens
. Complete Tally Form
I
RETURN TO SHORE
SHORE (1 Person)
. Complete voucher materials
. Layout nets to dry
. Prepare for water and sediment sampling
BOAT (2 Persons)
RETRIEVE TRAP NETS AND MINNOW TRAPS
. ID and tally fish colleded
. Set aside candidate specimens for tissue sample
. Preserve voucher specimens
. Complete Tally Form
I
RETURN TO SHORE
SHORE (1 Person)
. Select candidate specimens for composite sample
. Prepare sample for shipment
. Complete Fish Tissue Tracking Form
. Complete voucher materials and check preservation
. Pack voucher jars for transport
. Clean and pack nets for transport
. Layout nets to dry
- Check, clean and repair
. Disinfect with weak bleach
. Fold dry nets
~LGCPS94 PPT
Boat (2 Persons)
COLLECT WATER AND
SEDIMENT SAMPLES
-
Figure 6-1. Summary of Fish Sampling Activities (page 2 of 2)--Day 2.
6-3
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1994
6.2 SELECTING FISHING SITES
An assessment of the presence and extent of major fish habitats is made before sampling
sites are selected. The data used in site selection include a temperature and DO profile,
bathymetric data, physical habitat data, and shoreline maps of littoral habitat. In the standard
protocol, all (oxygenated) major habitats are sampled regardless of their expected productivity (i.e.,
gear are not placed to maximize catch). Fish sampling sites are chosen by a stratified (by
macrohabitat), random (within habitat) process. Depending on lake size, 3 to 26 fishing sites are
selected. In addition to these standard protocol sites, the team selects one or two "best
professional judgment" sampling sites.
The midlake (pelagic) portion of the lake is stratified into as many as three macrohabitats:
epilimnion, metalimnion (thermocline), and hypolimnion. The presence, location, and extent of
these macrohabitats are determined by the temperature and DO profile, size of the lake, and overall
bathymetry. In mixed lakes the mid lake portion is considered to be one macrohabitat. The midlake
habitats are sampled by setting gill nets overnight.
The littoral zone is also stratified by macrohabitats (Section 5.3) and is sampled by setting
trap nets and minnow traps overnight, by seining after dark, and, at larger lakes, by setting 1 or 2
gill nets. Ideally, littoral fish sampling takes place at randomly selected physical habitat stations in
each macrohabitat class.
Some general guidelines for selecting sample sites are to:
e
Avoid areas with heavy boat traffic or recreational activity.
e
Avoid areas with low DO levels. Fishing should not take place in water with less than
2 mglL dissolved oxygen.
e.
Select sample sites that are representative of their macrohabitats. If the procedures
select a site that is uncharacteristic of that macrohabitat (e.g., the only weed bed in a
large area of open water), move the sampling station to the closest representative
location.
6-4
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1994
If site selection procedures select a site that is directly out from a private beach or
dock it is wise to inform the property owner(s) of the purpose and duration of your activity and that
you have a state permit to sample that lake. EMAP is sampling in human influenced areas and
needs to include these sites, especially if they make up a major portion of the shoreline.
6.2.1 Fish Sampling Effort Required
Table 6-1 summarizes the amount of fishing effort required as a function of lake size. At
some lakes there may be fewer appropriate locations for one or more gear types than the number
required in Table 6-1. In order to keep the sampling effort consistent across all lakes, the teams are
required to set the number of nets listed. For gill nets, set all nets even if the lakes are too shallow
for them to fish effectively. For trap nets, some nets may be set deeper than would be ideal. In
some lakes seining may only be possible at the launch site. The only allowable exceptions to the
number of sets required in Table 6-1 are in response to state permit restrictions, threats to team
safety (too steep or deep to seine), or snag-filled areas which would destroy the nets.
6.2.2 Selecting Sites for Midlake Gill Nets
The site selection process for gill nets aims to sample all midlake fish habitats. In stratified
lakes these habitats are hypolimnion, metalimnion, and epilimnion. Any areas with DO less than
2.0 mg/L are not considered fish habitats and are not sampled. Conversely, some deep lakes are
characterized by extensive volumes of cold oxygenated water. At these lakes, the site selection
process is modified to emphasize sampling this habitat. In general for stratified lakes:
.
Sample the hypolimnion with bottom sets starting at the index site or deepest
oxygenated location (net bottom just above the oxygen depletion depth). Disperse
additional hypolimnetic sets randomly away from the first net. If oxygen depletion
occurs in the metalimnion or very top of the hypolimnion, do not sample the
hypolimnion.
.
Sample the metalimnion with bottom sets placed along (not across) the bottom contour
at the thermocline (depth of most rapid temperature change). Set the net so that the
lead line is at the thermocline (refer to Figure 5-1).
6-5
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1994
TABLE 6-1. NUMBER OF FISH SAMPLING STATIONS.
Standard Selection Protocol
. Littoral
Trap net gill net Best professional
(with (with judgment units
lake area minnow minnow Midlake (minimum
(ha) trap) trap) gill net Seining required)
1-4 1 - 1 1 1
5-14 2 - 2 2 1
15-29 3 - 3 2 1
30-49 4 0 or 1 b 3 or 4b 3 2
50-74 5 0 or 1 b 4 or 5b 3 2
75-149 6 1 5 4 2
150-249 7 1 6 4 2
250-599 8 2 6 5 2
600-999 9 2 7 5 2
1 ,000 + 10 2 8 6 2
a lakes less than 75 ha are normally sampled in one night. lakes 75 ha and larger are normally
sampled over two nights.
b Depends on lake type (see Table 6-2).
6-6
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1994
.
Sample the epilimnion with midwater sets (top of net at 1.5 m) dispersed randomly
away from the center of the lake, in water deeper than 3 m. In Figure 5-1, the deepest
net is set on the bonom with the lead line at 9.0 meters, recorded as a hypolimnion
set. Using this figure but assuming other DO conditions: If the 2.0 mg/L depth had
been at 8.0 meters, the deepest set would be at that depth, and recorded as a
metalimnion set. The second net (see Table 6-2) is set on the bonom with the lead
line at 5.0 meters. If the 2.0 mg/L depth was at 4.0 meters then the deepest set
would be a bonom set at that depth and recorded as an epilimnion set.
In unstratified lakes consider the midlake area as all one habitat and sample by bonom sets
starting at the center of the lake. In deep mixed lakes there are some midwater sets.
At larger lakes set one or two gill nets at linoral stations (Table 6-1). Select these locations
during the linoral station selection process (Section 6.2.3). Use the rules in Table 6-2 to select gill
net sites, and mark these on Page 2 of the Physical Habitat Sketch Map Form (Figure 6-2).
Final choice of gill net sites should be such that the nets will fish effectively: depth greater
than 1.5 m (if possible), not set on ledges or steep drops that may distort the net, and not among
snags which will entangle and rip the net. The lead line should not be lower than the oxygen cutoff
of 2.0 mg/L. Littoral gill nets are set parallel to shore Itop of net 1.5 m deep).
6.2.3 Selecting Sites For Uttoral Trap Nets and Gill Nets
This section describes the process for selecting the locations of linoral trap nets and gill
nets. First, determine the number of trap net and linoral gill net sites for that lake (Table 6-1).
Then estimate the proportion of shoreline included in each macrohabitat class by totalling estimated
percentages for each segment on the sketch map Ithe grand total should be between 90 to 110
percent; otherwise recheck). Record the major habitats, their estimated total extent Ipercent), and
the physical habitat stations in each habitat in the box on page 2 of the Physical Habitat Sketch
Map Form (Figure 6-2). Also note which gear may be effectively used at each station.
Some lakes will have the lake outline split over 2 or 3 Physical Habitat Sketch Map and Fish
Sampling forms. This provides more space on the map for recording habitat and sampling
6-7
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1994
TABLE 6-2. SELECTING GILL NET LOCATIONS
Use the following rules to select gill net sites.
Lake Mixed (Unstratified)
A. Lake Shallow «6 meters) and mixed
Set all gill nets on bottom. Set first net in deepest point. Set most remaining nets
approximately midway between center and randomly chosen physical habitat stations.
Place every fourth net at a littoral station (use littoral site selection).
B.
Lake Deep (~6 meters) and mixed
Same as A (above) except set every third net in .midwater. (top of net 1.5 m deep) in non-
littoral areas.
Lake Stratified
A. Lake stratified with extensive deep oxygenated water
(Defined as a layer of oxygenated water ~2 m thick below metalimnion AND the areal
extent of this layer of water exceeds approximately 50% of lake surface area.)
Set gill nets in following order:
1 . deep bottom (index site) or deepest oxygenated water near the center of the lake
2. metalimnion (bottom set following contour of the thermocline, toward randomly chosen
physical habitat station)
3. epilimnion (midwater set--top of net 1.5 m deep) approximately halfway between
center and a different physical habitat station)
4. deep bottom (away from first net in random direction)
5. metalimnion (see A.2 above)
6. littoral
. Additional sets use, in order: A-4, A-6, A-3, A-4.
B. Lake stratified, lacking extensive deep oxygenated water
1. deepest oxygenated water on bottom near the center of the lake.
2. metalimnion (see A.2 above) or bottom set in .deep. epilimnion
(if the metalimnion is anoxic). Net may be set at the same
depth as 8.1, but away from first net in a direction. set
randomly.
3. epilimnion midwater set (as A.3 above).
4. littoral.
5. same as 8.1 (away from other deep nets in a direction selected
randomly) .
6. same as 8.2.
7. same as 8.3.
8. same as 8.4.
9. same as 8.5.
10. same as 8.2.
6-8
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1994
LAKE 10:
L
1'HY8ICAL HA8lTAT8UI'CH MAP FOMIf----..
VI8IT " 1
z
un THIS MAP TO LOCARUTTOML MACROHAIITAT'1'YIII8 NIO'PI8H 8AMI'I.ING 8I1D
n,,: NYOOOI...
Urtl WHuf./S
Ac.-: 1'11.3 It..
, .st":I*-..,,. --t
RICOIII FISH SAMPLING 8TA11CIN8 - GIAA TYI'I ,G-f8&. 18T. T-- 18T. M-- -. 8-MACH -. 8-- -. EXAMPLE:
"a. FZT. ETC.'. ...",_.___~_OII.II I'"
"'M....- ADO"'. .X. 011 .J. TO ntln''''- - -.,.". _. IXAM"-I: F10C1X. NIU. ITC.
MACRO HABITAT CLASSIFlCA110NAND EXTENT SUMMARY
MACROHA8.
CLASS exxxxl
" EXnNTISI- TOTAL
"
"
-
Rev. 6/94 tsketm8111.94)
Phy8ic81 Hallitat Sketch M811 'orm . 2
Figure 6-2. Physical Hebitet Sketch Mep Form. Pege 2.
6-9
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1994
information. In these cases, record the major habitats, estimates, and stations on the chart ON
ONLY ONE of these forms.
Throughout this process, the field crew should consider the number of littoral sampling sites
as they determine the habitat classification. For example, at a small lake scheduled for two trap net
sites the crew should consider whether the lake can be reasonably viewed as having one or two
major littoral habitats, rather than automatically trying to delineate four or five. A habitat must
extend over at least 10 percent of the shoreline to be considered "major" and be sampled by
passive gear.
There are three possible scenarios for selecting littoral sites for trap nets and gill nets
(summarized in Table 6-3). The easy case is when the number of passive littoral sites required
(Table 6-1) equals the number of habitats. Choose by random methods one station in each habitat
listed in the box on the Physical Habitat Sketch Map Form Page 2 (Figure 6-2). Follow the steps in
Section 6.2.6 for recording the location of each net.
The second case is when the number of passive littoral sites exceeds the number of
habitats. Here, assign the "extra" nets to physical habitat stations in the most extensive habitats.
If one or two habitats greatly predominate, assign the extra nets proportionally to them. Use a
random method to choose the first net site in each habitat, then spread the additional sites as
evenly as possible around the shore at physical habitat stations in the predominant habitats.
When the number of habitats exceeds the number of passive littoral sites, consider the
following alternatives:
1.
Increase the sampling effort if the major habitats differ considerably and there is a high
likelihood that the fish assemblages also differ. This is the preferred option (teams are
encouraged to perform additional sampling at any lake). Treat the additional sets as
"extra" samples (Section 6.2.5).
2.
Determine if one or more of the less extensive habitats could be more effectively
sampled by seining and allocate the sampling effort for that habitat to that method.
6-10
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1994
TABLE 6-3. SELECTING LITTORAL SAMPLING SITES
Determine the following:
1.
Number of passive littoral sampling stations (number of trap nets plus number of littoral gill
nets).
2.
Proportions of shoreline in each macrohabitat (rank by extent). A macro habitat must comprise
a total ~ 10% of shoreline to be considered major.
3.
Which physical habitat stations are in each major habitat.
Select locations for littoral sampling stations:
1.
If number of littoral sampling stations = number of major habitats, randomly choose one
physical habitat station per major habitat.
2.
If number of stations is > the number of major habitats, randomly choose Q!!! physical habitat
station per major habitat, and assign remaining sampling to physical habitat stations in the
most extensive habitats in a manner that disperses sampling evenly around the lake.
3.
If number of major habitats is > the number of stations, then choose to:
. increase number of linoral stations, noting this fact and the reasons on Fish Tally Form
(append an "X" to the station code),
OR
. re-evaluate habitat classifications and combine similar habitats until number of stations =
number of major habitats
OR
. randomly choose physical habitat stations in the more extensive habitats (not sampling less
extensive habitats).
6-11
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1994
3.
Choose to not sample the least extensive habitat(s). Note reason in comments section.
4.
Reevaluate the habitat classification and combine two (or more) similar habitats.
Indicate the new (combined) macro habitat classification on the Physical Habitat Sketch
Map Form Page 2 (Figure 6-2) and note the changes in the comments section.
6.2.4 Selecting Sites for Seining
Seining (done after sunset) differs from the other fishing methods by being an active
method. In addition, while very effective, seining works well only in limited habitat conditions;
shallow shore areas (generally 1 m or less in depth) with relatively smooth, firm substrate. To be
effective, the lead line of the seine should contact the bottom at all times during the haul. Snags,
rocks, and other obstructions cause the lead line to ride up off the bottom or become stuck,
permitting the fish to escape.
Another difference associated with seining is that EMAP uses two alternate gears, the
beach seine (preferred) and the short seine. Use the short seine only when there are insufficient
numbers of clear beach-like areas large enough to effectively use the beach seine. Because it is
smaller, use the short seine in areas with modest amounts of vegetation, somewhat rocky bottoms,
or between snags. However, the short seine will be less effective, covering a smaller area in each
haul and allowing fish to escape more easily. Be sure that all data records clearly distinguish which
type of seine you used.
The ideal beach seining sites will be at least 50 m long, with a clear shoreline such that the
seine can be drawn up onto the shore. In such locations, mark out in advance (with light sticks or
surveyor ribbon) two 25-m segments in which to make separate hauls. These two 25-m segments
make up one site and may be discontiguous. To be considered as one site the two segments must
be (1) within 5 percent of the lake shoreline length of each other and (2) within the same
(contiguous) macrohabitat segment. Choices of where to seine will be very limited at most lakes.
Often there will only be one or two possible seining locations, usually shorter than the ideal 50 m.
Use those places regardless of which habitat they are in.
If there are no sites where beach seining is possible (or fewer sites than specified in Table
6-1), then choose additional sites for the short seine. Determining what constitutes an acceptable
6-12
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1994
short seine site and a reasonable number and length of short hauls is very subjective. The target
level of effort for short seine sites is four hauls each, in two 25-m lengths of shoreline. A site may
include one segment which is a beach seine haul (~ 25 m) and another segment which includes up
to 4 short seine hauls. Section 6.5 provides instructions on how to document use of a short seine
and beach seine at the same site. Every reasonable effort should be made to do some seining.
At some lakes the only beach seining sites will be on private property. Team members
should inform the owners of the purpose and duration of the sampling activities and that a state
permit has been issued for that purpose.
If there are numerous possible seining locations, then distribute the required effort among the
habitats if possible at randomly chosen physical habitat stations not already being fished by passive
gear. In this case it may be better to choose beach seining sites first and then allocate passive
sampling sites. Use the seine at least 100 m away from the nearest passive gear. These
procedures for selecting seining sites are summarized in Table 6-4.
6.2.5 Judgment and "Extra" Sampling
There are two kinds of sampling in addition to the standard selection protocols (Table 6-1).
First, at all lakes the teams are required to perform at least one or two "units" of Bes"t Professional
Judgment (BPJ) sampling. The members of each team should decide how they would add sampling
effort to improve the overall index sample of fish--i.e., to catch additional species and to get larger
numbers of species they expect will be undersampled by the standard protocol. The team may
target a microhabitat location (e.g., place a trap net at a stream inlet or the only weed patch) or use
a nonstandard method (e.g., daytime short seining in an area too cluttered for night seining, or
angling or dipnetting). There are two constraints on nonstandard methods; the state permit must
allow the method (analers must buy their own state fishina licenses) and the team must use
methods other than angling. Use "N" as the gear code for all nonstandard methods and record the
method in the "other" space. (Use the following standard terms for some of the common
"nonstandard" gear: angling, dipnet, daytime seining, deep set minnow trap.) If one or more team
members plan to angle, they should record their time and catch, but the team will use some other
6-13
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1 994
TABLE 6-4. SELECTING SEINING SITES
During the shoreline survey, note any shallow shore areas with relatively smooth firm substrate,
fairly free of snags, rocks, and other obstructions.
In the following order:
1.
Give preference to sandy beaches ~50 m long (where beach seine can be used). In such
locations, mark in advance (with light-sticks) two 25-m segments. Segments may be
discontiguous.
2.
If no long beaches exist, then choose shorter beaches for beach seining.
3.
If there are no sites for beach seining (or fewer sites than required), then choose (additional)
sites for the short seine (areas with modest vegetation, somewhat rocky bottoms, or between
snags) .
4.
If there are numerous possible seining locations, distribute effort among the habitats at
randomly chosen physical habitat stations, at least 100m away from any passive gear.
5.
Make every reasonable effort to seine. If the only seining sites are on private property, seek
permission from owners.
6-14
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1994
BPJ sampling in addition. These judgment samples are given site numbers in sequence with the
standard selection protocol sites, appropriate gear code, and have a n In appended to the site code
(e.g., F15T J).
The second kind of additional effort occurs when the standard protocol misses one or more
major habitats (most likely at small lakes). If the number of nets in Table 6-1 is less than the
number of macrohabitats and these habitats differ greatly, the crew should add gear under the
standard protocols. For example, if the littoral zone at a 4-ha lake is 60 percent HONS and 40
percent NCVM (Table 5-3), add a second trap net. Note the reasons in the comments section, and
give it a site number appended with an .X. (e.g., F2TX).
6.2.6 Recording Gear Type Placement Data
During the above site selection process, mark sample sites on the map on page 2 of the
Physical Habitat Sketch Map Form (Figure 6-2). Each sample site is designated by F1, F2, F3, etc.,
in order of selection. Add a single letter to denote gear type (e.g., F1 T, F1 M, F2G). Trap nets and
littoral gill nets are always accompanied by minnow traps, and both gear get the same site number
(e.g., F1 T and F1 M indicate trap net and minnow trap at Fish Site 1).
For each gear type (e.g., gill net, trap net) fill out as much of the Fish Tally FOrm--lakes
(Figure 6-3) as possible before setting the gear (one form per gear type); note the lake ID, name,
start date, gear type, macrohabitat class, and nearest physical habitat station for all gear including
gill nets (for gill nets set at the index site, record an .X.). After the gear is set, (1) confirm that the
mapped sample location is correct and matches the information on the Fish Tally Form and (2) fill
out the remaining first day information--fishing depths (lead line depths of gill nets, leader and
frame opening depth of trap nets), time, distance and direction from physical habitat station,
personnel setting gear--on Fish Tally Form header. Also record the microhabitat for the actual fish
sampling location, using the same four-letter coding system. For the majority of fishing sites, this
will be the same as the !!!!£!Q.habitat for that shoreline segment. Seining sites are the most likely
cases where these two habitat classes will differ.
6-15
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1994
RSH TALLY. FORM-LAKES' Page of
LAKE NAME: 1.. W~F~~O~ VISIT: (r) 2
LAKE 10: N... ~ ..Q. .D... .a. L TEAM 10 Icircle): ,(2) 3 4 & 8 7 I , 10 OTHER:
NEAREST P-HAI ITATION IA - J. XI: Ji DlaT. . DIR. FROM ITATION: () lITE 10: F ..2...rr - -
SAMPUNGEfFORT INFORMATION
START CREW INITIALS: J3JL. -"L. -M..D. END CREW INITIALS: .1«.-..JHL. ~
START DATE: 0 -2 I ..fJ..!L I .!L -'1... END OATE: ~!l'J:LS-1!1!:L
START TIME: -LL:oD., END TIME: 1L:(J~
UTTORAL HABITAT CLASSIFICATION
MACROHAB. aAlS (FllOIIIUfCM IIIAP -I: .if A1 A.c.. MICII0HA8. CLA88 'FOIl - 8mI: ,v!!!.M.-'.
PElAGIC HABITAT CLASSIFICATION Cdrcleone)
ISOTHEJIIIAL "-- MIr~ ~
SAMPLING GEAR INFORMATlONCclrcleon8)
(' GLL N~ TRAP NET I M- TRAP IllACH -- -.-.. 1- . OTHBII~:
TYPE OF GIL1. NET SET IClRcu): TOTALAMA --: - ..
LmO~ M_ATEIII IoTTOM
aullFACE TOTAL -- fW _IIAUU -
FISHING DEPTHS: MINIIotUM: .L.s:.M MAxIMUM: ~-.L M
COMMENTS:
JAR 10 (Barcodel: !I ~ i .L .1. L
CHECK HERE IF NO FISH WERE COLLECTED: .
TAG ID:.1l.3.. -
Common Na....: ~,- D 10:" r...J SPECIES CODI!: .L.£2...../J..k.L fLAG:
I , y~y
Adult II JuwniIe
TOTAL MUSEUM , MEA8UIIED TOTAL MUIBIII .M- TOTAL MUSEUII 'MEA8UIIED
FOII~: FOII~ FOII~:
:A. 0 ;... '- ~ ~
Common Na....: 1= It " I., ~ J. SPECIES CODE: ~IiM.1J..~D... fLAG:
Adult +tH- 1HI- II JuwniIe y~y
TOTAL MUIIUIII . MEA8UIIED TOTAL MUIBIII .M- TOTAL MUIIUII 'MEA8UIIED
FOIl LDa1M: FOII~ FOII~:
1"-. 1"- I~
REvIEwED IY IINITIALI: ~
Rev.6/94 (Itally1.94)
Fleh T aSy Form- Lalla.- 1
Figure 6-3. Fish Tally Form--Lakes Page 1.
6-16
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1994
6.3 PREDEPLOYMENT PREPARATION OF FISHING GEAR
While two team members in the boat collect bathymetry, physical habitat, temperature, and
DO data, the third team member will remain on shore to prepare the trap nets and minnow traps
(Table 6-5). This person can also begin to prepare the gill nets (Table 6-6), although this task
cannot be completed until the gill net sites are selected and depths are known. A working
mid water gill net is shown in Figure 6-4.
6.4 DEPLOYMENT METHODS
The team deploys passive fishing gear (trap nets, minnow traps, and gill nets) following site
selection and gear preparation and seines after sunset. To set any gear, the two-person team
travels to the locations marked on page 2 of the Physical Habitat Sketch Map Form (Figure 6-2).
The exact placement of gill and trap nets follows the instructions at the ends of sections 6.2.2 and
6.2.3. If there are no physical constraints (e.g., steep bottom combined with a narrow littoral,
dense weeds, snags) assign trap nets and littoral gill nets to the selected physical habitat stations
at random. Selected sampling stations with steep sloped bottoms and/or very narrow shallow areas
are good candidates for littoral gill nets (set parallel to shore). Stations with snags and woody
debris would preferentially get trap nets. Littoral gill nets can be set in quite weedy areas, if care is
used. Each minnow trap is set 0.5 to 1 m deep, within 50 m of the sampling site trap net or littoral
gill net, and is considered to be within the same site (e.g., if trap net is F4T, then the associated
minnow trap is F4M).
Ideally, sites for passive littoral gear were selected (Section 6.2.3) directly at the randomly
chosen physical habitat stations. It is important that the sampling results represent the fish
assemblage in that macrohabitat. If the chosen physical habitat station appears nonrepresentative
of the macro habitat class (e.g., the station happens to be vegetated in a long stretch of open
habitat), then deploy the gear in the nearest representative area (but not more than 5 percent of the
shore length away), and record the reason for the move and the distance and direction from the
station on the Fish Tally Form (Figure 6-3) in the comments space under the "header." If the
macrohabitat class includes one of the "Mixed" categories, then try to place the gear in a truly
mixed area.
6-17
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1994
TABLE 6-5. ONSHORE PREPARATION OF TRAP NETS AND MINNOW TRAPS
Trap Nets
1.
Refer to the manual to determine the minimum number of trap nets and minnow traps for that
size lake.
2.
For each net:
Set out 4 anchors, each with a O.5-m line and quick-clip. Place the anchors in a tub.
Set out one float with a 4-m line and quick-clip and two floats, each with a 1.5-m line and
quick-clip. Place all the floats in a tub.
Tie the cod end and lay the net on the ground, cod end down.
Pull the leader and each wing out and untangle them; fold the left wing, then the right wing,
neatly on top of their sides of the net. Fold the leader neatly on top of the middle of the net.
3.
Load the nets onto the bow, with the cod end down, the frame bottom forward, and the floats
aft. Load the tubs.
Minnow Traps
1.
For each trap, place a rock and bait with dry dog food in one half and clip the two halves
closed.
2.
Clip a 1.5-m line with float to each trap.
6-18
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1 994
TABLE 6-6. ONSHORE PREPARATION OF GILL NETS
Determine the minimum number of gill nets required for that lake. Get out that many net tubs.
After site selection--bottom sets (refer to the diagram of types of gill net sets.
For each net:
Set out two anchors, each with a O.5-m line and quick-clip, and three floats, each with a 1.5-m
line and quick-clip. Place them in the tub.
Determine the set depth (A in the diagram); subtract 3 m. This will be the distance between
the top of the 1.5-m net and the bottom. of the 1.5-m float lines. Set out three lines of the
appropriate length for this distance. The total length of the 110at line should include 25 % extra
to account for net drift, etc. Each line should have quick-clips on both ends. Place the lines in
a tub. . .
After site selection--midwater (eDilimnetic) sets (refer to the diagram of types of gill net sets)
For each net, set out:
1. two anchors, each with O.5-m line and quick-clip
2. six single-ball floats, each with 1.5-m line and quick-clip, and
3. two double-ball floats, each with 1.5-m line and quick-clips. Place these in the tub.
Determine the water depth at the sampling site; subtract 3 m. This distance ("D." in the
diagram) will be the distance between the bottom of the net and the lake bottom. Multiply"D
by 1.5 to determine the anchor-line length ("E" in the diagram). Set out two lines, each of the
appropriate length for this distance. Each line should have quick-clips on both ends. Place the
lines in the tub.
Set out a float with a line ("F" in the diagram; length = site depth plus slack) and quick clip.
This is the "stretch" line. Set it in the tub.
6-19
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1994
TYPES OF GILL NET SETS
EPIUMNETIC (MIDWATER SET)
C
C
A
F
LEGEND
D
A Set depll\ (3 m wIWI . d8pIh Is . 3 m)
B FIa8t line (81ng18 b8II ft08I) IIII8dI8d .. -&In ~ (I8ngIh - A -1.5 m)
C End IIoIt 11M wilt! ft88hiIg IIgIt ftoIt IIII8dI8d (IIngIII - A - 1.5 m)
D S" d8pIh - 3 m
E A1tcttttIIine (tlUl1IngIh - 1.5 x D)
F SIr8Ich line wilt! 8IngII bill ftoIt (I8ngIh - ... dIpIII pM - II8cIc)
C
DEEP METAUMNETIC AND HYPOUMNETIC (BOTTOM SET)
(NOT TO SCALE)
B
C
LEGEND
A
A Set Depth: Equ8I to d8pIII to top of m8tIIimnion OR
depth at which disIcMd 0, is . 2 mgIL ~~ lilt)
B Float line with lingle tI8II ft08I (totaIl8ngth - A . 1.5 m)
C End Froat line witlllingIe IlllIIo8t Of ftoIt wilt! II8Ihing light 8II8cII8d (toI8I
length- 1.25 . [A - 1.5 m) )
D Anc:har (1II8ch8d dirwdIy to bGIIOfn -- 01 nit
FlDOPS9
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1994
The team also has some leeway regarding the exact placement of sampling units to improve
the effective operation of the gear. This does not include simply moving to a location expected to
produce a larger catch ("hot spots" may be sampled as part of the Best Professional Judgment
sampling described in Section 6.2.5). For example, trap nets fish most effectively when the top of
the leader and trap mouth are not submerged and the frame sits squarely on the bottom. If
conditions at the physical habitat station preclude this, the crew may choose to move the net to
the closest suitable location. If the net is not set directly at the physical habitat station, then
record the reason, distance, and direction on page 1 of the Fish Tally Form (Figure 6-3).
6.4.1 Gill Nets
At some lakes there may be restrictions required by state permits on the length of time gill
nets may be left fishing. If such restrictions occur, use the following deployment and retrieval
procedures are used at all lakes to provide comparable data. Deploy (set) all gill nets in the early
evening (2 to 3 hours before sunset) and pull at least two nets that night after a 4-hour interval.
Process fish in the standard manner (Section 6.6). Append an .A. to the station ID to denote this
first set (e.g., F4GA). At lakes with gill net restrictions, pull all nets and do not reset any. At all
other lakes start a new Fish Tally Form and reset the nets in the same location. Append a "B" to
the station ID to denote this second set (e.g., F4GA and F4GB are the first and second gill net sets
at station 4). Pay attention to the timing of dinner and night seining to meet this schedule.
Generally do seining after the gill nets are pulled.
Table 6-7 provides instructions for setting pelagic epilimnetic gill nets. Table 6-8 provides
instructions for setting bottom gill nets in the hypolimnion, at the top of the metalimnion. For
littoral gill nets follow the instructions in Table 6-8 (bottom set) except as follows:
.
The net should be entirely in the littoral zone (bottom depth approximately 3 m),
parallel to shore. Center the net across from the physical habitat station flag.
.
The top of the gill net (float line) may be at a depth less than the recommended 1.5 m
IF the lake is extremely shallow and the crew is very sure there will be no other boat
traffic on the lake.
6-21
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1 994
TABLE 6-7. SETTING EACH EPILIMNETIC GILL NET
1.
Examine the Physical Habitat Sketch Map Form and go to the appropriate location.
2.
While the boat is stationary, clip an anchor line (length determined in advance) to the lead line.
Next, clip a 1.5-m line with a double-ball float to the float line.
3. Drop the anchor into the water, then the float.
4. Put the engine in reverse and begin to slowly payout the net. Keep it clear of cleats, rivets, or
other snags. Also ensure that the float line remains above the lead line.
5. From the tub, take six floats, each with a 1.5-m line and quick-clip. As the net plays out, clip
each float to the net, at approximately 8-m intervals.
6. When reaching the opposite end of the net, clip a 1.5-m line with a double-ball float to the
float line. Clip the second anchor line to the leaq line and a stretch line (length = site depth +
slack) with float directly to the anchor.
7. Drop the anchor overboard, but retain the stretch line float.
8. Pull the net taut, then drop the float overboard.
9. Ensure the net is "fishing, II (hanging smoothly from the float line, with no tangles or twists)
either visually or with Sonar.
10. Fill in the appropriate information on the Fish Tally Form header.
6-22
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1 994
TABLE 6-8. SETTING EACH BOTTOM GILL NET--HVPOLIMNION AND METALIMNION
1.
Examine the Habitat Sketch Map Form and go to the appropriate location. Use the sonar to
locate an area with a relatively flat and snag-free bottom of the appropriate depth (determined
earlier) .
2.
While the boat is stationary, clip an anchor directly to the lead line and a marker float to the
float line.
3.
Drop the anchor into the water, then the float.
4.
Put the engine in reverse and slowly payout the net. Keep it clear of cleats, rivets, or other
snags. Also ensure that the float line remains above the lead line. Approximately midway clip
a float to the float line.
5.
When reaching the opposite end of the net, clip an anchor directly to the lead line and a float
to its float line.
6.
Drop the anchor overboard, but keep the float on board.
7.
Pull the net taut, then drop the float overboard.
8.
Cruise slowly between the three floats, using the sonar to check that the actual net depths are
as intended and that the net is not over any sharp drops or ledges.
9.
Fill in the appropriate information on the Fish Tally Form header.
6-23
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1994
6.4.2 Trap Nets and Minnow Traps
Table 6-9 provides instructions for setting trap nets. Place a baited minnow trap within 50
m of each trap net at a depth of 0.5 to 1.0 m, in cover if it exists.
6.4.3 Fish Tally Form and Instructions
After finishing each set, fill in the following information in the Fish Tally Form header:
.
Time--use 24-hour clock time;
.
Fishing depths--for trap nets "min." is the depth of the shore end of leader and "max."
is the depth at frame mouth; for gill nets max. and min. refer to lead line depths;
.
Distance (estimated as fives, tens, or hundreds of meters, as appropriate) and direction.
,
(L = left, R = right, facing shore) from physical habitat station;
.
Macrohabitat class (for that shore segment) and microhabitat class (for that sample);
.
Comments--related to set or location, etc.
6.5 RETRIEVAL METHODS
Retrieving fishing gear is the first task during the second day at the lake. Team members
retrieve one piece of gear at a time, starting with the gill nets, and process the fish in that gear
before proceeding. They retrieve gill nets according to procedures in Table 6-10 and trap nets and
minnow traps according to Table 6-11. They retrieve minnow traps while retrieving adjacent gear,
but keep fish in separate buckets and use separate Fish Tally Forms (Figure 6-3). Before processing
the collected fish the crew should complete the retrieval information in the Fish Tally Form headers
(date, time, crew initials, any comments). Details on processing the fish are in Section 6.6. If no
fish are collected, the appropriate box on the Fish Tally Form (Figure 6-3) should be checked.
6-24
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1994
TABLE 6-9. SETTING EACH TRAP NET
1.
Examine the Physical Habitat Sketch Map Form, and go to the flag for the designated physical
habitat site. Find a suitable trap net location as near as possible to the flag8 with:
a. a smooth, firm bottom with gentle slope,
b. few snags, and
c. a depth ~ 2.5 m at 15 m from shore (frame mouth location)
3. Pilot the boat to shore. Fasten the leader on shore or anchor.
4. Reverse, paying out the leader, until the frame is reached.
5. Put the motor in neutral and attach a float to both wings and throw wings and floats into lake.
6. Reverse and payout frame.
7. Attach an anchor and float with 4-m line tied to the cod end.
8. Continue to reverse away from shore, pulling on the cod end to pull the frame erect. Drop the
cod end with anchor and marker float. Ensure that stretching the trap does not pull the leader
away from the shore.
9. For each wing, retrieve the float and attach an anchor. Move each wing to a 45° angle with
the leader.
10. Complete the appropriate information on the Fish Tally Form header.
8
If the microhabitat at the physical habitat station does not represent the macrohabitat for that
shoreline segment -OR- the net cannot be set to fish effectively, move to the nearest
appropriate location and record the distance, direction, and reason for the move on the Fish
Tally Form.
6-25
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1994
TABLE 6-10. RETRIEVING EACH GILL NET
1 . Approach the downwind end of the net. From the bow, grab the marker float and pull up the
anchor.
2.
Pull the net into the boat, over the bow, and into its tub. Use reverse, if necessary, to keep
the boat from drifting into the net. Avoid cutting the net on metal edges on the bow.
3. While pulling the net into the boat, pull fish out and place them into live wells. It may be
useful to process large fish as they are pulled from the net.
4.
Detach floats and the other anchor.
5.
Record the retrieval time, date, and crew initials on the appropriate Fish Tally Form.
6.
Process the fish from the live wells.
6-26
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1994
TABLE 6-11. RETRIEVING EACH TRAP NET AND MINNOW TRAP
Trap Net
1. If benthic invertebrate samples have been collected, remove the flagging at physical habitat
station. Go to the nearby trap net.
2. Remove the anchor from each wing.
3. Go to shore. Unfasten the leader from shore.
4. Put the engine in neutral. Pull the leader, frame, then cod end into the boat, shaking the fish
down into the cod end. Detach the anchor and float from the cod end.
5. Untie the cod end and empty the contents of the net into live wells. Recheck frame box and
other net parts for remaining fish.
6. Pull the wings aboard, detach the floats.
7. Record the retrieval time, date, and crew initials on the correct Fish Tally Form.
8. Process the fish from the live wells.
Minnow Trap
1.
Pull the minnow trap before leaving that station.
2.
Either process the fish directly out of the trap or place the fish in a live well (separate from the
one used for the trap net) and process later.
3.
Record the appropriate data on the Fish Tally form.
6-27
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1994
6.5.1 Gill Nets
At all lakes, pull at least two gill nets 4 hours after the initial set and process the fish. If
there are no gill net restrictions for that lake, start a new Fish Tally Form (Figure 6-3) and reset the
net in the same location. On the morning of the second day, pull gill nets first. Use the same
station ID for both sets; append an "A" to the first set ID and a "B" to the second. Continue in this
fashion for each reset. Table 6-10 provides instructions for retrieving gill nets.
6.5.2 Trap Nets and Minnow Traps
Table 6-11 provides instructions for retrieving trap nets and minnow traps. The trap net
retrieval procedures in Table 6-11 may differ from the methods taught in some fisheries courses.
There are a variety of reasons for these differences, which will be discussed during training. To
ensure consistency, all teams will use the methods described in this manual.
6.5.3 Seines
For the standard protocols, seine after dark at sites marked (with light sticks or flagging) in
advance. See Section 6.2.4 for site selection details for the seining effort. After sunset proceed to
each seining site, which consists of up to two segments (each one up to 25 m long). At each
segment where the beach seine is used, perform one haul. At each segment where the short seine
is used, perform up to four passes. Thus each seining site includes up to two beach seine hauls or
up to eight short seine passes. Table 6-12 provides instructions for night seining with the beach
seine. Table 6-13 provides instructions for night seining with the short seine. After seining, note
all pertinent information on the Fish Tally Form (Figure 6-3). Pool fish collected in separate short
seine passes at a site in a live well and record on one Fish Tally Form; use the same procedure for
fish collected in separate beach seine hauls at a site. However, use separate Fish Tally Forms and
gear codes (B = beach seine, S = short seine) to record the use of a beach seine and short seine at
the same site; use the same site number on each of the separate Fish Tally Forms for the same site.
Before fish processing begins, record the number of hauls and calculate the area seined
(sum the products of the length of the net used times the length of the haul). It is useful,
especially for short seining, for three team members to do the seining; two to operate the net and
6-28
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1994
TABLE 6-12. NIGHT SEINING WITH THE BEACH SEINE
1.
Examine the Physical Habitat Sketch Map Form and go to an appropriate location, where up to
two segments have been marked off with light sticks or surveyor ribbon.
2.
After sunset, two people hold opposite ends of the seine and proceed with 1 haul per
designated segment as described in steps 3 through 7.
3.
Stretch the net out perpendicular to shore. Hold the shoreward stake where the water meets
the beach. The seine may be shortened somewhat by rolling it onto the stakes.if the bottom
drops off too quickly or some other factor prevents the full length from being safely used.
4.
Haul the seine parallel to shore for up to. 25 m of shoreline or until available space is used.
a. The offshore stake should be hauled with the bottom of the stake preceding the top.
b. Keep the lead line in contact with the lake bottom.
c. Move as rapidly as possible, keeping the seine moderately taut and, if possible, preventing
the float line from submerging. .
5.
About 2/3 of the way through the shoreline distance, the offshore person begins to rotate
toward shore, aiming for the segment end marker. Meanwhile the shoreward person slows,
such that both people meet (about 3 m apsn) on shore at the end of the segment.
6.
Pull both ends of the net into shore.
a. Keep the lead line in contact with the bottom.
b. Don't pull too fast; fish will jump over the float line.
c. The lead line should be slightly forward of the float line.
7.
Pull the "pocket" of the net onto shore.
a. Keep the floats high.
b. Keep the lead line taut and on the bottom, until the net is out of the water.
c. Shake fish stranded in the wings toward the center of the net.
After fish are landed leach haul)
8.
Remove all fish from the net and place them into live wells.
9.
Calculate the area seined by multiplying the working length of the net by the estimated
distance seined. Sum the total for that gear at the station and record this and other sampling
information on the Fish Tally Form header.
10. Process all fish caught.
6-29
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1994
TABLE 6-13. NIGHT SEINING WITH THE SHORT SEINE
1.
Examine the Physical Habitat Sketch Map Form and go to an appropriate location, where up to
two segments have been marked off with light sticks or surveyor ribbon.
2. After sunset, two people hold opposite ends of the seine and proceed with up to 4 passes per
designated segment as follows:
3.
Stretch the net out. If needed the seine may be shortened by rolling part of it onto the stakes.
4.
Moving rapidly, haul the seine, for a few meters in any direction (this depends on the site
conditions, but toward shore if possible).
a. Keep the lead line in contact with the bottom, without submerging the float line.
b. The bottom of the stake should precede the top.
5. After the desired area has been traversed, while still moving, quickly pull both ends of the lead
line forward and out of the water, keeping the float line up out of the water. Keep a pocket in
the middle for holding fish while moving to shore.
After fish are landed (each set of 4 Dasses)
6.
Remove all fish from the net and place them into live wells.
7.
Calculate the area seined by multiplying the working length of the net by the estimated
distance seined. Sum the total for that gear at the station and record this and other sampling
information on the Fish Tally Form header.
8.
Process all fish caught.
6-30
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1994
one to record the number of hauls, estimate the length of each haul, bring the live well to the
seiners, and-keep tally records.
6.6 PROCESSING FISH
At each fish sampling site, there are four general fish processing tasks:
1.
identify individual fish to species, place in a general age class, and examine for external
anomalies;
2.
measure up to 20 fish of each long-lived species;
3.
set aside specimens for possible use as tissue contaminants samples; and
4.
preserve example specimens of each species as museum vouchers.
5.
record comments related to the fish in comments section at bottom of page 2.
The general chronology for these tasks is summarized in Table 6-14. This section assumes the net
has been pulled, all header data in the Fish Tally Form are completed, and all fish have been
removed from the net.
Most of the fish processing tasks are completed at each station before moving on to the
next. Depending on lake size, weather conditions, and numbers of fish collected, the process may
be done either in the boat or at the landing. To avoid problems in keeping track of multiple stations
and to reduce fish mortality, pull nets from only two - stations before returning to the launch site
(except if nets come up empty). Processing of portions of the tissue contaminants specimen is
done once per lake, at the landing.
6.6.1 Spedes 10 and Telly
Remove all fish from the net or trap and place in a fresh bucket of lake water before
processing begins. Work carefully, but Quickly to reduce stress to the fish. Release live fish not
6-31
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1994
TABLE 6-14. GENERAL FISH PROCESSING CHRONOLOGY
1.
Make a preliminary examination of the fish in the live well and develop a preliminary species list
on the Fish Tally Form.
2.
For each fish:
8. Identify to species.
b. Place in general age group and tally.
c. Examine for external anomalies.
3.
For each species
8. Measure total lengths of approximately 20 individuals of long-lived species.
b. Set aside (after tallying) any candidates for tissue contaminants sample.
c. Preserve museum voucher specimens.
4.
After all sites have been completed.
a. Process fish for tissue contaminants sample.
6-32
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1994
needed for museum vouchers or for tissue analysis (see below) to the lake. Avoid holding fish
longer than needed. The following procedures will expedite the work. "Modify these to fit your
work style.
.
As you remove fish from the net or trap and place them in the bucket of water. make
mental notes as to the species present. After all fish are out of the net take a few
minutes to examine some of them to determine approximate numbers and sizes of most
of the species caught. It may be useful to sort the fish by species into additional
buckets before further processing.
.
One person handles the fish. while the other records data. The fish handler will
probably want to keep the measuring board on his or har lap as a work surface. The
recorder uses at least two forms at the same time-the Fish Tally Form and the Fish
Length Form.
.
Try to process all (or most) of each species before going on to the next. This should
help avoid extra paper shuffling. Also. consider processing all individuals (of a species)
within an "age group" together.
.
Examine each fish individually. However. you may handle small fish in small
manageable groups to speed processing.
.
If a net has caught many large fish, you may process them directly from the net while
it is being pulled.
.
Use the space on the Fish Tally Form (Figure 6-3) to record partial counts le.g., hash
marks, small group counts) before recording the total count for that age group for that
species. Also use this space to keep track of the number of individuals retained as
vouchers.
.
Before leaving each station, double check that all data have been recorded.
Occasionally, a species will be "observed" but not collected, for example, common carp
observed in shallows or "hanging around" docks where they are fed. Include noncrew angler's
6-33
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1 994
catches (confirmed by a crew member) or dead fish seen. Record these observations on separate
Fish Tally forms, giving them a station code appended with a . J.. Include other species
information from local contacts on the lake Assessment form (not on a Fish Tally Form).
The following subsections describe specific procedures that apply for each kind of data:
6.6.1.1 Species Identiflcatlon-
. Record on the Fish Tally Form (Figure 6-3) both the common name and the species
code (first 4 letters of the genus and first 2 letters of the species. Species codes are
listed on the Regional Activities Plan. If more than five species are collected, use the
Fish Tally Continuation Form (Figure 6-5).
.
Be alert for possible surprises, such as hybrids and recently introduced species. This
also applies to difficult taxonomic groups and very small fishes. When in doubt, record
these with the species code of UNKNnn where the nn is filled in starting with 01 at
each lake (i.e., first UNKN01, followed by UNKN02). Write your bast guess to the
lowest taxonomic level that you are comfortable with in the common name space.
Always retain as vouchers a large numbar (or all) of any UNKNnn.
6.6.1.2 Age Groupl-
. Each species is tallied (counted) by general age group--adult, juvenile, young-of-year.
This is a judgment, based on size, color, and overall appearance. It is not critical to be
absolutely correct in this decision. The purpose is to have at least qualitative evidence
as to whether a species is reproducing and maturing at a lake.
.
Species expected to regularly exceed 100 mm as adults will also be measured (Section
6.6.31. Do mn spend time referring back to previous data to determine where earlier
age group cutoff lengths were made.
Table 6-15 summarizes the procedures for tallying, examining, and measuring fish.
6-34
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Samphng
June 1994
RSH TALLY CONTINUATION FORM-lAKES
LAKE ID: 1L:t. (J ~.Q. L srTE ID: F 1. tr
Page
VISIT .:
JAR ID lBarc0d8I: L ~ 3~.£J. TAG ID: tl.. A.
Common Ne-: UU,Y'I& ~'-_.'. s..c.. CoDe: .1:...A:r./2. L £J. fLAG:
AcIuh II ........ YOY
TOTAl. M~ 11...- TerrAL ---- II~ TerrAL MU888 11---
FOIl ~: FOIl &.8D1H: FOIl '--1M:
2.. 0 :L
Com- N_: SNcID CODE: fLAG:
Adult ........ YOY
TOTAl. MU888 11..-- TerrAL -- II ....... TerrAL MU888 II MIAII8B
FOIl u.1M: - &.8D1H: - L8a1M:
Common Ne-: SNcID CeDI: fLAG:
AcIuh ........ YOY
TOTAl. MU1118 II .......- TerrAL ..... II .......- TerrAL MIMB8 11----
FOIl ~ - &.8D1H: FOIl ~
Common Ne_: SNcID CODE: fLAG:
AcIuh ........ YOY
TOTAl. MU1118 II ........ TOTAL -- """" TerrAL MWB8I II MI&U8I
FOIl u.1M: - &.8D1H: FOIl ....".,
Common Ne-: SNc:D COOl: fLAG:
Adult ........ YOY
TOTAL MIIIa\IIII IIM-.- TerrAl. ...... IIM..- TerrAL MUIIUII IIM-
FOII~: -~ -~:
CHECK HERE IF INFORMATION IS RECORDED ON OTHER SIDE OF FORM:
REvIEWED BY IINfT1ALI: 1!fL
Rev. 6/94 (tullyel.94)
Fleh T eDy Continuelion Form . 1
Figure 6-5. The Fish Tally Continuation Form--Lakes Pag.e 1.
6-35
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1994
TABLE 6-15. TALLYING, EXAMINING, AND MEASURING FISH
1.
Identify each individual. to species (if possible) and estimate .its age group (adult, juvenile, or
young-of-year).- Place a hash mark in the appropriate box of the Tally Form. Record its
common name AND species code. b
2.
Examine each fish for external anomalies. If anomalies are present, record the species code
and anomaly code(s), and place a hash mark on page 2 of the Tally Form.
3.
If more than five species are collected, use the Fish Tally Continuation Form as necessary.
4.
On the Fish Length Form, record total lengths for approximately 20 individuals of long-lived
species.c If there are S20 individuals, measure total length for each. If there are more than
20 individuals for that species use the following subsampling procedure:
a. Separate outliers, i.e., exceptionally large or small individuals. Measure their lengths
separately and record them on the Fish Length Form.
b. If the remaining fish (nonoutliers) are fewer than 20, measure all individuals. Otherwise,
measure a random subsample.
5.
Save museum voucher specimens.
6.
Save candidate specimens for possible use as fish.tissue contaminant samples.
a Age group classification is a judgment based on size, color, and overall appearance.
b When in doubt, record species as UNKNnn (nn is a number from 01 to 99 for each lake; 01 is
the first unknown species). Codes for most species are the first four letters of the genus and the
first two letters of the species.
C Place a "U" in the flag box if the measurement is suspect and explain in comments. Additional
individuals of the same species may be denoted with an arrow (do not use ditto marks).
6-36
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1994
6.6.1.3 Nonfiah Species-
.
Nonfish species will be captured occasionally. Count these and record the common
name to the lowest taxonomic level with which you are comfortable on the Fish Tally
Form (Figure 6-3). For -Species Code- use -OTHERn- where -n- is replaced by a
number 1 through 9 (e.g., OTHER1 for first nonfish species at that lake, OTHER2 for
the second). This numbering scheme should be consistent within each lake's data, but
not among lakes.
.
Retain examples of amphibians, leeches, mollusks, and .crayfish as vouchers (Section
6.6.5). Other animals may be photographically documented.
.
Record the mortality rate for nonfish vertebrates in the Comments section of the Fish
Tally Form Page 2 (Figure 6-6).
.
In the field notebook, keep notes on other animals observed but not captured. At the
end of the lake visit, transfer this list to the Lake Assessment Form (see Section 9.1).
6.6.1.4 Evidence of Stocking-
If there is evidence that the fish collected were stocked (e.g., fin clips, characteristic fin
erosion, tags), mark the appropriate space on the back of the Fish Tally Form (Figure""6-6), record
the species and number collected, and use an -S- code to describe this evidence in the Anomalies
section. Circle Ves only if evidence is present for fish caught in that gear.
6.6.1.5 Species of -Concern--
Rare, threatened, or endangered fish species are generally not a concern in lakes. However,
there will be species of concern for most individual s"tates. These species are listed in the Regional
Activities Plan. All states know in advance which lakes EMAP-SW will be sampling, and they
generally know where the species of concern occur. The states provide a list of concerns prior to
sampling and these will be included in lake dossiers. There may be special instructions from
individual states, but the general rule is to quickly release any live species of concern. If
circumstances allow (i.e., the extra handling will not harm the fish), document these with
photographs. If the fish has died, retain it as a voucher specimen (Section 6.6.5). In either case,
inform the appropriate state officials as soon as possible.
6-37
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1994
LAUfD:~~ ()JlQ. L FISH TALLY FORM'(c:anthl8d) 81ft D: F " -r:r V81r1: (i) 2
Comm.. Name: I I.. ... ?L...,.., SNcIa COD£ M.Q..L..Q..A.ltl FLAG:
Aclull lHt'1 & ........ VfW
TOTAL MI888I . ........ TerrAL -- .....- TerrAL -- .~
- '-1M: -..-- -~
6 0 6
Comm.. N.....: SNcIa CODe: FLAG:
Adult ........ VOV
TOTAL MI8IUII . ....... TerrAL -- . -..- TerrAL -- .-.-
- ..-- -1.881N: -~
Com- N.....: Sl'lCID CoDE FLAG:
Aclull ........ VOY
TOTAL MI8IUII IIM- TerrAL ....... II MIAIUI8I Terra&. ....... IIU-
-..-- - L88nI: -~
IF> 5 SPECIES ARE COLLECTED, CHECK HERE AND USE A TALLY CONTINUATION FORM-
IS THERE EVIDENCE OF STOCKING (cJrd.t7
AIIf1MALyf ...
STOCUIG ear:.
SPEc:ta COD~
..01,
AIM
L
uf\Ao
SNc8 co.
AMtJ/MJIr,J. vI
STOCICNI CODe
..OJF
...
FLAG
FLAG
COMMENTS.
RAG COOES: K -No ~'I\1I"f'-T OII_A1Dt -..: U - SUWICT ~- 011_"1'01; F1. F2. ETC. - MIle. RAGa -11' fIElD
CREW. EV\AIN ALL RAGa IN COIo88TS IEC11CIII. AnAOl RMMtI ~ IH&T. NECEIUII\'.
RavIEWID 8Y (1NITIALt: it!--.
Rev.6/94 CNI'yl.941
A8h Tely '- Leb8. 2
Figure 6-6. The Fish Tally Form P8ge 2.
6-38
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1994
6.6.2 External Anomalies
Examine all live or freshly dead fish for easily visible external anomalies (including any
within the buccal cavity and on the gills). Do not make exact counts of anomalies present (i.e., the
number of tumors, lesions per fish), but record the numbers of fish affected. Rapidly scan each
fish as it is sorted and counted, taking Jess than one minute per fish. Inspect all body surfaces,
fins, eyes, buccal cavity, and gills. Record anomalies on page 2 of the Fish Tally Form (Figure 6-6)
using the anomaly codes in Table 6-16. For each fish species and anomaly code, record the
numbers of individuals affected. Fish sampling gear may produce some damage to the body
surfaces and fins; do not record these gear-related injuries.
In general examine:
.
Body surfaces, fins, buccal cavity, and gills-Note any discolorations of body surfaces
(e.g., darkening, hemorrhaging, cloudiness), raised scales, white spots, or parasites.
Also look for lumps, growths, ulcerations, fin erosion, deformities of the vertebral
column and mandibles, swelling of the anus, short operculum, missing fins, or any
other abnormality.
.
Eyes-Check for cloudiness, hemorrhage, exopthalmia (pop eye), and depression into
the orbits.
Table 6-16 summarizes the procedures for documenting anomalies.
6.6.3 Length
At each station, measure (to the nearest millimeter) approximately 20 individuals of each
species expected to regularly exceed 100 mm as adults. Such species are listed in the Regional
Activities Plan. Make these measurements at the same time as the identification, examination for
anomalies, and tallying. Record data on the Fish Length Form (Figure 6-7). Thus, the data recorder
needs to work with two forms at the same time (the fish handler needs to pace the work
accordingly). Use the following procedures for these data:
6-39
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1994
TABLE 6-16. EXAMINING FISH FOR EXTERNAL ANOMAUES
Rapidly, but thoroughly examine each fish tallied for the anomalies listed below. a Spend less than
1 minute per fish. Inspect all body surfaces, fins, eyes, buccal cavity, and gills.
Code
Anomaly
D
Deformities8-can affect the head, spinal vertebrae, fins, stomach shape, scales, operculum,
eyes, pug head ness, jaw deformities, and clubtail.
E
Eroded finsa-includes necrosis at the base of the caudal fin (peduncle disease), and erosions
of the preopercle and operculum.
L
Lesions or Ulcersa--appear as open sores or exposed tissue. Prominent bloody areas on fish
should also be included. Small, characteristic sores left by anchor worms and leeches should
not be included, unless they are enlarged by secondary infection.
T
Tumors--result from proliferative cellular growth with tissue that is firm and not easily broken.
Parasites may cause tumor-like masses that can be squeezed and broken, but these should
not be considered as tumors.
F
Fungus-appears on the body or eyes as a white cottony growth and usually attacks an
injured or open area of the fish. Ich, a fungus that manifests itself on the skin or fins as
white spotting is rare in wild fish populations.
B
Blind in either eye
s
Emaciated
P
Parasites (heavy)-include leeches, anchor worm, spinyhead worm, and copepods. The soft
tumor-like masses caused by parasites, as well as heavy black spot infestations, should also
be included.
M
Mucous (excessive)
z
Other-explain these.
Note anomalies on page 2 of the Fish Tally Form. Use the species code and all appropriate anomaly
codes from above. b
a Fish can be damaged during capture (especially by gill nets) and handling; do not note anomalies
of this origin. .
b Do not make exact counts of anomalies present (e.g., the number of tumors per fish).
6-40
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1994
,', RSWlENGTH'FORMUKES:, PAGE~J.!i..
LAKE NAME: 1.. ~/.-8D ~IJC VISIT #: (i') 2
LAKE ID: t!L.:1-..D...Q.....Q. L TEAM ID leiteI,l: 16)3 4 6 8 7 8 9 10 oncER:
",:".,'" ::', TOTAI:;' "", ,AU:: I,' 0:' 'F"
LENGnt" ." CLASS:" ',,:'U", "L ~. .
u 1I11III)" :,Ik,,';,YI .. T"c, ,,'A,',
SITE:tD SPECIES CODE, COMMON-NAME: ,(,II'" a", COMMENTS,' ,
r: " t:,. J, 'PE~t! t: 1 V- " '?e II'r.I. 1l'J3 :r
( I' / I" &.I f'
) \ '\ I '" ('j, ,
\ / (' In~ (
I '\ ) II'UJ '\
) ( ( 1I.:t (
\ ) ) "" (
( <. " In4 :r
( I ~ J~O A
" ¥.. Il.w ~"L ~
t:f- t:.A p~~rJ IIll" :r
I r:'7t:.A CAT"(J c: 0 ~L:/... S"t.I~~I!~ ..293 A
, ( ~ ~., ~
( , IAJ J. ,'1... ~vc.lL8 V- \
,. !l'"
~"r..4 ",... c. ~ L YI! JlIJW 'K..c.L 1'1"1 (
C 1&.1 R F Viti 11 111 R. , 1 K,." ,".(,~" '71, A.
/ r", u ~ /} , Q. J. v.. II . ~...l. 1~ :r
\ 5:..,.a ........... ~6 lifts L q, .4
( S~ M('j,.~ F: II .t',~ L ~ A
i L tJ'Il .. 1'''' fl. ~ h I ~,.... "0 -T"
t:1"IP Luy"", ~.....c'" Sit "Me.. ~.r ~
(';HE[;K ..~..~.. A AL DATA Af.~ REt uRD~D ON REVeRSE SIDE: ~
FLAG CODES: K= NO MEASUREMENT COLLECTED; U= SUSPECT MEASUREMENT; F1. F2. ETC. = MISC. FLAGS ASSIGNED BY
FIELD CREW. EXPLAIN ALL FLAGS IN COMMENTS SECTION.
REvIEWED BY IINITIALI:1:i!.-
Roy. 6/94 (fishlonl.941
Flah Length Form. Lek.. . 1
Figure 6-7. Fish Length Form--Lakes.
6-41
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1994
.
Measure the total length--mouth closed and caudal fin compressed to achieve maximum
length. Check the flag box and record a comment if caudal fin is eroded enough to
affect total length.
.
It is useful, but not essential, to measure all of one species before starting the next.
Use a wavy vertical arrow (not ditto marks) to denote fish of the same species. Do not
use ditto marks (since these can be read as "11 ") in the lengths column.
.
If there are 20 or fewer individuals present (per species to be measured per station),
measure all.
.
If there are> 20 individuals, first separate any obvious outliers (fish noticeably larger or
smaller than the majority). "Obvious Outliers" is a visual, subjective category; generally
those individuals at least 30 percent larger or smaller than the largest or smallest
representatives of the "nonoutliers. n These will generally be < 10 percent of the total.
Measure these individuals and check the "outlier" box. Then measure a random
subsample (about 20) of the remaining specimens.
.
If there is a wide range of sizes with no obvious outliers, measure individuals from the
entire size spectrum (even if you end up measuring more than 20).
6.6.4 Tissue Contaminant Samples
For the fish tissue contaminants sample use the best five fish of one species that has a high
likelihood of being caught and eaten by predators (wildlife or human) and of containing detectable
levels of toxics. Candidate species are listed in the Regional Activities Plan. Collect this sample in
a two-stage process. In the first stage select candidate individuals from among all fishes caught.
Hold these candidate fish in a live net or keep them on ice until all sampling gear have been
retrieved. In the second, final stage, select a five-fish composite sample from among the
candidates and process for shipping. The composite sample consists of whole fish; the field teams
do not fillet or gut the fish.
6-42
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1994
6.6.4.1 Selecting Candidate Fish For The Fish Tissue Sample--
Because of the number of criteria regarding a desirable fish tissue sample and the variety of
fish catch scenarios, there can be no hard and fast rules or simple heirarchy of criteria governing
how the composite sample will be collected. The general criteria (in order) for selecting the
individuals that make up the composite sample are:
1. five individuals of one species,
2. a species high on the food chain,
3. large fish,
4. of approximately the same size,
5. collected from all areas of the lake, and
6. live or freshly dead.
If there are no top predators, insufficient numbers of them, or they are relatively small, then the
selection priority becomes (in order):
1. smaller primary predators,
2. bottom feeders, or
3. any species with sufficient number to make up a sample.
This section provides guidelines for applying as many of these criteria as possible.
At each sampling station, save individuals (large, if possible) of the target species (or
nontarget species if target species are absent or rare). See the Regional Activities Plan for the
target species priority list and the preferred minimum lengths of each. At first the crew should
keep all target species (and sometimes nontarget) individuals. As more gear is retrieved, it will
often become apparent that one or more target species are present in sufficient numbers that meet
6-43
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1994
the minimum target size. Thereafter, it is not necessary to keep candidate individuals of lower
priority target species.
Immediately following tallying, examination, and measurement, place candidate individuals
in a tub filled with lake water. Upon return to shore, place them in the live net. Place candidate
specimens that are dead on ice while still in the boat or immediately upon return to shore. Place
the ice in plastic bags to prevent melting ice from leaching fish tissue or contaminating fish. When
it is necessary to retrieve some nets on Day 1, retain some of the most eligible candidate
specimens for possible inclusion in the samples prepared on Day 2. Place healthy specimens in the
live net; specimens in poor condition or dead, on ice.
To avoid potential contamination, label all containers used to prepare tissue contaminant
samples and dedicate them to this activity. Rinse the containers well with lake water before each
use and do not use them at other times to store chemicals or equipment.
6.6.4.2 Selecting and processing the finlll tissue sample-
After all areas of the lake have been sampled for fish, set up a work area to process the
composite sample for shipping. Ensure that all work surfaces are clean (rinsed with lake water).
Determine from among the candidates (in the live net or on ice) which species have individuals that
meet as many of the selection criteria as possible. Follow the guidelines in Table 6-17 to select the
final sample. As a precaution, do not return the nonselected fish to the lake until all sample
processing is complete.
So that we can judge if the EMAP-SW sampling gear and strategy are generally getting the
fish tissue sample from different areas in lakes, record the number of nets (sampling stations) from
which the fish tissue candidate individuals were collected on the Fish Tissue Sample Tracking Form
(Figure 6-8). Great precision is not required; just give your best estimate. Also record the total
number of sampling stations on this form. Follow the procedures in Table 6-18 for processing the
sample for shipping.
6-44
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1994
TABLE 6-17. FINAL SELECTION OF FISH TISSUE SAMPLE
1 . Select 3 to 5 individuals of the highest priority species availablea that are at or above the
preferred minimum length for that species. When possible, the individuals should be of similar
size, collected from various areas of the lake, and relatively fresh.
(a) Collect 5 fish if at all possible. This is generally a higher priority than getting species higher
on the target species list. For example, if 3 of the top priority species and 10 of the third
priority species (all of the preferred size) are caught, use the best 5-fish sample of the third
priority species.
(b) If the size discrepancy is large (but the species priority rank is the same), choose in favor of
3 or 4 large versus 5 small fish. For example, if there are 3 of species A at 400 mm total
length and 5 of species B at 150 mm total length, select species A.
(c) Ideally, individuals should be as large as possible and all of the same size. The guideline is
that the length of the smallest fish in the 3-to-5 fish sample be at least 75% of the largest.
This size relationship can be estimated visually. This is a goal and not a requirement.
Collecting high priority target species at or above the preferred minimum length is more
important than meeting this goal. .
(d) Select live and freshly dead fish preferentially. However, fish selected do not have to be
alive or to have been witnessed "meeting their maker." Using a species high on the target
species list is a higher priority than freshness.
2. Decision criteria for some cases where the sample choice may not be clear:
(al If two Dredator sDecies have been collected, one species with 3 or 4 individuals (>
preferred minimum size) and one species with 5 individuals (> preferred minimum size),
choose the 5-fish sam Die even if this species is of lower priority, unless the 5 fish are much
smaller than the 3 to 4 individuals of the higher ranking species [see 1 (a)).
(b) If 1 to 4 individuals at or above the Dreferred minimum lem:tth of anv tarQet sDecies are
collected, add smaller individuals of the same species to bring the total to 5.
(cl If fewer than 5 individuals of anv size of anv tareet sDecies are collected, use a smaller
number. In this case, also send 5 individuals of a nontarget species or 20 to 60 small fish
(minnows or other) if available (resulting in two separate samples).
(d) If neither (b) or fc) above works, use 20 to 60 (preferred number if available) small fish
(minnows or other), all of one species if possible. The intent is to obtain a fish tissue
sample of some kind from each lake.
3. Return nonselected live fish to the lake. Properly and discreetly dispose of all dead fish not
used.
". Target species and length criteria are presented in the Regional Activities Plan.
6-45
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1994
ASH TlSSUE.SAMPLE TRACKING FORMUKES
LAKE NAME: L. 'IJ()i:II«uC DATE PREPARED: 7 1 I.f 1'1'1 VISIT II: (i) 2
LAKE ID: ..N.y O.-Q.o. L TEAM ID Icircle): 1 -(;):1 4 II . 7 . 8 10 OTHER:
. TOTAL, WEIGHT. SAMPLE ID
LENGTH
SPECIES CODE COMMON NAME. -. Inl FLAG IMRCOOE)
1 ~~.&..1LA-M. LIL'L 'P. ",.l ~n4/ /,11 3.J:l.L!t!L.!i
2 L / '" I t!:) J.*} L-
3 ~. \ 1Jl!J 1./ I 9 ~
4 J- "!Jr ~f) 1
5 fA..tl..A.-<2I9l!1 I. JI '.La . 'l:l. ~~ l. .:l.~1 ~I ~-'l.L£i q
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
II OF STATIONS FROM WHICH FlIH TlS8UE CANDIDATE SPECIMEN' WERE COLLECTED: ~
TOTAL II OF ITATIONI IAMPLED: IT
UNE' FlAG COMMENT OR FlAG EXPLANATION
t;Hf(;K HfRf If MURt: UN UTHfR :iIDf:
FlAG CODES: K= NO SAMPLE COLLECTED; U- SUSPECT SAMPLE; F1. F2. ETC... MISC. RAGa AISIGNED IY FIELD CREW.
EXPLAIN AU. FLAGS IN COMMENTS SECTION. ~
REvIEWED BY IINITIAL):.01.:-
Rev.6194 Ifti'suel .941
Fieh r_... S.mple Tr'ddng Form. Lakes . 1
Figure 6-8. Fish Tissue Sample Tracking Form.
6-46
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1994
TABLE 6-18. FISH TISSUE SAMPLE PROCESSING
1. Keep work surfaces and wrapping materials clean and free of potential contaminants (e.g.,
mud, fuel, formalin, sun screen, insect repellant).
2. Measure total length of individuals selected. If a scale is provided, obtain a weight for the
entire sample, either by weighing all individuals at once or by summing weights obtained for
individual fish.
3. Fill out Fish Tissue Sample Tracking Form completely (including total lengths). Write the bar
code number on the form. NOTE: Sealing the bags of ice with tape is especially important on
Fridays and in other cases when samples may be in transit for more than one day. Use
additional ice bags in these situations.
4. Wrap each fish in aluminum foil (unless there are many small fish) with the dull side of the foil
against the fish. Place all the wrapped fish in a Ziploc bag or in a garbage bag.
5. Expel excess air and seal the bag. Wrap tape around the bag neck to seal and make a surface
for attaching the sample label.
6. Complete a fish tissue sample label with bar code (make sure the bar code number is the same
as the one recorded on the tracking form) and apply it to the tape surface. Cover the label with
a layer of clear, waterproof tape.
7. Place labeled Ziploc or garbage bags containing the sample into a second plastic bag and seal.
Label the second bag (repeating steps 5 and 6).
8. Place ice in Ziploc or garbage bags (to keep ice and water away from the fish sample). Fold
over the bag neck and seal with tape. Place bagged ice in cooler with double-bagged fish
sample. Also indicate the number of sites from which candidate specimens were collected, and
the total number of sites sampled.
9. Later, during postsampling activities at the next base site, process the tissue sample cooler for
shipment. Ship fish as soon as possible after collection, using overnight air courier.
6-47
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1994
6.6.5 Museum Vouchers
As part of the QA program, and to provide historical documentation, preserve voucher
specimens of all species. Make exceptions for large individuals of easy to identify species and
document these photographically. This exception is mostly a storage consideration for both the
crew and the museum. Retain larger numbers (if not all) of small or difficult to identify species, as
well as possible hybrids, as vouchers. Where very large numbers of small or difficult to identify
species are collected, sort all individual fishes to the lowest taxonomic level (with which the crew
is comfortable), count and preserve a generous random subsample (or all) of each taxa. Table 6-19
provides an overview of the numbers of fish to preserve from each gear and at each lake. The
Regional Activities Plan presents an overview of the voucher strategy by taxonomic group.
For some species there may be initial uncertainty about whether particular fish should be
preserved for museum vouchers or used for tissue contaminants specimens. Until enough
additional fish are collected to make a decision, place all candidate fish in individual live nets
(minnow traps will serve the purpose) by station, with a museum tag identifying the station.
Obtaining an adequate fish tissue contaminants sample has priority over museum vouchers.
6.6.5.1 Preparing Voucher Bottles--
The details of preparing materials, actual preservation, labeling, and transporting vouchered
fish are provided in the Regional Activities Plan. Before retrieving any gear or seining, prepare
containers, labels, and an adequate volume of formalin. Whether or not formalin is taken out on
the lake in the boat depends on regional sampling procedures described in the Regional Activities
Plan. If formalin is not allowed on the boat, maintain voucher specimens from each gear and site in
a separate container with a separate label or tag. In any case, place voucher specimens in 10
percent formalin as soon as possible to produce the best results.
Handling Formalin: See the Regional Activities Plan for specific instructions related to
handling formalin. Some people are acutely sensitive to formalin and others can become so.
It is a hazardous chemical and should be stored and handled with care. Work with formalin
only in the open air and wear gloves when transferring it to bottles or transferring preserved
fishes. Use forceps to handle preserved fishes.
6-48
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1994
TABLE 6-19. OVERVIEW OF FISH VOUCHERING8 -
Voucher Fish Overview
Group I - Easy to identify as adults, usually large, of less interest to museums.
.
Adults--Preserve 1 or 2 specimens PER LAKE only if small « 200 mm total length) and
space permits. Document with photo.
.
Juvenile--Preserve 1 or 2 specimens for each gear.
.
Young of Year (YOY)--Preserve 1 to 5 specimens for each gear.
Group II - Adults may be tricky to identify OR species uncommon in region, but size is an issue for
preservation and shipping.
.
Adults--Preserve 1 or 2 specimens of small adults from each gear type « 200 mm).
If only large adults, preserve 1 or 2 specimens per lake and document with photo.
.
YOY and Juvenile--Preserve 2 to 10 specimens from each gear.
Group III - Small to moderate-sized fish, adults (and some juvenile and y~y) easy to identify.
.
Adults--Preserve 1 specimen per gear, if < 150 mm;
otherwise preserve 1 specimen per lake.
.
Juvenile--Preserve 1 to 5 specimens from each gear.
.
YOY --Preserve 2 to 5 specimens from each gear.
- Group IV - Small or difficult to identify or likely to hybridize.
.
Adults--Preserve 2 to 10 specimens per gear if < 150 mm;
otherwise preserve 1 specimen per gear type.
When in doubt preserve additional specimens.
.
YOY and Juvenile--Preserve 5 to 30 specimens per gear type;
preserve MORE (possibly all) if species identity unclear (species code = UNKNnn).
a Detailed vouchering and preservation procedures are presented in the Regional Activities Plan.
6-49
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1994
At each sampling station do the following:
.
As fish are being tallied and measured, for each species (see the Regional Activities Plan
for species specific voucher rules) select at least one small live (if possible) individual as
a voucher specimen. Record the number of individuals of each size group of each
species preserved on the Fish Tally Form. This number is an important part of the QA
process and needs to be accurate. Keep vouchers from each gear at each station
separately.
.
For most small Group IV fish, preserve several individuals of each taxa over the range of
sizes collected. This procedure will aid the museum in confirming identifications.
.
Preserve the fish in as good a condition as possible, that is~ as soon after collection as is
reasonably possible. The best specimens are placed live directly into the 10 percent
formalin, immediately after being taken from the net and tallied. Specimens should not
be bent nor crowded. Avoid long-dead individuals or those badly damaged in the nets,
if possible. For specimens >6 inches (about 150 mm), make a small slit on the right
side to flood the body cavity with preservative.
.
If any "species of concern" are collected live, quickly photograph and release them. If
they have died, they should be preserved as vouchers in formalin. It is important to
notify the appropriate State officials in either case.
The field crews are encouraged to preserve examples of amphibians, crayfish, leeches, or
mollusks taken in the traps or otherwi.. collected, as well as examples of fish with anomalies or
parasites. For these nonfish organisms, use one or two Ziploc bags per lake and keep them
separate from the fish vouchers (crayfish can do considerable damage to fish vouchers). Leeches
should be anesthetized in Alka-Seltzer water before being placed in formalin (they form tight balls
otherwise). See Section 8.4 for mollusk preservation procedures.
6-50
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1994
6.7 EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLY LIST
Checklists of equipment and supplies required to conduct protocols described in this section
are provided in Figure 6-9. These checklists are similar to but may be different somewhat from the
checklists in Appendix A, which are used at a base site to ensure that all equipment and supplies
are brought to and are available at the lake. The field teams are required to use the checklists
presented in this section to ensure that the equipment and supplies are organized and available on
the boat in order to conduct the protocols efficiently.
6-51
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1994
Number
Items in (or with) Physical Habitat Tub Needed
Sonar with transducer, bracket, and C-clamp 1
12-V Battery (charged) 1
Pigtail adapter for sonar battery 1
DO meter with cable, probe, weight, and calibration chamber 1
GPS receiver (charged) 1
Surveyor's ribbon, roll 1
Boat anchor and 50-m line 1
PVC sounding pole, 3-m (in 2 sections) 1
Viewing box 1
Clipboard (with topographic map, bathymetric map, Lake Profile Form, 1
Habitat Sketch Map Form, Physical Habitat Characterization Form,
and Physical Habitat Comments Form)
Field notebook 1
Quick reference handbook 1
Parts kit tackle box 1
Items among 4 Net Tubs '
Net anchors with 0.5-m line and quick clips (3/trap net, 2/gill net, 3 spares) 20
Floats with 1.5-m line and quick clips (2/trap net, 3/bottom gill net, 50
7/surface gill net, 1/minnow trap, 8 spares)
Floats with 4-m line and quick clips (for trap net cod end) 5
Gill nets (number depends on lake area) 7 or 8
Line sections of 5-m (2 quick clips each) 10
Line sections of 10-m (2 quick clips each) 10
Line sections of 30-m (2 quick clips each) 10
Net repair twine, roll 1
Bait for minnow traps (dry dog food) 1
Figure 6-9. Fish related activities equipment checklists (Page 1).
6-52
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1994
Number
Items in Tub of Fishing Accessories Needed
Dip Nets -- 2
Waders 2 or 3 pr
Headlamps, with batteries 3
a-beam spotlight with pigtail adapter 1
12-V battery (charged) 1
Measuring board 1
"Cyalume" light sticks 12
Line section 01 25-m (to measure seining sites) 1
Fish picks 2
Items in Truck or Boat (too large for tubs)
Trap Nets 6 or 7
Minnow traps with clips 8 or 9
Live net 1 or 2
Buckets (5-gal) 3 or 4
Beach seine (w/poles) 1
Short seine (w/poles) 1
"Net hook" on pole 1
Museum bottles (case 01500 mL) 6
Museum bottles (case of 1,000 mL) 6
Figure 6-9. Fish related activities equipment checklists (Page 2).
6-53
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1994
Number
Items in Cooler for Fish Tissue Sampling Needed
Ice in 1-gal Ziploc bags - ~4
Cooler liner (30-gal trash bag) 1
Foil, 25 yards 1
Bag, Ziploc (qt) 10
Bag, ZiDloc (gal) 10
Composite bag (30-gal, clear or white trash bag) 4
Items in Cooler for Formalin/Bleach (labeled)
Formalin, 100% (37% formaldehyde, pH 7.6 to 7.8, 1 gal) 2
Bleach (Clorox, gal) 1
Bleach solution sprayer . 1
Alconox for cleaning tissue sample equipment 1
Scrub brush for cleaning tissue sample equipment 1
Vermiculite or other absorbant (gal) 4
Gloves, butyl, pair 1
Safety glasses 1
Electrical tape, roll 1
Cooler liner (30-gal trash bag) 1
Ziploc quart-size bags 1 or 2 boxes
Ziploc gallon-size bags 1 or 2 boxes
Figure 6-9. Fish related activities equipment checklists (Page 3).
6-54
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1994
Number
Items in T earn leader's" Office" Needed
Taxonomic keys set 1
Fish Tally Form set (1 form/gear or seine site) 1
Fish Tally Continuation Form judgment
Fish Length Form judgment
Voucher/museum tags set (1 tag/gear or seine site) 1 set
Fish Tally Form--Lakes 50
Fish Tally Continuation Form--Lakes \ 10
Fish Length Form--Lakes 10
Fish tissue labels with bar codes 2
Fish Tissue Sample Tracking Form--Lakes 1
Sampling Permit set (1/state) 1
Lakes Field Operations Manual 1
Regional Activities Plan 1
Items to Take with You to Set Neta
Clipboard (w/topo. map, Habitat Sketch Map Form, Fish Tally Forms) 1
Watch (with 24-hour setting) 1
Sonar, etc. 1
Sounding rod 1
Trap nets (with 3 anchors, 2 short floats, 1 long float each) 1/site
Gill nets (with 2 anchors, 3 floats, and appropriate lines -- or -- with 7 short 1/site
floats and appropriate anchor lines)
Minnow traps (with bait, weight, and short-line float) 1/site
Light sticks 12
Line, 25-m (to mark seining sites) 1
Figure 6-9. Fish related activities equipment checklists (Page 4t.
6-55
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1994
Number
Items to Take with You to Seine Needed
Clipboard (with Physical Habitat Sketch Map Form--Lakes, Fish Tally Forms, 1
Fish Tally Continuation Forms, Fish Length Forms, and Museum Tags)
Watch 1
Measuring board 1
Q-beam (with battery and pigtail adapter) 1
Headlamps (with spare batteries) 2 or 3
Waders 2 or 3
Beach seine 1
Short seine 1
Buckets, 5-gal 2 or 3
Species key (optional) 1
Museum bonle (prepared with dilute formalin, half full) 1/site
Measuring tape 1
Items to Take WIth You to Pull Trap Nets (and Minnow Traps)
Clipboard (with Physical Habitat Sketch Map Form, Fish Tally Forms, Fish 1
Tally Continuation Forms, Fish Length Forms, and Museum Tags)
Watch 1
Measuring Board 1
Buckets, 5-gal 2 or 3
Species key (optional) 1
Museum bonle (prepared with dilute formalin, half full) 1
Measuring tape 1
Ziploc bags 1 per site
Figure 6-9. Fish related activities equipment checklists (Page 5).
6-56
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1994
Number
Items to Take With You to Pull Gill Nets Needed
Clipboard (with Physical Habitat Sketch Map Form. Fish Tally Forms. Fish 1
Tally Continuation Forms. Fish Length Forms. and Museum Tags)
Watch 1
Measuring board 1
a-beam (with battery and pigtail adapter) 1
Headlamps (with spare batteries) 3
Buckets. 5-gal 2 or 3
Species key (optional) 1
Museum bottles (prepared w/dilute formalin. half full; leave at vehicle) 1 Isite
Tub(s) (for nets) 1/net
Measuring tape 1
Ziploc bags 1 per site
Figure 6-9. Fish related activities equipment checklists (Page 6).
6-57
-------
L
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1994
NOTES
6-59
-------
-
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1994
NOTES
6-60
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1994
NOTES
6-61
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Fish Sampling
June 1994
NOTES
6-62
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Water and Sediment Sampling
June 1994
SECTION 7
WATER AND SEDIMENT SAMPLING
by
John R. Baker, David V. Peck, Sushi! S. Dixit, and Richard Stemberger
Water and sediment samples are collected at the index site. Very rigid quality assurance
practices are observed in the field. Prior to launching the boat for index site sampling, ensure that
all sample containers and forms are filled out for lake ID, date, and sample type (e.g., sediment core
top and bottom, zooplankton fine and coarse mesh) where required. To assure legibility and
completeness in recording sample information, field forms and labels are completed by one
individual and checked by another to verify that all pertinent information is included. Activities
described in this section are summarized in Figure 7-1.
7.1 SECCHI TRANSPARENCY
Relocate the "index site" by finding the orange marker float, which was attached to the
anchor line after obtaining DO and temperature profiles the previous day, or by sonar as described
in Section 4. Anchor the boat by reattaching it to the anchor line. After achieving a stable position
and determining the site depth, measure Secchi disk transparency using procedures in Table 7-1.
The Secchi disk chain has depth markers at 0.5 m increments. If the Secchi disk disappearance
depth is less than 1 m, measure depth to the nearest 0.01-m (cm) increment by marking the chain
at the nearest marker, retrieving the disk, and measuring the remaining distance with the tape
measure. It is not necessary to estimate Secchi disk depths greater than 1 m to the nearest
0.01 m. Record the depth of disk disappearance and reappearance on the Sample Collection Form
(Figure 7-2). If the Secchi disk is visible at the bottom of the lake, check the box on the Sample
Collection Form. Comment on the form if there are any conditions that may affect this
measurement (e.g., surface scum, suspended sediments, extreme weather conditions).
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Water and Sediment Sampling
June 1994
WATER AND SEDIMENT SAMPUNG ACTIVITIES
COLLECT VAN DORN SAMPLE 11
(Water Chemistry)
Collect four SCHnL syringes
. Collect one 4-L Cubitainer
. Fill in Sample Colledion Form
MEASURESECCHIDEPTH
. Record on Sample Collection Form
PREPARE FILTRATION
APPARATUS
COLLECT VAN DORN SAMPLE 12
(Chlorophyll)
. Filter SOO-mL for chlorophyll
. Fill in Sample Colledion Form
r---
I
I
I
I
.J
COLLECT ZOOPLANKTON SAMPLE
(Bongo Net Tow)
. Process coarse-mesh sample
. Process fine-mesh sample
. Fill In Sample Collection Form
COLLECT SEDIMENT DIATOM SAMPLE
(Sediment CON)
. Process top 1-cm interval
. Process bOttom 1-cm interval
. Fill in Sample Collection Form
VERIFY FORM AND SAMPLE LABELS
. Accuracy
. Completeness
. Legibility
,
INSPECT AND STORE SAMPLES
,
='I.OCPSg., PPT
Figure 7-1. Water and sediment sampling activities summary.
7-2
-
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Water and Sediment Sampling
June 1 994
TABLE '-1. SECCHI DISK TRANSPARENCY PROCEDURES
1. Remove sunglasses unless they are prescription lenses.
2. Clip the calibrated chain (marked in 0.5-m increments) to the Secchi disk. Make sure the chain
is attached so that depth is determined from the upper surface of the disk.
3. Lower the Secchi disk over the shaded side of the boat until it disappears.a
4. Read the depth indicated on the chain. If the disappearance depth is < 1.0 m, determine the
depth to the nearest 0.01 m by marking the chain at the nearest depth marker and measuring
the remaining length with a tape measure. Otherwise, estimate the disappearance depth to the
nearest 0.1 m. Record the disappearance depth on the Sample Collection Form.
5. Slowly raise the disk until it reappears and record the reappearance depth on the Sample
Collection Form.
6. Note any conditions that might affect the accuracy of the measurement in the flag and
comments fields.
a If the disk is visible to the lake bottom, check the appropriate box on the Sample Collection Form.
7-3
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Water and Sediment Sampling
June 1 994
SAMPLE COUECTION FORM-LAKES
LAKE NAME: J.. ~I"I':~IU~ DATE OF COLLECTION: 7''1 "" VISIT II: l!) 2
LAKE 10: H..:L.IL.fL. J:L L SITE 10 (cirdll: 8 OTHER:
TEAM 10 (cirelli: 1 ('2) 3 4 5 8 7 8 9 10 OTHER:
SECCHI DISK TRANSPARENCY
CUAII TO
DEPTN DU D~ DIPnf 08'-'-" 8cnToII.!XI ca-n
:{..!l M :i.' M
WATER CHEMISTRY .(4-1. CU8lTAl'fER AND 4 8YMItGE81
SAMPLE ID . aAMPLE DIPTH
laarcodel TYP! COLLECTID. FLAG ~-Tr8
J~Hllii R1 I,~ .
------ .
CHLOROPHYll. /TAllon' VOLWI8 - 500 MU
SAMPLE ID . aAMPLE DIPTH SAMPU
(8arcoM1 TYP! COLLECTID VOLIJMe RAG' COMMINT8
L~Z.11~ R1 Ir" . S" CO ...
------ . ...
ZOOPLANKTON 1Fu. TO MAJIIc ON 8OT1U - 80 MU
MESH SAMPLE ID . SAMPLE LENcnH CCNTAINIR8:, .
SIZE I88rCDC18I TYN OF TOW NO. PIIDERYID r.IJ RAG COMMENT8
COARSE Lo.:J.!i'-2- R1 q.n8 I ,/
FINE L.QJ~~'- R1 q.O" J ,,/"
.
8
SEDIMENT CORE SAMPLES /TAllGET COM lENcnH - 35 TO 40 cui
CoJJoctad 01 'circlel: INDEX 0TJtER If OTHER. ..-. dIr8CIian MIl dI8t8na8 from INDEX 8It8:
SAMPLE SAMPLEID . SAMPLE LENcnH INTERVAL
ClASS fa..code. TYPe OF CORE "- To FLAG COMMENTS
TOP Jao 11.0 R1 'I'" {).. I"
BOTTOM Joo-t.9-l. R1 'I'" &of .1" 'I"..
.. .. ..
.. .. ..
'lAG coe ES: K- NO MEASUREMENT Oft SAMPLE COUECTED: U.. SUSPECT MEASUfI&IENT Oft SAMPLE; ~1. fZ. ETC." MISC.
FlAGS ASSIGNED BV EACH FIELD CREW. ExPLAIN AU FUga IN COMMENTS SECTION.
REvIEWED Bv (lNITIALI: ~
Rov. 6194 Isamcoll.941
S."",18 Collection Form- L8k.. . 1
Figure 7-2. Sample Collection Form.
7-4
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Water and Sediment Sampling
June t 994
7.2 WATER SAMPLE COLLECTION
Collect a Van Dorn sample from 1.5 m (0.5 m if lake depth is less than 2.0 m), using the
procedure described in Table 7-2. From the Van Dorn sample, fill four 50-mL syringes and a single
4-L Cubitainer. Procedures for collecting these samples are presented in Table 7-3. Prior to filling
syringes and Cubitainer, check the labels on these containers to assure that all written information
is legible. Then place clear packing tape over the label and bar code, covering the label completely.
The bar code assigned to the sample set (the four syringes and one Cubitainer are considered one
sample) is recorded on the Sample Collection Form. Also record the "depth from which the sample
was collected (1.5 m or 0.5 m) on the Sample Collection Form. Record a flag and provide
comments on the Sample Collection Form if there are any problems in collecting the sample or if
conditions occur that may affect sample integrity. Store samples in the appropriate containers and
check to see that they are carefully packed with plenty of ice bags and are properly positioned,
sealed, and labeled in the sample coolers; again check that all forms and labels are completed.
TABLE 7-2. OPERATION OF VAN DORN SAMPLER
Note: Collect two Van Dorn samples at the index site (one for water chemistry samples [syringes
and the Cubitainer] and one for chlorophyll a).
1. Open the Van Dorn sampler by pulling the elastic bands and cups back and securing the latches.
Make sure that the mechanism is cocked so that it will be tripped by the messenger weight.
Make sure that all valves are closed. Do not place hands inside or on the lip 01 the container;
this could contaminate samples. To reduce chances 01 contamination, wear powder.free latex
laboratory gloves.
2. Attach the free end of the messenger line to the boat. Rinse the open sampler by immersing it
in the water column.
3. Lower the sampler to 1.5 m below the surface (0.5 m in lakes < 2 m deep).
4. Trip the sampler by releasing the messenger weight so that it slides down the line.
5. Raise the full sampler out of the lake. Set it on a clean, flat surface in an upright position. To
avoid contamination, do not set sampler in bottom of boat. If air enters the Van Dorn sampler,
discard the sample and obtain another (repeat steps 1-5). (Applying some body weight to the
top of the Van Dorn sampler often will seal minor air leaks and preserve the sample integrity.)
7-5
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Water and Sediment Sampling
June 1994
TABLE '-3. SYRINGE AND CUBITAINER SAMPLE COLLECTIONa
1.
Unscrew the valve at the top of the Van Dorn sampler. Remove the plug from the Leur-Lok
syringe fitting at the bottom of the sampler and fit a prelabeled syringe to the fitting.
Slowly withdraw a 20-mL aliquot into the 60-mL prelabeled syringe. b Pull the plunger back so
that the water contacts all inner surfaces of the syringe. Expel the water from the syringe.
Repeat this rinse procedure twice more (there are three rinses for each syringe sample).
2.
3.
Reattach the syringe to the Leur-Lok valve on the Van Dorn sampler and slowly withdraw 60-
mL of water into the syringe. If air enters the Van Dorn sampler during this process, dispose
of the sample and obtain another Van Dorn sample.
4.
Place the syringe valve on the syringe tip. Press the green button toward the syringe.
Hold the syringe with the tip and valve pointed skyward. Tap the syringe to gather air
bubbles to the top. Expel all air from the syringe and press the red button on the syringe
valve to seal the syringe with at least 50 mL of sample water remaining. (Any extra water,
greater than 50 mL, gives the laboratory analyst a greater margin in case of instrument
failures.)
5.
6.
Repeat steps 2 to 5 for three additional syringes. There should be a total of four syringes for
each routine water sample.
7.
Place the four syringes in the solid plastic container and place in the cooler. Maintain the
sample at 4 °C with ice contained in sealed 1-gal plastic bags.
8.
Unscrew the top valve of the Van Dorn sampler. Unscrew the lid of the prelabeled
Cubitainer. b
9.
Open the bottom valve of the Van Dorn sampler and partially fill the Cubitainer with water
(approximately 50 mL).
10. Screw the lid on the Cubitainer. Shake the water around inside the Cubitainer so that water
contacts all sides. Discard the water. Repeat this rinse procedure twice more. Collection of
the Cubitainer sample should be preceded by three (3) rinses.
11. Open the Van Dorn valve and completely fill the Cubitainer.c
12. Compress the Cubitainer to remove any residual head space. Seal the cap tightly. Wrap
electrical tape clockwise around the cap.
13. Place Cubitainer in a cooler with ice in sealed 1-gal plastic bags. Note the depth from which
the sample was collected on the Sample Collection Form.
a Wear surgical gloves while collecting syringe and Cubitainer samples. Syringes may be
chilled before use to reduce the occurrence of air bubbles in the sample.
b Make sure that the Cubitainer and syringes have the same bar code number (which
identifies a single lake).
C Fill one (1) Cubitainer for each routine lake water sample. NEVER expand a Cubitainer
by exhaling into it!
7-6
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Water and Sediment Sampling
June 1 994
'.3 CHLOROPHYU II SAMPLE COLLECTION
Collect a second Van Dorn sample from the same depth (1.5 m or 0.5 m) as the previous
water chemistry sample. Water from this sample is filtered for chlorophyll a analysis. Processing
procedures for the chlorophyll a sample are described in Table '-4. Chlorophyll can degrade rapidly
when exposed to bright light. If possible, prepare the sample in subdued light (or shade) filtering as
quickly as possible after collection to minimize degradation.
After filtering the sample and wrapping filter in aluminum foil, check the label to ensure
that all written information is complete and legible. If the sample filter clogs and all the sample in
the filter chamber cannot be filtered, discard the filter and prepare a new sample, using a smaller
volume. Process as described in Table '-4. Place a strip of clear packing tape over the label and
bar code, covering the label completely. Record the bar code assigned to the chlorophyll a sample
on the Sample Collection Form (Figure '-2). Also record the depth sampled (1.5 m or 0.5 m) and
the volume of sample filtered on the Sample Collection Form. Make sure the volume recorded on
the label matches the volume recorded on the Sample Collection Form. Record a flag and provide
comments on the Sample Collection Form if there are any problems in collecting the sample or if
conditions occur that may affect'sample integrity. Store the filter sample in a Ziploc bag and check
to see that it is carefully packed with plenty of ice bags in the sample cooler. Again check that all
forms and labels are complete.
'.4 ZOOPLANKTON
A zooplankton sample is collected with both coarse (202 ~m) and fine (48 ~m) mesh nets
towed vertically from near the bottom to the surface. The two nets are arranged side by side on a
single metal frame (bongo configuration). The calibrated chain used with the Secchi disk is also
used to make the vertical tow. Attach the chain to the bongo net so that depth is measured from
the mouth of the nets, rather than from the top of the frame.
Zooplankton collection procedures are described in Table '-5. After collecting the two
samples (coarse and fine) and dispensing into 125 mL jars, check the labels to assure that all
written information is completed and legible. Record the length of the tow on the label. Place a
strip of clear packing tape over the label and bar code, covering the label completely. Record the
7-7
-------
,-
I
I
I
INTERNAL REPORT
Water and Sediment Sampling
June 1994
TABLE 7-4. PROCEDURES FOR COLLECTION AND FILTRATION OF CHLOROPHYLL B SAMPLEa
1.
Load the filter holder apparatus with a filter (Whatman GF/F). Do not handle the filter; use
clean forceps.
2.
Collect 6.2 L of water with a Van Dorn bottle. Immediately after collection, rinse the
graduated cylinder three times with water from the Van Dorn bottle and dispense 250 ml of
sample from the Van Dorn into the graduated cylinder.
Pour into the top of the filter holder, replace the cap, and pump the sample through the filter
using the hand pump. b Filtration pressure should not exceed 7 psi to avoid rupture of fragile
algal cells. (Occasionally, the pump dials have a systematic offset from 0 psi with no
pressure applied. Then add 7 psi to the value at rest to obtain the maximum value. Example:
value at rest = 5 psi, rather than 0 psi. Then, 5 + 7 = 12 psi = maximum apparent
pres: Jre allowed on the pressure gauge during filtration).
3.
4.
Remove both plugs from the bottom portion of the apparatus and pour off the water from the
bottom.
5.
Replace the plugs; pour and pump a second 2SQ-mL portion of the Van Darn sample through
the same filter. C
6.
Rinse the upper portion of the filtration apparatus thoroughly with DI water to include any
remaining cells adhering to the sides and pump through filter. Check the volume of the lower
chamber, which traps the filtrate, to ensure that it does not contact the filter or flow into the
pump.
7.
Check the filter for visible color. If there is visible color, proceed; if NOT, repeat steps 3
through 5 until color is visible on the filter or until 1,000 mls have been filtered. Be sure to
note the actual sample volume filtered on the Sample Collection Form and on the sample
label.
8.
Remove the filter from the holder with clean forceps. Avoid touching the colored portion of
the filter. Fold the filter in half, with the colored side folded in on itself.
9.
Wrap the folded filter in a small piece of aluminum foil. Complete a chlorophyll Jabel and
attach it to the foil. Cover with a strip of clear tape. Place the Ziploc bag containing the filter
between two sealed Ziploc bags of ice in a cooler. Double check that the total volume of
water filtered recorded on the Sample Collection Form matches the total volume recorded on
the sample label.
10. Prior to sampling the next lake, rinse graduated cylinders with DI water.
a Wear surgical gloves while collecting and filtering the chlorophyll B sample.
b If 250 ml of lake water will not pass through the filter, change filter, rinsing all
apparatus with DI water, and repeat procedures using 100-ml of lake water measured
in a 1 OQ-mL graduated cylinder.
C Skip step 4 if 250 ml of water would not pass through the filter during step 2. If the
filter clogs before all of the second 250-ml portion is filtered, discard the filter and
prepare a new sample, using a smaller volume (100 ml). Be sure to correctly record
the total volume filtered (both portions) on the Sample Collection Form and the same
label.
7-8
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Water and Sediment Sampling
June 1 994
TABLE 7-5. ZOOPLANKTON COLlECTION PROCEDURE
1 .
Use a 50-mL syringe to draw up 8 mL of buffered formalin solution. Dispense 4-mL each into two 125-
mL bottles. Use the same syringe to draw up 2Q-mL of sucrose solution. Dispense 10 mL each into the
two bottles.
2.
Verify that the lake ID and mesh size information are correctly recorded on the labels of each of the two
125-mL wide-mouth jars and that 14 mL of buffered sucrose-formalin solution is within each jar.
3.
At the deepest part of the lake, lower the bongo net so that the mouths of the nets (horizontal hoops)
are -0.5 m off the bottom. NOTE: IF THE NETS TOUCH BOTTOM AND MUD ENTERS THE NETS,
COMPLETELY RINSE THE NETS AND REPEAT THE PROCEDURE. This rinse is especially important.
Slowly (0.5 m/sec) haul the net to the surface. If wind creates a large horizontal drift component on a
deep lake, record an "F1" flag (miscellaneous field flagl, and note the approximate horizontal distance as
a comment on the Sample Collection Form. If the lake is deeper than 50 m, the length of the tow is 50
m, the length of the chain.
4.
Carefully remove the fine mesh bucket from its net. Set the bucket in a 50o-mL container filled three-
fourths full with lake water to which an Alka Seltzer tablet has been added. C02 from the Alka Seltzer
narcotizes the zooplankton to relax their external structure prior to fixation in formalin. This facilitates
taxonomic identification. Wait until zooplankton movement has stopped (usually about 1 minute).
5.
Check to see if formalin-sucrose solution is in the sample bottle and record on the Sample Collection
Form.
6.
Rinse the contents of the fine mesh net bucket into its separate, labeled, 125-mL, wide-mouth
polyethylene jar containing 14 mL of borax buffered formalin-sucrose solution. Rinse bucket with 01
water three to four times or until the majority of zooplankton have been removed. Drain the remaining
filtrate into the sample container. Fill the jar of zooplankton to the mark (- 80 mL or a little more than
half full) with the 01 water. If >80 mL of sample has been added to the bottle, add 1 to 3 mL additional
sucrose-formalin. a
7.
Repeat steps 3 through 5 for the coarse mesh net. (Do not remove both buckets at the same time as
they may be difficult to reattach to the correct bongo net.)
8.
Record the length of the tows on the Sample Collection Form and on the sample labels. Verify that all
information on the labels and the form is correctly recorded. Cover each label with a strip of clear tape.
MODIFICATION FOR CLEAR. SHALLOW LAKES ONLY: If the depth at the index site is s2 m !!ill! the
Secchi disk could be seen on the bottom, then conduct a second tow of the same length. Combine the
contents of both tows. Record "2 tows" in the Comments section of the collection form, and write "2
tows" on each of the two sample labels.
10. Seal the lids of the jars by wrapping electrical tape in a clockwiseb direction so that the lid is pulled tight
as the tape is stretched around it. Place jars in a Ziploc bag.
9.
a Note: In some cases, the volume of zooplankton collected in the fine-mesh net may exceed 125 mL. Do
not try to force all the sample into a single bottle, or the preservative will not function properly and the
sample may be lost. In such cases, use a second bottle to preserve the additional sample. Use a ~
zooplankton label (i.e., one with no bar code printed on it). Complete the label, and print in the bar code
assigned to the first container on the label of the second container. On the Sample Collection Form, record
a "2" in the "No. Containers" field.
b If the sample collection jars being used have only 1 to 2 threads for the cap, taping in a counterclockwise
direction may work better to prevent leakage. Both ways should be tested during training.
7-9
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Water and Sediment Sampling
June 1994
bar codes assigned to the two (coarse and fine) zooplankton samples and the length of tow on the
Sample Collection Form (Figure 7-2), In clear, shallow lakes (less than 2-m deep where the Secchi
disk can be seen on the bottom), a second tow is conducted to collect a sufficient number of
individuals to adequately characterize the assemblage. The 14 mL of borax buffered sucrose-
formalin preservative is adequate for a total volume of approximately 80 mL. Formalin handling
safety procedures are outlined in the Regional Activities Plan. A zooplankton sample bottle should
not be filled more than two thirds. Add additional preservative or use an additional sample bottle if
necessary. The presence of preservative in the sample is noted on the Sample Collection Form to
assure the integrity of the sample. Record a flag and provide comments on the Sample Collection
Form if there are any problems in collecting the sample or conditions occur that may affect sample
integrity. Seal the lids of the jars with electrical tape, place jars in a Ziploc bag, and store samples
in zooplankton net bag for transport. Again, check that all forms and labels are complete.
7.5 SEDIMENT DIATOM SAMPLE COLLECTION
Collect a single sediment core at the index site with a modified KB corer. If a core sample
cannot be collected at the index site, move to an area with a softer bottom, as close to the index
site as possible. (Often the boat can be rotated about the anchor line to obtain a good core.) Note
the approximate distance and direction in the comments section of the Sample Collection Form
(Figure 7-2). Some gravel bottom lakes will have no sediment available to core. If a core sample
cannot be collected after attempts at a total of three sites, sediment coring is discontinued for that
lake. If a sample cannot be collected, record an "K" flag on the Sample Collection Form. Table 7-6
summarizes operations for the modified KB core and procedures for collecting and sectioning core
samples are described below.
After anchoring the boat, insert the core tube into the sampling apparatus and tighten the
hose clamp screws to secure the core tube within the sampler housing apparatus. Attach the
messenger to the sampler line and slowly lower the sampler to the lake bottom so that it contacts
the sediments in a vertical position with as little disturbance to the bottom as possible. Maintain
some tension on the sampler line to keep the sampler vertical while deploying the messenger.
Activate the sampler by sending the messenger down the line to trip the closing mechanism.
Slowly retrieve the sampler to near the surface. Reach under the surface to insert a rubber
7-10
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Water and Sediment Sampling
June 1994
TABLE 7-6. COLLECTION PROCEDURE FOR SEDIMENT DIATOM CORES
1.
Determine depth at core site using appropriate means. Sonar is appropriate at depths greater than 3 meters and where
vegetation does not obscure the true bottom. In some situations it may be necessary to determine depth by sounding. If the
bottom is disturbed during the depth determination, move at least 5 meters to the side to take the core. Often you can just spin
about or let out the anchor line. It is critical to the success of the diatom indicator to obtain undisturbed surface sediments.
Sediments may contain contaminants, and surgical gloves must be worn during sample collection.
2.
3.
Lower the corer until the bottom of the core tube is 0.5 m above the sediment surfacea. Then allow the corer to settle into the
bottom sediments while maintaining a slight tension on the line. (Let the line slip through your handl. Greater settling height
may be necessary at some sites to attain sufficient length of core. If core is less than 35 em long, attempt to obtain another
core using a controlled free-fall technique. By relaxing the corer from a greater height, a deeper core may be obtained.
Immediately after the corer has dropped into the sediment, you must maintain tension on the line to prevent the corer from
tilting and disturbing the core sample.
Trip the corer by releasing the messenger weight so that it slides down the line.
4.
5.
Slowly raise the corer back to the surface, until the core tube and rubber seal are just under the water.
While keeping the seal under water, slowly tilt the corer until you can reach under the surface and plug the bottom of the corer
with a rubber stopper. To do this without disturbing the water-sediment interface, you cannot tilt the corer more than about
450. NOTE: This is a difficult operation and stoppers are easily lost. Be sure to have spares available at all times.
6.
7.
Raise the corer into the boat in a venical position. Stand the corer in a large tub to prevent contaminating the boat with
sediment material.
8.
9.
Detach the core tube from the corer.
Remove the water above the sediment core by using a siphon tube with bent plastic tip so that the surface sediments are not
disturbed.
10.
Measure the length of the core to the nearest 0.1 cm and record interval on the Sample Collection Form and on the sample
label.
Slowly extrude the sample. To do this, position the extruder under the stopper at the base of the coring tube. Supporting both
the core tube and the extruder in a vertical position, slowly lower the coring tube until the sediment is approximately 1 cm
below the top of the tube. Place the Plexiglas sectioning apparatus (marked with a line 1 cm from the bottom) on the stage
directly over the coring tube. Slowly lower the tube and attached sectioning apparatus until the top of the sediment reaches
the 1-cm line on the sectioning tube. Slide the top 1 cm section of sediment into a labeled 1-quart liploc bag. Record this
interval on the Sample Collection Form and on the sample label for the top core.
11.
12.
Before collecting the bottom section, move the sectioning apparatus and rinse in lake water. This procedure prevents
contamination of the bottom sediment layer with diatoms from the upper portion of the core. This step is critical as a small
amount of sediment contains millions of diatoms which would destroy the population structure needed to compare
environmental conditions depicted by tops and bottoms.
Continue extruding the sample. discarding the tube central portion until the bottom of the stopper is approximately 5 em (3
inches) from the top of the coring tube. Affix the sectioning apparatus to the top of the tube. Extrude the sample until the
bottom of the stopper reaches the lower black line at the top of the tube (approximately 5 em from the top of the tubel.
Section the extruded- sediment and discard. Rinse the sectioning tube with lake water. Without removing the sectioning
apparatus from the coring tube, sliahtlv tilt the tube and wash the sectioning stage with a small amount of water from a squirt
bottle. Make sure the rinse water runs off the stage and not into the coring tube with sediment. Lower the tube until the top
of the sediment is at the 1 -cm mark on the sectioning tube. Collect the 1 -em section of core material in a separate, prelabeled,
1 -quart Ziploc bag. Record this interval on the Sample Collection Form and sample label for bottom core.
13.
14.
15.
Place the bags in a small Tupperware box and place in a cooler with bags of ice.
Rinse the corer, collection apparatus, and sectioning apparatus thoroughly with lake water. Rinse with tap water at base site.
a Note: Different lakes will present different problems. Try to get cores from all lakes. If it is impossible to obtain a core, make
detailed notes of the situation with as many suggestions as possible. Shallow, vegetation filled lakes may present the most problems.
Field crews should be innovative within time constraints to resolve coring problems and document the methods used. In very hard
bottoms, it is sometimes necessary to drop the corer from several meters above the bottom in order to retrieve any core. Even so,
concentrate on a perpendicular drop and try to minimize the disturbance to the stratigraphic layering of the sediments. Goals (In order
of priority): 1. Obtain sample of undisturbed surface sediments. 2. Obtain a deeper (representing conditions present more than 150
years ago) sample that is uncontaminated with the shallower sedimems. Make an effort to get at least a 45-cm core from all lakes
that have a See chi reading of 2.5 meters or less. For most other lakes in the Northeast. a core of 35 em in length is satisfactory. If a
lake is artificial, an even shorter core, if necessary, is sufficient.
7-11
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Water and Sediment Sampling
June 1994
stopper into the bottom of the core tube while the sampler is still submersed in water. Bring the
sampler into the boat and place in a vertical position in a large tube to prevent the contamination of
the boat with sediments. Remove the plexiglas core tube from the sampler. One person should
hold the sampler in a vertical position while the second person dismantles the unit. Retain the
sample only if it is intact, undisturbed, and essentially free of aquatic plants and debris. A desirable
core length is at least 35 to 45 cm; cores of shorter length are retained if that is all that can be
obtained with the best sampling effort. Measure and record the length of core collected and the
core intervals sampled on the Sample Collection Form.
The coring tube and sectioning apparatus are illustrated in Figure 7-3. Insert the core
extruder through the lower end of the core tube and extrude the sample by forcing the rubber
stopper down against the extruder. Carefully remove water overlaying the core with a siphon.
Extrude the core slowly until the top of the core is level with the 1-cm mark on the sectioning tube.
Carefully slide the sectioning tube containing the top 1 cm of core across the stage and into an
appropriately labeled Ziploc bag. Continue extruding the core, discarding the middle portion into
the lake, until the bottom of the stopper is 5 cm from the top of the core tube (Figure 7-3).
Thoroughly rinse the sectioning apparatus with lake water. Extrude a second 1-cm section of the
core beginning 3 cm from the very bottom of the core in the sectioning tube. Place the bottom
core sample in an appropriately labeled Ziploc bag.
After collecting the two samples (top and bottom) and dispensing into 1-quart Ziploc bags,
check the labels to assure that all written information is completed and legible. Place a strip of
clear packing tape over each label, covering the labels completely. Record the bar code for each
sample on the Sample Collection Form. Place the sample bags within a plastic (e.g., Tupperware)
box for protection.
7.6 EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLY UST
Checklists of equipment and supplies required to conduct protocols described in this section
are provided in Figure 7-4. These checklists are listed relative to containers (e.g., coolers, tubs)
used for transportation or shipping equipment, supplies, or samples. They are similar to but may be
different somewhat from the checklists in Appendix A, which are used at a base site to assure that
7-12
-------
FlOOPS94 PPT
INTERNAL REPORT
Water and Sediment Sampling
June 1994
SEDIMENT CORE TUBE AND SECTIONING APPARATUS
L8ngIh o. benthic .... MCtIon (13.an)
SECTIONING
CORE
Additional marka at 14111nterv818
(not u88d1
M8rtI far dI8tam 88dIon -- (surface intervall
(1 an tram bottom o. MIe)
~
ST../' ~=-_.u-
~
Not U88d (If ~I
Merk far b89iMIn!I 0' dI8tam
88dIon 88npI8 (bottom interval)
II an tram top of MIe)
LENGTH =
60 em
CORE TUBE
CORE EXTRUDER
STOPPER
(2.5 em thick)
8/110
Figure 7-3. Sediment coring tube and sectioning apparatus.
7-13
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Water and Sediment Sampling
June 1 994
1t8lftl in Forms Fila Number Needed
Each Lake
Lake Verification Form Icomoletedl 1
SamDle Collection Form 2
LAKE-VISIT CHECKLISTS
Number Needed
1t8lftl In 64-qt Cooler '1 Each Lak.
Sonar with manual 1
Transducer with bracket and C-clamp 1
12-V wet cell battery (charged) in battery case 1
GPS unit with manual, reference card. extra battery 1
pack
Number Needed
1t8lftl in 64-qt CooIer'2 EachLak.
Corer with 50-m line and messenger 1
Core tubes 2
Ground rubber stoppers 4
Extruder pipe 1
Sectioning tube 1
Sectioning stage 1
Siphon with L fitting 1
Tupperware box with two 1-qt Ziplocs 1
Surgical gloves 2
Grey tub 1
1t8lftlln 30-qt Cooler '1 Number Needed
(Umnology shipping) Each Laka
Tupperware box 1
Syringes, labeled 4
Syringe valves 4
Surgical gloves. pair 2
Cubitainer, 4-L 2
Ice in 1-gal Ziploe bags 6
Cooler liner (30-gal garbage bag) 1
Figure 7-4. Water and sediment sampling checklist (page 1).
7-14
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Water and Sediment Sampling
June 1994
Number NHded
Itema in Tub '1 Each Lake
Van Dorn with 3-m line, messenger 1
1-L wash bottle (labeled) with distilled or deionized water (DII 1
Sounding chain, SD-m with quick-clip 1
Parts tackle box 1
Chlorophyll tackle box: 1
Filter apparatus with filter installed 1
Hand pump with tubing 1
Box of filters in Ziploc bag (Whatman GFA 1
Forceps in bag with filters 1
Graduated cylinder, 1 OO-mL 1
Graduated cylinder, 2SD-ml 1
1 O-cm squares of foil in liploc bag 3
Zooplankton net bag: 1
Bongo net 1
Fine mesh bucket 1
Coarse mesh bucket 1
Sample jars, 12S-mL Nalgene (with 14 ml of sucrose- 2
formalin solution)
Narcotization chamber 1
Alka Seitter tablets 10
60 mL Syringe (to use with formalin and sucrose solutions) 1
Empty 12S-mL Nalgene bottle 2
Figure 7-4. Water and sediment sampling checklist (page 2).
7-15
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Water and Sediment Sampling
June 1994
all equipment and supplies are brought to and are available at the lake. The field teams are required
to use the checklists presented in this section to assure that the equipment and supplies are
organized and available on the boat in order to conduct the protocols efficiently.
7-16
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Water and Sediment Sampling
June 1994
NOTES
7.17
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Water and Sediment Sampling
June 1994
NOTES
7-18
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Water and Sediment Sampling
June 1994
NOTES
7-19
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Water and Sediment Sampling
June 1994
NOTES
7-20
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Benthic Invenebrate Sampling
June 1994
SECTION 8
BENTHIC INVERTEBRATE SAMPLING
by
Wesley L. Kinney, David V. Peck, and Thomas R. Whittier
There are two generally separate activities for benthic invertebrate sampling. The first"is a
quantitative sampling of sublittoral sediments for all benthic invertebrate organisms, using the
sediment coring device (Figure 7-3). These procedures are detailed in Section 8.1 and 8.2. The
second is a qualitative survey for the presence of zebra mussels (Dreissena sp.), described in
Section 8.3.
Benthos sampling is restricted to the sublittoral zones of lakes. Whenever possible, samples
are collected in weed-free areas. Single core samples are taken in the soft sediments at 10
sampling sites located at or near the 10 physical habitat stations established for physical habitat
characterizations (see Section 5). Very rigid quality assurance practices are observed in the field.
Prior to launching the boat, ensure that all sample containers and forms are filled out for lake ID,
date, and sample type where required. Criteria for accepting or rejecting a sample are specified in
the following procedures. To assure sample completeness, field forms are completed by one
individual and checked by another to verify that all pertinent information is included. Activities
described in this section are summarized in Figure 8-1. Activities associated with collecting
replicate benthos samples are described in the Regional Activities Plan.
8.1 SITE SELECTION AND SAMPLE COLLECTION
The process for locating the site and collecting benthos samples is described in the
following section and is summarized in Table 8-1. The actual site location for benthic sampling is
determined from the vertical distribution (depth profile) ot temperature and dissolved oxygen (DO).
In thermally stratified lakes, samples are taken i'n well-oxygenated areas (where DO > 5.0 mg/L
and at sites where the upper limits of the metalimnion meet the lake bottom) or within the
metalimnion where dissolved oxygen concentration still exceeds 5.0 mg/L. The depth of the top of
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Benthic Invertebrate Sampling
June 1 994
BENTHIC SAMPLE COLLECTION ACTIVITIES
ASSEMBLE EQUIPMENT AND SUPPUES
(2 Persons,
. Record depth of metal/mnion or depth where
dissolved 02 is ~ 5 mgIL on collection fonn
LOCATE PHYSICAL HABITAT STATION
. Record START time on collection form (first site only)
. Determine suitable sampling site based on depth, dissolved 02 , and absence of vegetation
. Mark location on Benthic Collection Map
COLLECT CORE SAMPLE
. Ensure acceptable length and composition
. Collect second core sample (if required)
PROCESSING (BOAT)
. Process sample through sieve bucket
. Transfer residue into sample container
. Pour off excess water using mesh lid
. Complete sample label and collection form
HOLD FOR SHORE PROCESSING
. Place in labeled Zlploc bags
. Store in cooler
CONDUCT ZEBRA MUSSEL SURVEY
. Examine site for presence of mussels
. Called and preserve specimens if possible
. Remove surveyor's tape from physical habitat station
PROCESSING (SHORE) /'
(if not done in boat' PRESERVE SAMPLES
. Filter lakewater through sieve bucket for use . Add carbonate-buffered formalin
in sample processing - . Seal containers with tape
. Process Sample through sieve bucket . . Cover labels with clear tape
. Transfer residue into sample container . Bag and store in cooler
. Pour off excess water using mesh lid . Record END time on collection form
. Complete sample label and collection fonn
,
CLEAN EQUIPMENT AND PACK FOR TRANSPORT
. Check samples, labels, and forms
.
,
Next Site
Shore
FLOC S94 PPT
-
Figure 8-1. Benthic invertebrate sampling activities summary.
8-2
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Benthic Invertebrate Sampling
June 1 994
TABLE 8-1. COLLECTION PROTOCOL FOR BENTHIC SAMPLING
1. Note depth at which top of metalimnion was observed during lake profile activities and record
on Benthos Collection Form.
2. Proceed to physical habitat station, record start time, and locate a suitable location (well-
oxygenated [DO > 5.0 mg/l]) at or near physical habitat observation point where:
- the upper limits of the metalimnion meet the lake bottom
- or in shallow area of the lake near the physical habitat station where depth is greater than 1
m and there are very few or no weeds.
3. Note location on map on Benthos Collection Form. Record any pertinent comments.
4. Collect a core sample.
5. Determine if core is acceptable. Discard and resample if:
a. Sampler malfunctions and core is < 13 cm long.
b. Core contains large amount of aquatic vegetation.
c. Core is disturbed (sediments are stirred up).
6. Obtain 13-cm long sample from top of the core using the extruder and sectioning apparatus.
Slide sample into a 1-gallon heavy-duty Ziploc freezer bag. Rinse splitter tube into collection
bucket using lake water.
7. Remove ribbon marking the physical habitat station and move to next station.
the metalimnion will generally vary between 3 and 5 m depending upon such factors as time of
year, lake depth, lake shape, and exposure to wind. Some shallow lakes may be completely mixed
from top to bottom. In shallow basins of stratified lakes or in unstratified lakes the samples are
collected in weedless areas at or near the physical habitat station where depth is greater than 1 m.
To locate the upper depth of the metalimnion (see Figure 5-1) metalimnion, refer to the lake
Profile Form (Figure 8-2) which was filled out the previous day. The top of the metalimnion should
have been noted on this form (if not, refer to Section 5 for directions on determining this depth).
On the map portion of the Benthos Collection Form Side 1 (Figure 8-4), record the depth of the top
of the metalimnion (or the lowest depth where DO is greater than 5.0 mg/l, whichever is
shallower). This depth is used as a target sampling depth at each of the 10 physical habitat
stations. The process for locating a suitable sampling site at each station is illustrated in
8-3
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Benthic Invertebrate Sampling
June 1 994
LAKE, PROFILE FORM'
LAKE NAME: "'-. W,,~R,;ur DATE OF PROFILE: 71 If Itj'' VISIT: (1) 2
.-.
LAKE 10: N y ~ .D... .a. L SITE 10 IClrclel:('"INoEX'I OTHER:
TEAM 10 (circlel: 1 (2) 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 OTH""iR:"
PRECIPITATION (cirelel: (NONE) IJGHT HEAVY
- (RIIPLP')
SURFACE CONomONS (cirelel: fLAT CHCIPI'Y WHlTECAP8
OOOR? )(NO C YES Description:
SCUM? XNO C YES Description:
INDEX SITE DEPTH: .LL.~ M ' CHECK (,.I) IF SONAR NOT USED: 0
FLAG: I COMMENTS:
DISSOLVED OXYGEN &:TEMPERATUREPROFILE
(Depths of Me.surements- [ml: Surface. 1.&~2. 3.4,&~ 8;,7;8:9; 10~,11;1% 13;14.1&; 20, 2&. 30~ 35. 40;,45.
, end 50 mi. Allolncluderudlnga8t:'1'mabove battom.
O2 TEMP. ' 0. ,1EMP~
IllEr"", ..' , lET""
DEPTH (1ft) (mgJU (IC) ,,,,,,,,.,, : DEPI1I (m) , '(1nIIU tIC) ~'
U.Jt D.Jt D.Z RAG, cr;,'" "'u;,x', D.Z, JILX, RAG rrM'
SURFACE g,g ~/. I /I.t!} "1.3.. l":l./
I,~ t;.9 !JI, " I!J. t:J ',ii' 12 (j
.2." i'.G' ..11. t'J 1'1.(J ~" II"
~ ,l) ~t;I ~." 1'1." ':l.CI 11.1'
'I.D 9.f' .!J1.t) J r. f') "J" 1I.r?
<:~ 7.t) 1r,.fJ' .-,- '''.0 I. q II."
~.(J ~. '7 I~.I.. ,,,.~ ~ 1 II."
"f.t) '1.&/ 11/..2..
~.(J 11.4 /1.:1...
q.t:] &1.3 1"1' n
Ii'J. (J 11.'1 12.r-
SURFACE IDup.1 X,'" -:1.1.1
Is THE DUPUCATE 02READINO wmtIN :0.5 MoiL OF THE INITIAL SURFACE AUDINO? )( YES C No
CHECK HERE go ADDmONAL PIIOFlUi MEA8UREMENTS AIlE RECORDED ON THE REVERSE 81DE:
If tne Sltl deptll II S ;J m. t8k1 r88dll1gs et tnl lunace. IVery 0.5 m. 8IId 1 m 800VI tnl oonom.
. METAUMNION . defln8d as the region at the profile wh.. the temp8f8hn cll8nga et . rete at 1 °C or ",leter per meter of depth.
indicate the depth of the top of the metallmnlon wfth e -r, IIId the bottom at the mlt8llmnion Iwhen the ret. at Ch8n1l8 becom..
1.11 than 1 °C per meter' widl e.'.. Once m8t8llmnlon .. encounter8d. t.. readings every 1 meter until bottom of the m.talimnlon
Is reached. Racord the depth at the top at the met8IimnIon on the Benthos S8mp1. LOC8tIon end Coiactlon Form.
FlAO CODES: K- 110 1IIIA.'_1IIff 011 _A,..IIAIII: U- IUUICT _II~ 011 _Aft*: Q- ~CClPTAIU QC - _1m wmt
llEASURDIENT: F1. F2. EtC. - -CIW'- RAGS ..- IV EACH FIEUI CNW. EXRAII AU. RAGS . COIIII8ITIIIC1IOII 011 laCK OP fOIW. c:....1
REvIEwED BY (INITIALI:~
Rev. 6/94 (profile 1.94)
Lak. Prom. Form. 1
Figure 8-2. Lake Profile Form.
8-4
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Benthic Invertebrate Sampling
June 1994
BENTHIC SAMPLE SITE SELECTION
DETERMINE TARGET SAMPUNG
DEPTH FROM LAKE PROFILE FORM
LAKE STRATIFIED:
Shallower 01:
. Depth 01 top of thetmOCIine
. Depth at whicII dissoMId 0, ~ , mgtl
NO
DETERMINE TARGET SAMPLING
DEPTH FROM LAKE PROFILE FORM
LAKE NOT STRATIFIED:
. Depth,"Im8l1dc5m
. Depth 81 which dissoMId 0 I ~ ~ mgll
MOVE OFFSHORE
~ STATION
TO LOCATE
SUITABLE DEPTH
. Donotgof8th8r
thin midpoint of lake
YES
MOVE AROUND SITE
TO LOCATE VEGETATION.
FREE AREA OF SUfTABLE
DEPTH
. T8IgIt dIpth Of 8IIaIIower
(but not elm)
FlOOPSg.t PPT
ATTEMPT TO COLLECT
CORE SAMPLE
. McIw eraund 8i8 if
.-y <, ba8I 18ngIII)
to IInd auiIabI8 aub8II8I8
. Four 8It8mpI8 rnuimum
YES
-
Figure 8-3. Process for selecting benthic sampling sites.
8-5
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Benthic Invenebrate Sampling
June 1994
BENTHOS"" SAMPLE LOCATION AND COLlECTION FORM.LAKES
LAKE NAME:
LAKE ID: .N
2
TEAM ID (cirel,l:
7
,
. 10
OTHER: -
OUTUNEMAP OFLAKE:lWITH PHYSICAL HASrTATSTATJONS IDENTIFIED)
I1811CATE LOCA- - -.n8C"1:CJI8 - AM" COUICTID WIIM 1MWtD18I "01' 1111 -.aT PM\'IICAL HAImIT Si"IW IA . JI;
ARROW I_TEa
NOImI.
AECONJ 1111 8HALUJWBt"0I' 'nil ~"-II'IIIIIILAu ~ FoIIIII
AI-n._OI'''r.."III'''''~ at" """""
., THE ~ DB'nIAT- -\/II)O~ a6"MDA;:
TARGEr DIPnf -,--.
/
fJ
If
ID~ IIYCoc t..
L. IAItJ'EVS
A(tftlt I 'f1.1 h....
~ Sr. Ie.
,rtJO ,... ;~V t '
COMMENTS:
IEWED IY (lNITIALI:
Rev" 6//94 Ibencoll.941
llemtloe Sample Location and CoIlaC1lon Form- Lakea - 1
Figure 8-4. Benthos Collection Form Side 1.
8-6
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Benthic Invertebrate Sampling
June 1994
Figure 8-3. Use the sonar to locate a suitable sampling site at or near a physical habitat station.
Mark the location of each sampling site on the sketch map on the Benthos Collection Form Side 1
(Figure 8-4). Identify the site on the map with a circled letter corresponding to the nearest physical
habitat station.
Once the sampling site has been identified, anchor the boat. Surgical gloves are worn
during the collection process. At the first station, record the "START" time on Side 2 of the
Benthos Collection Form (Figure 8-5). Insert the core tube into the sampling apparatus and tighten
the hose clamp screws to secure the core tube. Attach the messen'ger to the sampler line and
slowly lower the sampler to the lake bottom so that it contacts the sediments in a vertical position
with as little disturbance to the bottom as possible. Maintain some tension on the line to keep the
sampler vertical while deploying the messenger. Activate the sampler by sending the messenger
down the line, tripping the closing mechanism. Slowly retrieve the sampler to near the surface.
While the sampler tube is still submerged in water, insert a rubber stopper into the bottom of the
core tube. Retrieve the sampler into the boat and place it in a vertical position in a large tub to
prevent contamination of the boat with sediment. Remove the plexiglas core tube from the
sampler. Have one person hold the sampler in- a vertical position while another person dismantles
the unit. Examine the sediment sample within the core tube. Retain only undisturbed, intact
samples that are essentially free of aquatic plants and debris. An acceptable sample is one that
contains fine sediments that fill the core to a depth of at least 13 em and has an undisturbed
surface layer. Unacceptable samples (which are discarded) include cores less than 13 cm in length
due to improper functioning of the sampler or due to unsuitable substrate material. In some cases
it may not be possible to obtain "acceptable" samples at all sites. In such cases, retain the best
sample obtainable and record a "U" (suspect sample) on Side 2 of the collection form (Figure 8-5)
and explain the flag in the comments section.
Insert the core extruder through the lower end of the core tube and extrude the sample by
forcing the rubber stopper down against the extruder. Water overlaying the core does not have to
be removed by a siphon as described for sediment diatom collection in Section 7. Slowly extrude
the core until the top of the core is level with the top of the sectioning apparatus (-13 cm; see
Figure 7-3). Carefully slide the sectioning tube containing the top 13 em of core into an
appropriately labeled 1-9allon heavy-duty Ziploc freezer bag. Use a wash bottle containing lake
water to rinse the sample into the bag. Store bags in a cooler until processing. Discard the
8-7
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Benthic Invertebrate Sampling
June 1 994
LAKE ID: hi..
.I'J... .D... Q. L
BENTHOS COLLECTION FORM (CORE SAMPlES I
DATE OF COLLECTION:
o
RECORD UMPUNcr aTARTTIMa:
aTATION
SAMPLE ID "'''''''''1 II)
.J..~~ 0 0 L A
B
:Lc:JL.C.Q...~ C
3.-'LA..Q.Q..1 D
E
..10.1.0..Q. F
G
H
-3.~A..fL1:Ls::.
.t1()~Ot:)-'- J
M
M
M
M
M
. WOOOY DIE8RI8. . OTHER IDEaCRI8E IN
COMMENTS I
RAG CODES: K- NOUIlPUCOUK'TID: U-.-.r..-.: F1. F2. ETC.- ----_ITUCHAaD_. ExlU8lAU.RM8.
COMMENTS SEC'I1ON. .
ZBIRA MUSSB. OBSERVATIOIfAMJ COUECTION
STAT1118
0U9VID IY/NI
CIIU8:nD IYIN)
(;
,.
A
8
C
o
E
F
G
H
J
LAUNCH
OTtER
IY I
Rev. 6//94 (bencoI1.941
"nth08 S8"",18 Location and CoIIac:1lon Form- Lak.. . 2
Figure 8-5. Benthos Collection Form Side 2.
8-8
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Benthic Invertebrate Sampling
June 1994
remainder of the core by extruding it into the lake. Thoroughly rinse the extruding apparatus. corer.
and splitter with lake water. Record the dominant substrate type (gravel, sand, silt, clay or muck.
or woody debris) of the core on Side 2 of the Benthos Collection Form (Figure 8-5). Also record
the actual depth from which the sample was collected on the collection form. If no sample can be
collected from a site, enter an "M" flag (for missing sample) on the collection form, and explain in
the comments section why no sample was collected. Remove ribbon marking the physical habitat
station and move to the next station.
8.2 SAMPLE PROCESSING
Sample processing activities are summarized in Table 8-2. The sample may be processed at
the collection site while the boat is still anchored in position, or it may be taken to shore for further
processing at the option of the field crew. An advantage of processing the sample at the collection
site is that there is no need to filter rinse water as the likelihood of introducing benthic organisms
into the sample from open lake water is negligible. Water obtained near shore may contain benthic
animals dislodged from weeds or shallow, disturbed substrata and must be filtered through the #60
mesh screen bottom bucket prior to rinsing the sample. Be sure to thoroughly rinse screen bottom
bucket before processing samples.
Transfer the 13-cm portion of core retained for processing from the collection bucket to a
plastic bucket with a No. 60 mesh screen bottom. Rinse all material adhering to the sides and
bottom of the collection bucket into the screen bottom bucket with lake water (or filtered lake
water). Tap lake water surface with the screen bottom bucket forcing water through the screen
bottom. Continue this process until the fine sediments are rinsed through the screen. Samples are
adequately screened when water draining through the screen becomes clear and no "sediment
cloud" is visible around the bottom of the bucket. When agitating the bucket in the lake, it is very
important that the bucket not be completely submersed as some organisms in the sample would be
lost over the top of the bucket. If the bucket is submersed, discard the sample and collect a new
sample. Also, dO!!Q! mix the sample by hand or with a spatula to speed the sieving process, as
this practice destroys the very small and fragile organisms.
Complete a sample label with the Lake ID, date, and site ID and circle the type of sample
(CORE). Attach to a 500-mL bottle. Transfer the residue from the screen bottom bucket to a
8-9
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Benthic Invertebrate Sampling
June 1994
TABLE 8-2. PROCESSING BENTHIC SAMPLE
1. Processing - Do in boat or on shore. If performed on shore, all lake water used must first be
filtered through No. 60 mesh screen bottom bucket. Transfer sample from collection bucket
into 60-mesh sieve bucket. Rinse collection plastic bucket into sieve bucket with lake water.
2. Tap lake water surface with the screen bottom bucket forcing water through the screen bottom
until water draining through screen is clear. If sieve bucket becomes totally submerged, sample
is no longer acceptable, as organisms may have been lost.
3. Complete label; attach to 500-mL bottle. Record tracking information on Benthos Collection
Form.
4. Place sieve bucket containing sample over a bucket or pan. Concentrate residue in bucket.
Transfer residue from sieve bucket into 500-mL bottle by hand.
5. Rinse remaining residue into container using a plastic funnel with small amounts of lake water
from a rinse bottle.
6. Attach lid with 60-mesh screening to container and pour out excess water. Rinse residue on lid
back into container with water from rinse bottle. Add water to bring total volume (residue plus
water) to about 400 mL. Complete information on Benthos Collection Form before leaving site. .
7. On shore, fill plastic syringe with 50 mL of 100 percent carbonate buffered (pH 10) formalin
solution. Be sure to use formalin of pH 10. Formalin used for fish samples is pH 7.6 to 7.8 and
will dissolve chitinous exoskeletons and mollusk shells. Add formalin to sample bottle. Cap
container tightly. Seal the container by taping the cap clockwisea with plastic tapes. Cover
labels with clear tape.
8. Place all sample-bottles into a 30-gallon clear or white plastic bags and seal with tape or wire
ties. Write Lake ID number on bag with permanent marker and place in cooler for transport.
a
If the sample containers have only 1 to 2 threads for the cap, applying the tape is a
counterclockwise direction may require better protection against leakage. This should be tested
during training to determine the best procedure for taping containers.
8-10
-------
r
INTERNAL REPORT
Benthic Invenebrate Sampling
June 1994
labeled sample container over another bucket or tub to catch any residue that falls outside the
sample container. The objective is to capture all the residue in the sample container while
introducing as little water as possible. Tilt the screen bottom bucket during the final stages of
sieving to concentrate the residue into a small area of the bottom of the bucket. Transfer the bulk
of this material by hand into the sample container. Rinse the remaining residue in the bucket into
the sample container through a plastic funnel using lake water (filtered through No. 60 mesh)
contained in a 1 ,000-mL plastic rinse bottle fitted with a rinse spout. Fit a screen top lid (No. 60
mesh) onto the sample container and drain off the excess water in the sample container. Gently
rinse the residue retained on the screen top lid back into the sample container with small amounts
of lake water in the rinse bottle. Add filtered lake water from the rinse bottle to bring the volume
to 400 mL. Use a marked bottle as a guide. Record the bar code printed on the label on Side 2 of
the Benthos Collection Form (Figure 8-5).
Record a nun flag (for suspect sample) and provide comments on the Benthos Collection
Form if:
.
there are any problems in collecting the sample,
.
conditions occur that may affect sample integrity, or
.
a nonstandard procedure was used to collect a sample.
If there are other observations of note about a sample (but that do not render it as suspect), use a
miscellaneous flag (Fn).
After all 10 sites are sampled, return to shore and add 40 to 50 mL of carbonate-buffered
formalin to each container to create a 10-percent formalin solution. Cap the containers tightly and
wrap electrical tape clockwise around each cap to seal it for transport. Invert and shake bottles to
mix the formalin throughout the sample. Check the labels to ensure all written information is
legible. Place a strip of clear packing tape over the label and bar code, covering the label
completely. Record the time sample processing ended on Side 2 of the Benthos Collection Form
(Figure 8-5).
8-11
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Benthic Invertebrate Sampling
June 1994
8.3 EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLY LIST
A checklist of equipment and supplies required to conduct protocols described in this
section is provided in Figure 8-6. The field teams are required to use the checklist presented in this
section to assure that equipment and supplies are organized and available on the boat in order to
conduct the protocols efficiently.
8.4 QUALITATIVE ZEBRA MUSSEL SURVEY
In the late 1980s at least one species of exotic freshwater mussels (Unionidae: Dreissena
sp.), known as zebra mussels, became established in the Great Lakes. Since 1990 they have been
spreading into other inland surface waters. EMAP is in a position to be able to monitor the rate and
extent of zebra mussel invasion into inland lakes. At this time, the goal is only to detect and
document their presence in a lake, not to do quantitative in-lake assessments of abundance.
The general procedure is to actively look for zebra mussels at each of the 10 physical
habitat stations, benthos sampling sites, and at the launch site. Observations of mussels at any
other location should also be recorded. If any mussels are observed, example specimmens should
be collected if possible, and preserved for species verification. Samples need only to be collected
from 2 or 3 locations if they are widespread in a lake. Observations and collection may be made
during the physical habitat assessment (Section 5) and/or in conjunction with quantitative benthos
sampling. Observations (and collection) at any other time are also valid. Any data related to zebra
mussel is recorded on the Benthos Collection Form (Figure 8-4).
8.4.1. Species Characteristics and Probable Habitat
The zebra mussel (Figure 8-7) is a small bivalve (adults generally 25 to 30 mm in length)
that normally attaches firmly and permanently to solid substrates, in the manner of saltwater
mussels. However, there are new reports (only in the Great Lakes so far) of a second zebra mussel
species ("quagga" mussel) that will colonize soft substrates. Once established, they usually form
large clusters (Le., you are unlikely to find just one lone mussel), on rocks, buoys, pier pilings,
woody debris, trash, native freshwater mussels, and each other. In lakes they tend not to survive
in locations subject to ice scour or heavy wave action, on soft substrates like sand or mud, nor in
areas of bright light. They tend to become abundant in water greater than one meter deep.
8-12
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Benthic Invertebrate Sampling
June 1994
EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLY CHECKLIST FOR BENTHOS SAMPLING
Completed Lake Profile Form 1
Benthic Sample Collection Form with preprinted lake outline (from 1
dossier)
Field Operations Manual 1
Quick Reference Handbook 1
Sediment corer 1
Sectioning stage 1
Sectioning tube 1
Plastic funnel 1
Sieve bucket 1
Rinse bottle, 500-mL 1
Screen top lid (60-mesh) for sample containers 1
Sample containers, 500-mL (marked at 400-mL) 10
Heavy-duty Ziploc bags, 1-gallon, labeled with station ID 10
Large plastic tub 1
Plastic electrical tape 1 roll
Permanent markers 2-3
Garbage bags, large kitchen size (for storing sample containers) 2
Cooler 1
Benthic sample labels with bar codes 1 sheet
Benthic sample labels without bar codes (for extra containers) 1 sheet
Clear tape strips 1 pkg.
60-cc plastic syringe for dispensing formalin 1
Carbonate buffered formalin solution (sodium bicarbonate) 500 mL
Surgical gloves. 2
Parts kit 1
Figure 8-6. Benthic invenebrate sampling checklist. .
8-13
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Benthic Invenebrate Sampling
June 1 994
A
Total length: 25 to 30 mm.
Figure 8- 7.
Scale:
1 em = approx. 20 mm.
B
Zebra mussel (Dreissenll polymorphllt. (a. Single zebra mussel showing byssal threads
[Credit: Carol Allaire]; b. Cluster 01 zebra mussels on rock [Credit: Margaret Van
Bolt]). (Illustrations by Michigan Sea Grant Program.)
8-14
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Benthic Invertebrate Sampling
June 1994
A note about the likelihood of finding zebra mussels: currently, they are not widespread in
inland lakes, having been found in a few large lakes and in large rivers. In addition, the zebra
mussel appears to require moderately hard water to successfully reproduce.
8.4.2 Collection and Data Recording
Procedures for the zebra mussel survey are presented in Table 8-3. At each physical
habitat station, each benthic sampling site, and at the launch site of each lake, make a brief visual
search of hard substrates for zebra mussel. Conduct observations in water greater than one meter
deep if possible.
If you observe mussels, make a reasonable effort to collect a sample. Native North
American freshwater lake bivalves are usually found on soft substrates and are mobile. The
Heritage Program is interested in freshwater mollusks in general, so collect examples of other
bivalves and gastropods, if possible. You are not required to dive or swim for such a sample. A
better alternative is to collect a cluster of mussels attached to a small object (small rock, other
mollusk shell, etc.). If zebra mussels are widespread, only collect samples from two or three
locations. If mussels are present in a lake but not collectable at any of the "standard" sites, try to
get a sample from some other location. The object is to detect and document their presence in a
lake. Place the collected mussels in a Ziploc bag for later placement in formalin. Mussel samples
are preserved and labeled along with other nonfish bycatch collections (one or two containers per
lake); see the Regional Activities Plan for any additional guidance. Preserve mollusks in the
carbonate-buffered formalin used for benthic invertebrates (the alkaline pH will minimize breakdown
of the shell and associated diagnostic features).
Use the comments section of the form to explain why mussels were seen but not collected,
as well as comments on substrate, numbers, etc.
8-15
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Benthic Invertebrate Sampling
June 1994
TABLE 8-3. QUALITATIVE ZEBRA MUSSEL SURVEY
1.
At each physical habitat station and benthos sampling site, search for likely locations for zebra
mussels based on the following guidelines:
a. Depths> 1 m (not subject to ice scour or heavy wave action)
b. Harder bottom substrates (although some forms may colonize soft substrates)
c. Possible attachment sites (e.g., rocks, buoys, peer and dock pilings, woody debris, trash,
native freshwater mussels)
2.
Use the viewing box to aid in underwater observations of substrate and potential attachment
sites.
3.
If no mussels are observed, enter an "N" in the "OBSERVED" box on the Benthos Collection
Form. Diagnostic features of zebra mussels include:
. thin shells
. about 25 to 30 mm (1 inch) long
. dark color, with characteristic" zebra" striping
. attached in clusters on solid substrates
4.
If mussels are observed (even if they are not believed to be zebra mussels), enter a "Y" in the
"OBSERVED" box on the Benthos Collection Form. Make a reasonable effort to collect a
sample. Use a knife to slice the attachment threads and gently pull or pry one or two
individuals from the substrate. Take care to avoid breaking the knife blade. If possible, collect
a cluster of mussels that are attached to a small object (e.g., rock, shell, etc.).
If mussels are observed but are not collectible at the physical habitat stations, benthos
sampling sites, or launch site, enter an "N" in the "COLLECTED" box. Attempt to collect them
from another location in the lake. Record the locations as comments for the nearest physical
habitat station. If this is possible, enter a "Y" in the "COLLECTED" box.
If mussels are widespread in a lake, only collect specimens from two or three sites.
5.
Place specimens in a liploc bag with some lake water until they can be transported to the
launch site.
6.
Preserve specimens in 10 percent carbonate-buffered formalin, using an extra benthic sample
container. Prepare a label from a blank sheet of paper with the following information:
.
.
Lake ID
Visit
Nearest physical habitat station
"lebra mussel sample"
.
.
Attach the label to the container with clear tape. Seal the container and prepare it for
transport using the same techniques as for benthic samples.
7.
Ship zebra mussel samples with the fish vouchei' samples, unless otherwise directed by the
Communications Center.
8-16
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Benthic Invertebrate Sampling
June 1994
NOTES
8-17
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Benthic Invertebrate Sampling
June 1994
NOTES
8-18
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Benthic Invertebrate Sampling
June 1 994
NOTES
8-19
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Benthic Invertebrate Sampling
June 1994
NOTES
8-20
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Final lake Activities
June 1994
SECTION 9
FINAL LAKE ACTIVITIES
by
Alan Herlihy
Prior to leaving the lake, the field team makes a general assessment of the lake and makes a
final check of the data forms and samples. The objective of the lake assessment is to record field
crew observations of catchment and lake characteristics useful for future data interpretation,
ecological value assessment, development of associations, and verification of stressor data. The
observations and impressions of field crews are extremely valuable. The objective of the second
data form and sample check is to assure completeness of all sampling activities. Activities
described in this section are summarized in Figure 9-1 .
9.1 GENERAL LAKE ASSESSMENT
The team members complete the Lake Assessment Form at the end of lake sampling,
recording all observations from the lake that were noted during the course of the visit. This lake
Assessment Form is designed as a template for recording pertinent field observations. It is bV no
means comprehensive and any additional observations should be recorded in the comments section.
The form consists of five major sections: Lake Site Activities and Disturbances, General Lake
Information, Shoreline Characteristics, Qualitative Macrophyte Survey, and Qualitative Assessment
of Environmental Values.
9.1 .1 Lake Site Activities and Disturbances
Record any of the stressors listed in Table 9-1 on the lake Assessment Form Side 1 (Figure
9-2) that were observed while on the lake, while driving or walking through the lake catchment, or
while flying over the lake and catchment. For activities and stressors that you observe, rate their
abundance or influence as low, moderate, or heavy by putting an L, M, or H on the line next to the
listed stressor. Leave the line blank for any stressor not observed. The distinction between low,
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Final Lake Activities
June 1 994
FINAL LAKE ACTIVITIES
r COMPLETE LAKE ASSESSMENT I
(3 Persons)
I
, ,
REVIEW DATA FORMS f LOAD BOAT ONTO TRAILER I
(1 person) (2 Persons)
. Completeness . +
. Accuracy
. Legibility INSPECT BOAT, MOTOR, TRAILER. AND NETS FOR
. . Flags/Comments
PRESENCE OF PLANT AND ANIMAL MATERIAL,
AND CLEAN THOROUGHLY
1. (2 Persons)
REVIEW SAMPLE LABELS
(1 person)
. Completeness ,
. Accuracy
. Legibility PACK EQUIPMENT AND SUPPUES FOR
. Cross-check with forms TRANSPORT
(2 Persons)
,
INSPECT SAMPLES
(1 Person) 1
. Complete I CLEAN UP LAUNCH SITE AND STAGING AREA I
. Sealed (2 to 3 persona)
. Ice packs
. Packed for transport
t
LEAVE LAKE
I
FlOOPS9
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Final lake Activities
June 1994
TABLE 9-1. SITE ACTIVITIES AND DISTURBANCES OBSERVED AT THE LAKE
Residences
Note the presence of any houses and residential buildings around the lake.
Construction
Pipes/Drain
Treatment
Plant
Landfill
Parks, etc.
Resorts
Marinas
Trash/Litter
Scum/Slicks
Agriculture
Industry
Mine/Quarry
Power Lines
Power Plants
logging/Fires
Odors
Macrophyte
Control
Liming
Drinking Water
Treatment
Angling Pressure
Record the presence of any recent construction in the immediate area around the lake or if there are
signs of recent sedimentation events (depositional fans).
Note the presence of any pipes or drains feeding into or out of the lake. If known, write down what type
of activity the pipe is associated with (e.g., storm sewer, plant intake) in the .Comments. section.
Presence of sewage treatment facility.
Note any evidence of landfill or dumping around the lake. This would include garbage pits, informal
dumping of large amounts of trash or cars and appliances along roads or lakeshore. It does not include
small amounts of litter.
Record in this section the presence of organized public or private parks, campgrounds. beaches or other
recreation areas around the lake. If there are signs of informal areas (e.g.. swimming hole) for camping,
swimming. or boating around the lake, record them on the .informal. parks, campground, beach line.
Note the level of resort activity; this could include motels, resorts, golf courses, and stores.
Record the presence of any marinas.
Note the relative abundance of trash or litter around the lake.
Note the relative abundance of scum or slicks around the lake.
Note the presence of cropland, pasture, orchards, and livestock.
Note any industrial activity (e.g., canning. chemical, pulp) around the lake or in the catchment. Describe
type of industry in .Comments. section.
Note any evidence of mining or quarrying activity in the catchment or around the lake.
Note the presence of any power generating facilities or heavy dUty transmission lines around or across
the lake (not ordinary telephone or electric wires).
Note the presence of any power plants.
Record any evidence of logging or fire removal of trees in the lake area.
Note the presence of any strong odors.
Note evidence of dredging or application of chemicals and describe in .Comments. section.
Note any evidence of liming activities.
Note the presence of any drinking water treatment facilities.
Make an estimate of the intensity of fishing activity in the lake. Any oddities or further elaboration
should be recorded in .Comments. section.
9-3
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Final Lake Activities
June 1 994
LAKE ASSESSMENT FORM
LAKE NAME: L' :.v O~ l5 ~ 115 DATE OF VISIT: ? / If /9'1 VISIT #: (f) 2
LAKE ID: .N. ~ 0 .!L..o... L TEAM ID Iclrclll: 1 ~:5 £ & . 7 . . 10 OTHEII:
LAK£SITEACTM11I8AND Dl8TUfl8ANCI!8OUEJ1V1D~IILANK-I8IT'~. L-UlW. M--TW. H--WI
IIDID8fT\o\I. 1IICIIIA11IIIIAL -.1WIM. IIIUITMAL LAO: M.VTF IT
Ni- 1, ,..... (.fA. -1 A--o ...... - c:-.. - -- - -- c:..-.
l...--....- --p-~- - p- - -- -'-
- -- - - - ~ - -'- - D8I8I8 WaTD TImrf.
- PI.... - - - - -....... a--
- Tl8Af-.T II\MT - T~ -'-
- ~- - -----..- - --GO'"
--
GENERAL LAKE WFORMATION'
HYDllCIUICIIC !.AU""'" 0- )(_1_- 10_.-_-
oun.rr DAM8 -.- 0- 0'..-
Low ELEvATION F\JQH1' ~ Ona )(810
MOTOll 80AT DEIII8Irt 0- 'J("", 0- 0-
~ AEmImc8 )(- 0-,- 0-.
--...m 1)(- 0- 0...-
LAltI LIVB. CIUI8IOD 0- X -.- 0... - .Q..3.-. .
SHORELINE'CHARACTERISTICS!" oflhorelln.1
_,- 0 -lei.., 0 - ".. .... CJ -.. 128..~' )(en-I>~'
_IL.... I-"-Ic..., 0 - I'"'''' CJ -"128" ~I 0 en-I> TI...
-- hid. -IC .... 0 -t'...... CJ -.. 128..~, 0 -I>TI..'
V'ifmAm : )(_IC ..., 0 - .... a,.1 CJ -.. 128..~. CJ -I>TI..'
_1-1 )(-1<.... 0 - .... 28'" CJ -.. la..~, 0 _1>71,.,
1InILo- )It - I C K' 0 - t'.. .... CJ -.. 128.. ~I 0 en-I>TI,..
--_.I-a. - "i( - I C ..., 0 - .... ..., CJ -.. 128..~, 0 -I>TI...
, GUAUTATIVE"MACROPtfYTI'IURVEY
MA-.nI D88m' 0_ )(- CJ -.. 0 0..
EMEIIOEJIT/FUIA~ CCMItAGI '" LAItI AJuI ~ O..ZK CJ 28..- CJ 10..",. 0 >~
1- COVIIIAGI C" I.AU AlDI ~ 0.. a.. 028..- CJ 50.. TI.. 0 >~
DESCIIPI1OIII:
IIOCIn_a on re_-I
Rev. 6/94 U.k...1.94)
Figure 9-2. Lake Assessment Form Side 1.
9-4
REvIEwED BY IINITIALI:1i!..-.
Lake Asses.Rlant Farm . 1
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Final Lake Activities
June 1994
moderate, and heavy will be subjective. For example, if there are two to three houses on a lake,
mark the "Houses" line with an "L" for low. If the lake is ringed with houses, rate it as heavy (H).
Similarly, a small patch of clear-cut logging on a hill overlooking the lake would rate a low ranking.
Logging activity right on the lake shore, however, would get a heavy disturbance ranking.
9.1.2 General lake Information
Observations regarding general characteristics of the lake are described in Table 9-2, and
are recorded on the Lake Assessment Form Side 1 (Figure 9-2). Hydrologic lake type is a very
important variable for defining subpopulations for acidic deposition effects. Note any flight hazards
that might interfere with either low-altitude fly-overs by aircraft (for future aerial photography or
videography), or landing on the lake for sampling purposes (either by float plane or helicopter).
When estimating the intensity of motor boat usage, utilize other observations besides the actual
number of boats observed on the lake during the visit, such as presence of boat houses, docks, idle
craft, etc.
9.1.3 Shoreline Characteristics
Shoreline characteristics of interest during the final lake assessment are described in Table
9-3. Observations related to this portion of the assessment are recorded on the lake Assessment
Form Side 1 (Figure 9-2). To estimate the extent of major vegetation types, limit the assessment to
the immediate lake shoreline (Le., within 20 m of the water). As a separate step, estimate the
percentage of the immediate shoreline that has been developed or modified by humans.
9.1.4 Qualitative Macrophyte Survey
Macrophytes (aquatic plants large enough to be seen without magnification) are important
indicators of lake trophic status. The most important indicator for EMAP-SW purposes is the
percentage of the lake area covered with macrophytes. For this form, check one of the four
percentage groupings for "emergent/floating" and for "submergent" coverage that best describes
the lake (0 to 25 percent, 25 to 50 percent, 50 to 75 percent, 75 to 100 percent). In some cases,
it will be fairly easy to estimate the percentage from observations made during sampling. In other
cases, it will be an educated guess, especially if the water is turbid. After recording the areal
9-5
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Final Lake Activities
June 1994
TABLE 9-2. GENERAL LAKE INFORMATION NOTED DURING LAKE ASSESSMENT
Hydrologic Lake Type
Note if there are any stream outlets from the lake, even if they are not flowing. If no lake
outlets were observed, record the lake as a seepage lake. If the lake was created by a dam
(not that a dam is present to just raise the water level), record the lake as a reservoir.
Otherwise record the lake as a drainage lake.
Dams
Note the presence of any dams for other flow control structures) on the lake outlet(s).
Differentiate between artificial (manmadel structures and natural structures (beaver dams!.
Flight Hazards
If there are any hazards (above tree level) that would interfere with low elevation aircraft flights
or landing on the lake, check 'Yes"; otherwise check 'No.' Examples would include radio
towers or power lines.
Motor Boats
Record your impression of the density of motor boat usage on this'lake (high or lowl. If there is
a restriction on the size of motor boat engines. check" Restricted." If motor boats are banned,
check "Banned." Try to take into account the day of the week and weather in your assessment
(i.e., consider number of boathouses. idle craftl. Count jet skis and any other motorized craft
that stir up the lake as motor boats.
Swimmability
Record a subjective impression about the aesthetics of swimming in this lake (swimmabilityl
along the range of good to not swimmable.
Lake Level
Examine the lake shoreline for any evidence of lake level changes (e.g., bathtub ring). If none.
check "zero"; otherwise try to estimate the extent of vertical change in lake level from present
conditions based on shoreline signs.
TABLE 9-3. SHORELINE CHARACTERISTICS OBSERVED DURING FINAL LAKE ASSESSMENT
Forest/Shrub
Deciduous, Coniferous. or Mixed forest, including shrub/sapling vegetation.
Agriculture
Cropland, orchard. feedlot. pastureland. or other horticultural activity.
Open Grass
Meadows. lawns, or other open vegetation.
Wetland
Forested and nonforested wetlands (submerged terrestrial vegetation).
Barren
Nonvegetated areas such as beaches, sandy areas, paved areas, and exposed rock.
Developed
Check off the percentage category of the immediate shoreline area that has been developed by
human activity; includes lawns. houses. stores, malls, marinas, golf courses, or any other
human built land use.
Shoreline Modifications
Check off the percentage category of the actual shoreline that has been modified by the
installation of rip-rap. revetments. piers. and other human modifications.
9-6
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Final Lake Activities
June 1994
percentage of macrophyte coverage, record the density of plants in the observed macrophyte beds
as either dense, moderate, or sparse. Finally, provide any qualitative description (genera present,
dominant type [floating, emergent, or submergent]) of the macrophyte beds that would be useful
for interpreting the trophic status of the lake. All activities described in this subsection are
recorded on the Lake Assessment Form Side 1 (Figure 9-2).
9.1.5 Environmental Values
The goal of EMAP-SW is to assess four major ecological values with respect to lakes:
trophic state, fishability, biotic integrity, and water body character. Based on your field experience,
record your own assessment of these values on the Lake Assessment Form, Side 2 (Figure 9-3).
Write comments on these values in this section. The key words on the left side of this section are
there to stimulate thought and are not comprehensive, nor do all of these have to be addressed. In
this section, we are looking for an assessment of these values based on the field visit.
Trophic State--defined as Rrate or amount of phytoplankton and macrophytes produced or
present in a lake. R List any observed potential nutrient sources to the lake (e.g., septic tanks,
agricultural runoff). Give your visual impression of trophic status as either oligotrophic (little or no
biomass in lake water), mesotrophic (intermediate amounts of biomass in lake water), eutrophic
(large amounts of biomass in lake water), or hypereutrophic (choked lake, more biomass than
water) .
Fishability--defined as Ra fish assemblage containing fish that are catchable, desirable, and
safe to consume by wildlife and humans. R Write down any observations about fishability derived
from impressions of fish habitat, conversations with locals, or the presence of fish and fishermen.
Biotic Integrity--defined as Rthe ability to support and maintain a balanced, integrated,
adaptive community with a biological diversity, composition, and functional organization
comparable to natural lakes of the region. R Record your overall impression of the RhealthR of the
biota in the lake. The presence of higher order consumers (fish eating birds and mammals) is an
indication of a healthy food web and could be noted here. Similarly, the lack of an organism that
you expected to see would be an important observation. Also, any input on possible causes of
impairment would be appropriate.
9-7
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Final Lake Activities
June 1994
LAKE ID: N.. .Y Q..1l. a. L LAUAUEUMENT'FORM'l..nInu8dl VIIIT: - fc:lrd8l: ~ Z
GUAUTAT1VE'AHESSMENTGF ENVIRCIII/MENTAL VALUES
TROPHIC STATE )( - 0- 0- 0-
VISUAL ASSESSMENT: r 1. ~ A R IJ ~.,.".~ AI" .'~UIIIII d~ £' VI ~"LI R.
~ ......
ALGAL ABUNDANCE. TYPE: I
IV I'J~';: I), ~
NUTRIENT STATUS: 1l,.,.~AI. '"' a~ k,c.J - N,. <'- .-. V~"211 Jj .iAIr.~-
~.~,
OTHER:
RSHA8IUTY: 1(--. 0- 0-,. 0-
CDIIIIII'T1ON8:
.
LOCAL CoNTACTS:
OISEllVATlOIIS: r:. "05'" ~dl1-- 11.,,. .<'~. ~-~. ~- Aa- .... ~ - ~Alr J:;rlJ,
OVERALL BIOTIC INTEGRITY W --. 0- . 0-.-
GENfJW. AIaESPIENT: J, -, II: Jlu_.~ ,a~ .. -
WI.DLFI 0_: .~ , .('.r. L1-UI.' ~"..C' - ,- -~. - II 1._11 "
. . J " "
WATOaODT CMIoIlACTEIIICIICI.E ~
PIasTM (ij 4 3 2 1 DIV8.DNII
API'£AI6G tr. 4 3 2 1 UNA~
COMMENTS:
BY IINIT\ALI:~
Rev. 6/94 (l8I
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Final Lake Activities
June 1994
Water Body Character--defined as nthe physical habitat integrity of the water body, largely a
function of riparian and littoral habitat structure, volume change, trash, turbidity, slicks, scums,
color, and odor. n EMAP-SW attempts to define water body character through two attributes--
degree of human development and aesthetics. Rate each of these attributes on a scale of 1 to 5.
For development, give the lake a n5n if it is pristine, with no signs of any human development. A
n 1 n would indicate a lake is totally developed, for example the entire lake is ringed with houses,
seawalls, docks, etc. For aesthetics (whether the lake is appealing or not) base the decision on any
factor about the lake that bothers you (trash, algal growth, weed abundance, overcrowding). Circle
the number that best describes your opinion about how suitable the lake water is for recreation and
aesthetic enjoyment today:
1. Enjoyment nearly impossible.
2. Level of enjoyment substantially reduced.
3. Enjoyment slightly impaired.
4. Very minor aesthetic problems; excellent for swimming, boating, enjoyment.
5. Beautiful, could not be any nicer.
Comments--Use this section to note any other pertinent information about the lake or its
catchment.
9.2 DATA FORMS AND SAMPLE INSPECTION
After the Lake Assessment Form is completed, one team member reviews all data forms
and sample labels for accuracy, completeness, and legibility. This team member also inspects all
sample containers and packages them in preparation for transport, storage, or shipment. The other
team members trailer the boat, pick up equipment and supplies for transport, and clean up the
launch site area as described in Section 9.3.
Check to ensure that all required data forms for the lake have been completed. It is
important to make sure that there is a Fish Tally Form completed for every piece of fishing gear
9-9
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Final Lake Activities
June 1994
used on the lake. Make sure the LAKE-ID is correct on all forms, as well as the date of the visit.
On each form, check to see that all information has been recorded accurately, that the recorded
information is legible, and that any flags are explained in the comments section. Check that written
comments are legible, with no "shorthand" or abbreviations used. As each form is reviewed, the
crew member should initial at the lower right corner of each page of the form.
Check to ensure that all samples are labeled, all labels are completely filled in, and each
label is covered (except for those in the fish jars) with clear plastic tape.
9.3 LAUNCH SITE CLEANUP
Load the boat on the trailer and inspect the boat, motor, and trailer for evidence of weeds
and other macrophytes. Clean the boat, motor, and trailer as completely as possible before leaving
the launch site. Inspect all nets for pieces of macrophyte or dead fish and remove as much material
as possible before packing the nets for transport. Pack all equipment and supplies in the vehicle
and trailer for transport, keeping them organized as presented in the equipment checklists
(Appendix A).
Clean up all waste material at the launch site and dispose of or transport it out of the site if
a trash can is not available. Dispose of fish carcasses as directed on the collecting permit or the
fish protocol.
9-10
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Final Lake Activities
June 1994
NOTES
9-11
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Final Lake Activities
June 1 994
NOTES
9-12
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Final Lake Activities
June 1994
NOTES
9-13
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Final Lake Activities
June 1994
NOTES
9-14
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Appendix A. Lake Visit Checklisu
June 1994
APPENDIX A
LAKE-VISIT CHECKLISTS
P8Q8
1. Items in Forms File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
2. Items in Boat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
3. Items in 80-qt Cooler #1 ............................................. A-4
4. Items in 80-qt Cooler #2 ............................................. A-4
5. Items in 80-qt Cooler #3 (Shipping Cooler) """""""""""""""'" A-4
6. Items in Cooler for Benthos Sampling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
7. Items in 48-qt Cooler #1 (Umnology Shipping) .............................. A-6
8. Items in 48-qt Cooler #2 (Fish Tissue Shipping) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
9. Items in 48-qt Cooler #3 ............................................. A-6
10. Items in Tub #1 [[[ A-7
11. Items in Tub #2 (Trap Net Accessories) ................................... A-8
12. Items in Tub #3 (Gill Net Accessories) .................................... A-8
13. Items in Tub #4 [[[ A-8
14. Items in Tub #5 [[[ A-8
15. Items in Tub #6 [[[ A-8
16. Items in Parts Tackle Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
17. D.O. Meter Kit in Soft Cooler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Appendix A. Lake Visit Checklists
June 1994
Number Needed
Items in Forms File Each Lake
lake information packet for lake to be sampled" includes: 1
Benthic Sample location and Collection Form 2
Phvsical Habitat Sketch Map Form 2
lake Verification Form 1
lake Profile Form 2
Sample Collection Form 2
lake Assessment Form 2
Phvsical Habitat Characterization Form 2
Physical Habitat Comments Form 3
Blank Map Forms IBenthic Verification and Sketch MaD) 5 each
Fish Tally Form 50
Fish Tallv Continuation Form 10
Fish lenath Form 10
Fish Tissue Trackina Form 2
Field notebook 1
Field Operations Manual 1
Taxonomic keys set 1
Sediment cores label sheet 1
ZooDlankton label sheet 1
Fish tissue label sheet 1
Water chemistry label sheet 1
ChlorODhyli label sheet 1
Voucher taa sheet 1 set
EMAP DamDhlets 20
SamDlina Dermit 1
Quick reference handbook 1
ShiDDina airbills 10
LAKE-VISIT CHECKLISTS
A-2
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Appendix A. Lake Visit Checklists
June 1994
Number Needed
S M T W T F S Items in the Boat Each Lake
Life vests 3
Anchor with 50-m line and 1
float
Bailing bucket 1
Air horn 1
. Oars, pair 1
First aid kit 1
Spare tire (trailer) 1
Trailer straps 2
Transom plug 1
Bow light with good batteries 1
Stern light with good 1
batteries
Bow line, 5-m 1
Fuel tank with gas and oil 1
PVC pipe, 3-m length 1
Indiana trap nets 1 per expected # of sets
Beach seine 1
Short-haul line 1
A-3
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Appendix A. Leke Visit Checklists
June 1994
Number Needed
Items in 80-qt Cooler #1 Each Lake
Sonar unit with manual 1
Transducer with bracket and C-clamp 1
12-V wet cell battery (charged) in battery 1
case
GPS unit with manual, reference card, extra 1
battery pack
Inflatable viewing box 1
Number Needed
Items in 80-qt Cooler #2 Each Lake
Corer with 50-m line and messenger 1
Core tubes 2
Ground rubber stoppers 4
Extruder pipe 1
Sectioning stage 1
Sectioning tube 1
Siphon with L fitting 1
Tupperware box with two 1-qt Ziplocs 1
Number Needed
Items in 80-qt Cooler #3 (Shipping Cooler) Each Lake
0.5-gal bottles or 1-gal bottles 4
Borate buffered formalin, 40 percent 1 gal
Bleach, 1 qt 1
Vermiculite (or other absorbent), 4 qts 1
Cooler liner (30-gal garbage bag) 1
1-qt Ziploc bags with punched holes 25
1-gal Ziplocs with punched holes 20
Butyl gloves 1 pair
Safety glasses 2 pair
A-4
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Appendix A. lake Visit Checklists
June 1994
Cooler for Benthic Sampling Number Needed
Each Lake
Sieve bucket 1
Plastic funnel 1
Rinse bottle, 500-mL 1
Screen top lid (60-mesh) for sample containers 1
Sample containers, 500-mL (marked at 400-mL) 10
Heavy-duty Zip lac bags, 1-gallon, labeled with station ID 10
Garbage bags, large kitchen size (for storing sample containers) 2
60-cc plastic syringe for dispensing formalin 1
Carbonate buffered formalin solution 500 mL
Surgical gloves 2
Large plastic tub 1
A-5
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Appendix A, Lake Visit Checklisu
June 1994 .
Number Needed
Items in 48-qt Cooler #1 (Umnology shipping) Each Lake
Tupperware container 1
Syringes, labeled 4
Syringe valves 4
Surgical gloves, pair 2
Cubitainer, 4-L 2
Ice in 1-gal Ziploc bags 6
Cooler liner (30-gal garbage bag) 1
Number Needed
Items in 48-qt Cooler #2 (Fish Tissue Shipping) Each Lake
Ice in 1-gal Ziploe bags 4
Cooler liner (30-gal garbage bag) 1
Foil, 25 yards 1
1-qt Ziploc bags 10
1-gal Ziploe bags 10
Composite bags (30-gal garbage bags) 4
Number Needed
Items in 48-qt Cooler #3 Each Lake
Ice in 1-gal Ziploc bags 4
Cooler liner (30-gal garbage bag) 1
A-6
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Appendix A. lake Visit Checklists
June 1994
Number Needed
Items in Tub #1 Each Lake
Van Dorn with 3-m line, messenger 1
1-L wash bonle (labeled) with distilled or deionized water (DI) 1
Secchi disk 1
Sounding chain, 50-m with quick-clip 1
2-L bonle of sucrose solution 1
Parts tackle box (see below) 1
Chlorophyll tackle box: 1
Filter apparatus with filter installed 1
Hand pump with tubing 1
Box of filters in Ziploc bag (WhatmCln GF/F). 1
Forceps in bag with filters 1
Graduated cylinders, 100-mL and 250-mL 1 ea.
1 O-cm squares of foil in Ziploc bag 3
Zooplankton net bag: 1
Bongo net 1
Fine mesh and coarse-mesh buckets 1 ea.
Sample jars, 125-mL Nalgene (with formalin/sucrose solution) 2
Narcotization chamber 1
Alka Seltzer tablets 10
125-mL brown bonle with borate-buffered formalin, 40% 1
125-mL brown bonle with sucrose solution 1
60-mL syringe for dispensing formalin and sucrose solutions 1
Empty 1 25-mL Nalgene bonles 2
A-7
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Appendix A. Leke Visit Checklists
June 1994
Number Needed
Items in Tub #2 (Trap Net Accessories) Each lake
Anchors with 0.5-m line and quick-clips 3 per each net
used
Floats with 1.5-m line and quick-clips 3 per each net
used
Floats with 4-m line and quick-clips 5
Net repair twine, roll 1
Number Needed
Items in Tub #3 (Gill Net Accessories) Each Lake
Anchors with 0.5-m line and quick-clips or mesh bags to make 2 per net
anchors
Floats with 1.5-m line and quick-clips 3 per bottom set
. a per surface net
Line sections of 5-m (clips on both ends) 10
Line sections of 10-m (clips on both ends) 10
Line sections of 30-m (clips on both ends) 10
Number Needed
Items in Tub #4 Each lake
Minnow traps with clips 6
Floats with 1 .5-m line and quick-clips 6
5-9al buckets 2
Items in Tub #5 Number Needed
Each lake
Livenets. with floats 2
Dip nets 2
Waders 2 Dair
Headlamps with aood batteries (size C) 3
Q-beam with piatail adaPter 1
12-V wet cell battery (charaed) in battery case 1
Number Needed
Items in Tub #6 Each Lake
Swedish experimental aill nets 1 per # of sets
Fish measuring board 1
A-a
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Appendix A. Lake Visit Checklists
June 1 994
Number Needed
6
A-9
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Appendix A. Lake Visit Checklists
June 1994
D.O. Meter Kit in Soft Cooler Number Needed
Each Lake
Meter and manual 1
Cable and probe 1
Membrane kit and filling solution 1
Extra O-rings 1
Calibration chamber 1
Storage bottle 1
Number Needed
Items in Trucks Each Truck
Spare tire 1
Jack 1
Lug wrench 1
Shovel 1
Saw 1
Axe 1
Come-along 1
Camping gear, set 1
Food supply 1
Drinking water supply 1
Tool kit 1
Tow strap or heavy rope 1
Battery charger 1
Jumper cables 1
A-10
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Appendix A. lake Visit Checklists
June 1994
Information ManaGement Items Number
Portable comDuter 1
Phone cord 1
Power sUDDlv 1
Power cord 1
Extra comDuter battery 1
ComDuter carrvina case 1
Surae Drotector 1
Kodak Drinter 1
Printer Dower sUDDlv 1
Printer carrvina case 1
ComDuter/Drinter connection cable 1
Printer cartridae 1
Bar code reader 1
Bar code Dower sUDDlv 1
Extension cord 1
Plua adaDtor 3 to 2 2
Filament taDe 4
Box sealina taDe 2
Boxes of 3 1/2 disks (1 0 each) 2
Packs of taDe Dads 10
Purple file containing sample labels and bar 1
codes
PurDie file containina blank labels 1
Manila file containing supply replenishment 1
forms
Brown file containina weeklv reDort forms 1
Large envelope containing all weather writing 1
DaDer
EmDtv folders 2
Folder containing shipping and tracking paper 1
backuD
ComDuter and Drinter manual 1
User's Guide 1
EnveloDe containina Fed Ex airbills 1
A-11
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Appendix A. Lake Visit Checklists
June 1994
NOTES
A-13
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Appendix A. Lake Visit Checklists
June 1994
NOTES
A-14
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Appendix A. Lake Visit Checklists
June 1994
NOTES
A-15
-------
INTERNAL REPORT
Appendix A. Lake Visit Checklists
June 1994
NOTES
A-16
-------
Appendix B
June 1 994
APPENDIX B
FIELD DATA FORMS
Field data forms are presented in the general order of their use at each lake:
1.
2.
3.
Lake Verification Form
Lake Profile Form
4.
5.
6.
Physical Habitat Characterization Form
Physical Habitat Characterization Comments Form
Physical Habitat Sketch Map Form
Fish Tally Form
7.
8.
9.
Fish Tally Continuation Form
Fish Length Form
Fish Tissue Sample Tracking Form
Sample Collection Form
Benthos Sample Location and Collection Form
10.
11.
12.
Lake Assessment Form
-------
. .
:/:!:',:::::i:::.':::;i.;:i.;';.::'.::::::::'::..:::::.::::'::::i!:::t!'::.:::::.:::!::::::,::;.:.),.:':;'::.::;i,:::':i::'::::'::::::::;:::DI,:::::'::!j:LAk~"vEFdFICATION:;::FORM:::::':).:::..,::.'.\
LAKE NAME:
DATE OF VISIT:
I
I
VISIT#:
1
2
L
-----
MODE OF ACCESS:
VEHICU
HIKE-R
AIRCRAFT
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
OTHER:
...
..
. . .
. . . .
. .... . ....
. ...... .. .. ..
... . .. ... n. on ... .
:: :MA"K":SriE::::': l5illi:~\:JNat,::::'X::,~ INDEX ':::
. ... ". ..
. . . .
. .
\'ARRO~:tNDiCAm':~:~C)frrH:::;:::: :. , .
... .
. .
.. n., . ........
. ....... .....
----.,.,."""""'"
................ ...-
.... ..........--
. .
..... ..
..
..
..... ..
. ..
.. ..
. ...
. .
... .
. .
......
. ...
. .--.
. ,-.
. ...
.. . . .. ....
.... .. .....
:t:.AKE::VERIFICATIONiNFORMATlON+:::
LAKE SHAPE COMPARES TO MAP?
DYES
o GPS
o NO
LAKE VERIFIED BY 1,1 all that apply) :
o LOCAL CONTACT
o SIGNS
o ROADS
o ToPO. MAP
o Other IDe8cribe Here):
o NOT VERIFIED IExplain in Comment8)
COORDINATES
LATITUDE Idd mm 88)
Nonh
LONGITUDE Iddd mm 88)
We8t
TYPE OF GPS
FIX
SIGNAL
QUAUTY
GEOMETRIC
QUAUTY
Are GPS Coordinata8
wli :t 1 min. of map?
Map:
o
-- -- --
o
--- -- --
Launch Site:
o
-- -- --
o
--- -- --
a 2D a 3D
a 2D e 3D
eYES
eYES
eNO
eNO
Index Site:
o
-- -- --
o
--- -- --
LAKE
SAMPLED?
REASON NOT SAMPLED IEXPLAIN BELOW):
o NOT VISITED
o NON.TARGET
o INACCESSIBLE
o OTHER
Explanation:
CHECK HSIE F
EXPlANATION IS
CONTINUED ON BACK.
ES
aNO
o
DIRECTIONS. AND COMMENTS ON BAC
REVIEWED BY (INITIAL):
Rev. 6/94 lIakeverl.941
Lake Verification Form 1
-------
I:CAKE:I~':,::,: ",," '" ::;ij;;,,;:;:'j,,';: :,::~':YBuR(:A116N:FORM:'t~~;d),:::x
;:::,\:)',::,\ ',', ',:,' "::::::,. i',,' ."",:,,:::,","",' on1EcnoNS:io':jiAKE::.iLAUNCH:StrE<::
VISIT' (cirde): 1
2
,":,',.,:", '
.-
-
. n.' .......... ."" .
....,,", . ....," ...... ".. n. . n.... . .. .
...... .. ..',""".. .... ..",.. ...... ....
tAUNcHSttE:DESCRJPTlON\,
"",,:::,':\{»' ,/) , '., ,'.':':'
"':' ,H/:;:"""", ","" ,/"",' ",""::"
"(,,,,:':'< ,:,"/:"""
,GENERAL COMMENTS
'""",:,,,.,,,,,,:..,,'.',,.,,,, "'",,,'.,: ',:' ",':'" ':'"
",'}' ." --
-
,",':,: "::' ,':"":",H,, '" f ' 'f"" 'd to':::::,> ,:c: " ,"",
", . ... '," '. . ,'". '," " ,.. .
': :,.,' H ) EXPLANATION ,FORNOTSAMPLlNGTHEtAKE(continued rom:', ront'sl e",:" ":","',,,,'/"-:""'::--'
REVIEWED BY (INITIAL):
-
Rev. 6/94 (lakeverl.94)
Lake Verification Form 2
-------
LAKE PROFILE FORM
LAKE NAME:
~EID: L
M ID (circle): 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
PRECIPITATION (circle): NONE LIGHT HEAVY
SURFACE CONDITIONS (circle): FLAT RIpPLES CHOPPY
DATE OF PROFILE:
I
I
VISIT:
1
2
SITE ID (circle): INDEX
OTHER:
10
OTHER:
WHITECAPS
ODOR?
C No
eYES
Description:
SCUM?
C No
eYES
Description:
INDEX SITE DEPTH:
FLAG: I COMMENTS:
M
CHECK (.') IF SONAR NOT USED: 0
. .
" . '... '.. ',.. .'.,..,. . ..',.'..'.','.. ..,.. . ',..
... . "" ... .... . "." . ........ . .... -....... .... .".
. ..... "'''''''''' .... . .." ........ ... ...,...... .. .. .. ."..
.~~~~~~~;~-
... .
"."',',' ",',', ',".",
......TEMP."... . ".....
0" . '"
. ....
"', ',",",',
:<:?:.., ..' ....::~';}
."'.....:.~~......'"
..
,". .
...'TEM. ...
':.., p~
JOCI .....,'
. xx;.x . . .'
............ .
....... ..
,IIErA;': ,
: . "' ,":..'.:: :~:.:..-oN'
FLAG 'IT"'"
,". ...
RAG..,
",.."xx~x. ,
.",.9j, ,
'.... .....'
::,(fbOtQ .
.. "xx;.x. ,..'
"
. ............, ..
. ..... ......... .....-
.. . . .. . .. .......-.
. .. . .... . . .
DEPTH(mJ:::
xx'.x'
".,............02.(,.........
"(irig~h
xx~x"<
..
.,
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. ..... ....
'. ... ..
iilErA!\.",
~~~f
'....'."
. . . . . . . . .. . . "" .
... ... .... .........
. ..,.. ... .... .
'0" "..... ...........
:b~ltf(m[,
SURFACE
. ..
I SURFACE IDup.' I
Is THE DUPLICATE O2 READING WITHIN: 0.5 MG/L OF THE INITIAL SURFACE READING?
C YES
C No
CHECK HERE IF ADDITIONAL PROFILE MEASUREMENTS ARE RECORDED ON THE REVERSE SIDE:
If the site depth IS :S 3 m, take readings at the surface, every 0.5 m, and 1 m above trle-bottom.
b METALIMNION = defined 85 the region of the profile where the temperature changes 81 a rate of 1 °C or greater per meter of depth.
Indicate the depth of the top of the metalimnlon with a "T", and the bottom of the metalimnlon (when the rate of change becomes
less than 1 DC per meter) with a "8". Once metallmnion is encountered, take readings every 1 meter until bottom of the metalimnlon
.. eached. Record the depth of the top of the metalimnion on the Benthos Sample Location and Collection Form.
CODES: K= NO MEASUREMENT OR OBSERVAll0N MADE; U= SUSPECT MEASUREMENT OR OBSERVAll0N; Q= UNACCEPTABLE QC CHECK ASSOCIATED WITH
MEASUREMENT; F1. F2. ETC. = MISCB.LANEOUS FLAGa ASSIGNED BY EACH FIB.D CREW. EXPlAIN All FLAGS IN COMMENTS SECTION ON BACK OF FORM.
REVIEWED BY (INITIAL):-
Rev. 6/94 (profile1.94)
Lake Profile Form- 1
-------
KE ID:
L
LAKE PROFILE FORM (continued)
VISIT #:
1
2
MEMBRANE CHECK 0
ELECTRONIC ZERO 0
RED LINE: 0
SALINITY KNOB AT "O-FRESH"
OXYGEN METER CALIBRATION INFORMATION
CALIBRATION CHAMBER TEMPERATURE:
°C
SATURATED O2 @ TEMP.:
MG/l
LAKE ELEVATION
(FROM Topo. MAP OR ALTIMETER):
ELEVATION CORRECTION FACTOR:
x
FT
The calibration value i. obtained by multiplying the
.aturated O2 concentration time. an elevation correction
factor (both value. are obtained from table. pre.ent on the
back of the meter, or that are provided in the
manufacturer'. operations manuan. Adjust the meter
reading to the calibration value.
CALIBRATION VALUE:
FLAG
MG/l
.. COMMENTS
. n..
. . .... . .
'P"" ..... n' . . . ". .... .. "'..'" .
.16 M;CoNnNuERECOADINGAT 6M INTERVAls)
.
. .
DEPT~(m)
... XX;X
..02 .
(ntglL)
XX;X
H.
TEMP>
.. .(OCI
.xx;x..
.>:.::.'.
. ......<:
FLAG
.. ...
.&1ETA~:,....... ...............
lI~~~~~. :::D~~~(~~:.
...Ojk.. .....
~mgl1:r f. .....xxCOC..xl. .) ...........F:.LA.".... .G....'..
. "'XX..X..::.. ..<.
\.
META-
LIMNION
.rr ;aj!'
I DEPTH & II COMMENTS I
FLAG
REVIEWED BY (INITIAL):
Rev. 6/94 (profilel.941
Lake Profile Form- 2
-------
PHYSICAL HABITAT CHARACTERIZATION FORM-LAKES
LAKE NAME:
DATE OF VISIT:
I
I
VISIT #:
1
2
KE 10:
L
TEAM ID (circle):
1
2
3
.
&
8
7
8
9
10
OTHER: -
.: ::.. .:....... ....... .~&TAT1ONID{If,,"d8d): .
.. .:;:. .....: ...::::~;R,pAJ1iA~+~j)T> ........... &TATlONiD:.. A
.
c
I)
£
r:
Q
H
I
J
VEGETATION TYP£
N-NOIIE. D- 1I£C1D.. C-COMF.. II-.XIII
CANOPY lA VIR I> 5 II ,
UNDERSTORY 10.5 TO 5 II'
. .. .
ARfAL.COVERAG£:.CATEG0RJE8:0...ABSENT'.:. .,.iSPARSE:t<.10%P.2;,; MODERA.TEI10.TO 40%" 3... .HE-'VY. 140 TO 75%)
4-VERYHfAVY I> 75%)
CAJIOPY' lAYBI
I> 5. HBaIn1
TREES ~ 0.3 II DBH
TREES < 0.3 II DBH
~I~
(tBmrr-O.5 tV 5 II.!
WOODY SHRUBS . SAPL1NG8
TAU HEII88. FORI8. . GRAS8E8
WOODY SHRUBS. SEEDUNGS
~covm
1< 0.5 . --..1
HERBS. FORBS. . GRASSES
STANDING WATER OR INUNDATED VEGETATION
BARR£N OR BUl.DINGS
B£DROCIt I> 4000 ..; IIiaaEJI '"All A cAllI
BOULDERS 12110 - 4000 ..; 8MU1UU. . CAlI -I
I
SU8S11IA'M
TYPE WI118I
SHORB8E
PLOT
C088lE/GRA va 12 - 2110 ..; UID'I8UG - 8MU1UU. IIZII
LOOSE SAND 10.08 TO 2 ..; CIIITTY IETWEEII -I
OTHER FINE SOI.JSEDIMENT 1< 0.06 1111; NOT GIITTYI
VEGETATED
OTHER Ie-- III COII_TII
ANGLE: V ... NEAll VEmcMlUllDEIICUT. S... 30.75° . G... <30°
BANK
FE-' TURES
(WITHIN I'LOT'
VERTICAL LAKE leva DIFFERENCE III'
HUMAN ::INFlUENCE
DISTANCE FROII WATERUIIE TO HIGH-WATER MARK III'
.... o;a;.A8S£NT.:... ..: CHECK .(I'r.~.. PRESENT WiTHiN PLOT
B=OBSERVED AOJACENTTO OR BEHIND PlOT
BUILDINGS
COMMERCIAL
PARK FACIUT1ES
DOCKSlBoATS
WALLS. DIKES. OR REVETMENTS
Lma. TRASH DUIIP. OIlLANDFU
ROADS OR RALROAD
Row CRoPS
PASTURE OR HAYFIEiD
ORCHARD
LAWN
OTHER IExPlAIN IN COMMENTS'
REVIEWED BY (INITIAL): -
Rev. 6/94 Ipheb1.94)
Physical Habitat Charactarlzatlon Form. ,
-------
LAKE ID: L PHYSICAL HABITAT CHARACTERIZATION FORM lcontinued) VISIT': 1 2
NEW STATION ID (It needed):
LITTORAL PlOT STATIONID: A B C D E F G H I J
STATION DEPTH AT 10 M OFFSHORE (M) -
SURFACE FILM TYPE IS= SCUM. A.. ALGAL MAT. p.. Ou. N=NONEIoTHER)
BOTTOM SUBSTRATE: AR£Al.C~OiioAuen-1-SPARSE«10%.2..MODERATt{10T040"J3,""HEAVV 140 TO 76%14"VERYHEAVV (>~I
BEDROCK 1>4000 MM; LAAGER THAN A CARl
BOUlDERS 1250 . 4000 MM; IlASKET8ALL . CAR SlZEI
COBBLE 164 . 250 MM; TENMS IALL . BASKETBALL slZEl
GRAVB.12 TO 64 MM; LADYBUG TO TENNIS BALL SlZEI
SAND (0.06 TO 2 MM; GIUTTY BETWEEH FINGERSI
su. CLAY. OR MUCK « 0.06 MM; NOT GIUTTYI
WOODY DEBRIS
COLOR IBL - BLACK. GY - GRAY. BR - BROWN. RD.. RED. N - NOllIE OR OTHER)
ODOR IS-HzS. A-ANOXIC. p..O... C-CHEMICAL. N-NoNE OR OTHERI
. .:..... .. .,.... .. . . .:: :::. . ...... .. . .
MACAOPHYTESAREALCOVEMGE:dO..AasEilr 1.. SPARSE {< 1 O%1::2...i~OOEAATE:t1 OTO 40%)3 ~HI:AW{40 TO 75%14- V&ttHI!AVv{>76%1. .
SUBMERGENT
EMERGENT
FLOATWG
TOTAL WEED COVER
Do MACROPHYTES EXnND LAKEWARD?IY OR NI?
. :..... ...... .
. FISH COVER.:. .'O-AUBIT. 1-PflEssrtIUt SPARSE': 2= PREaEN'rIlllMODERATETO VERY HEAV'tDENSITY
AQUATIC WEEDS
SNAGS > 0.3 M DIAMETER
BRUSH OR WOODY DEBRIS < 0.3 M DIAMETER
INUNDATED livE TREES > 0.3 M DIAMETER
OVERHANGING VEGETATION < 1 M ABOVE SURFACE
ROCK LEDGES OR SHARP DROPOFFS
BOULDERS
HUMAN STRUCTURES (E.G., DOCKS, lANDINGS, PILINGS, RIPRAP, ETC.)
. .. ,. ....'.;e"\. .. .... unORAL MICAOHABITATCLASSIFICA TlON
.. . :.. d. ...... .:.
DIS1\JABANCE REGIME (H - HUMAN N - NATURAL M = MIXEDI
COVER CLAss IC=CoVER. O=OPEN. M=MIXEDI
COVER TYPE IN -NONE A-AIITPtClAL F -Flu B-l0ULDU8 V-VEa. W-Woan M -MIXED)
SUBSTAA TE 1M = M,""/MUCK. S - SAllD/GuVEL. C = eoMwBoUlDfIl, B = BmllOcKI
GEAR IG =Glu lET. T=TIW' lET. S=SoIE. 0= No_)
GEAR LOCATION (DIST. & DII. TO NEAREST AEPAES. HABITAT) F1. F2. ETC. ~ Mme. RAGS .....18
FLAG CODES: K- MEASUREMENT OR OBSERVATION NOT 08TAINED; U- SUSPECT MEASUREMENT OR OBSERVATION;
EACH FIB.D CREW. ExPLAIN ALL FLAGS ON SEPARATE COMMENTS FOAM.
REVIEWED BY (INITIAL): -
Rev. 6/94 Iphab1.94)
Physical Habitat Characterization Form. 2
-------
PHYSICAL HABITAT CHARACTERIZATION COMMENT FORM Page of
LAKE ID: L VISIT #: 1 2
EAM ID (circle): 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 OTHER:
TA 110N MEASUREMENT OR
10 .SEC1JON ... VARIABLE FLAG COMMENT OR FLAG ExPtANA TION
It
FLAG CODES:
IUREMENT;
K = NO MEASUREMENT OR OBSERVA T10N A TTEIIPTED; U = SUSPECT MEASUREMENT OR OBSERVA T10N; a = UNACCEPTABLE QC CHECK ASSOCIATED WITH
F1, F2, ETC. = MISC. FLAGS ASSIGNED BVEACH FIB.D CREW. ExPLAIN ALL FLAGS ON SEPARATE COMMENTS FORM.
CHECK HERE IF INFORMATION IS RECORDED ON OTHER SIDE OF FORM
REVIEWED BY (INITIAL):-
Rev. 6/94 (phaba1.941
Physical Habitat Characterization Comment. Form. 1
-------
LAKEID: L PHVSICAL HABITAT CHARACTERIZATION VISIT II: 1 2
-----
COMMENTS FORM Icontlnued)
STATION SECTION MEASUREMENT OR
ID VARIABU FLAG COMMENT OR FLAG ExPLANATION
CHECK HERE IF AN ADDITIONAL COMMENTS FORM IS US
FLAG CODES: K= NO MEASUREMENT OR OBSERVAT10N ATTEMPTED; U = SUSPECT MEASUREMENT OR OBSERVAT1ON; Q= UNACCEPTABLJ: ac CHECK ASSOCIA
MEASUREMENT; F1, F2, ETC. = MISC. F1.AGS ASSIGNED BY EACH FIElD CREW. ExPtAIN All FLAGS ON SEPARATE COMMENTS FORM.
REviEWED Bv (INITIAL): -
Rev. 6/94 (phebe' .94)
Physical H.bit.t Ch.r.cteriZ8tion Comments Form. 2
-------
PHYSICAL HABITAT SKETCH MAP FORM-LAKES
L
START TIME: - - : --
VISIT #:
END TIME:
1
2
LAKE NAME:
----
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
OTHER:
Sketch end label riparian. in-lake. shoreline. and littoral fish habita.. around the leke. ueing codes below. To identify littoral fISh habita.. on the
map. compose a four-character code as: IDiaturbance}ICover clas'IICover typellSubstrate type}. EXAMPLE: NCVS for Natural. Cover.
Vegetation. Sand/gravel.
RIPARIAN AND ..-lAKE CODES: WET = wetland; BCH = beach; RSD = ra.idence.; PRK = park; FST = fore.t; AL T = altered .horeline;
CK = dockl.}; MNA = marina; CRP = cropland; PTR = pa.ture; LFL = landfill/dump; IND = industry; MNG = mining; LGG = logging;
=floating macrophyte.; SBM=.ubmerged macrophytes; EMM= emergent macrophytes; SHL=shoal or rock..
ORAL RSH HABITAT CODES: IDISTURBANCE}: Human. Natural. Mixed. ICOVER CLASS}: Cover. Open. Mixed. ICOVER TYPE}: None. Boulder.
Artificial.tructure. Fill. Vegetated. Woody. Mixed. ISUBSTRATE TYPE}: Mud/muck. Sand/gravel. Cobblelbouldere. Bedrock.
MAP REVIEWED BY (lNITlAL):-
Rev. 6/94 ISketmap1.94}
Physical Habitat Sketch Map Form. 1
-------
LAKE ID: L PHYSICAL HABITAT SKETCH MAP FORM Icontinuedl VISIT II: 1 2
USE THIS MAP TO LOCATEUTTORAL MACRO HABITAT TYPES AND FISH SAMPLING SITES
RECORD FISH SAMPLING STATIONS AND GEAR TYPE IG=GU NET. T=TRAP NET, M=MINNOW TRAP, B=BEACH SEINE, S=SHORT SEINE. EXAMPLE:
F1G. F2T. ETc.l. IF A SITE IS SB.ECTED FOR ADOIT1ONAL STANDARD PROTOCOL OR JUDGEMENT
SAMPUNG ADD AN .X. OR .J. TO THE STATION AND QEAR TYPE CODES. EXAMPLE: F10GX. F4BJ. ETC.
MACROHABITATCLASSIFICATIONANDEXTENT .SUMMARY
MACROHAB.
CLASS IXXXX' % EXTENTls' AND TOTAL STATIONS COMMENTS
= %
= %
= %
= %
= % ~
= %
= 100% REVIEWED BY (INITIAL):
Rev. 6/94 Isketm8p1.94'
PhY8lcal Habitat Sketch Map Form. 2
-------
FISH TALLY FORM-LAKES
Page
VISIT:
1
of
2
LAKE NAME:
L
TEAM ID (circlet:
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 OTHER:
REST P.HAB STATION IA . J. XI:
DIST. & DIR. FROM STATION:
SITEID: F
START CREW INITIALS:
. SAMPLING EFFORT INFORMATION.
END CREW INITIALS:
START DATE:
START TIME:
--'--'--
END DATE:
END TIME:
--'--'--
--
----
. . ... ..
LITTORAL. HABITAT.CLASSIFICATION..
MACROHAB. CLASS IFROM SKETCH MAP FORMI:
MICROHAB. ClASS IFOR FISHING SlTEI:
..
p.
. " ..' . .. . ," ....
.. .. . .. . '" . . ....
~:'::;i:'PELAGrC';'HA~I:T AT':'CLASSlflcATION~:;cird.
-------
LAKEID: L ASH TALLY FORM (continued) SITE ID: F VISIT II: 1 2
Common Name: SPECIES CODE: FLAG:
Adult Juvenile YOY
TOTAL MUSEUM II MEASURED TOTAL MUSEUM II MEASURED TOTAL MUSEUM II MEASU
FOR lENGTH: FOR lENGTH: FOR LENG'04:
Common Name: SPECIES CODE: FLAG:
Adult Juvenile YOY
TOTAL MUSEUM II MEASURED TOTAL MUSEUM II MEASURED TOTAL MUSEUM II MEASURED
FOR lENGTH: FOR lENGTH: FOR LENG'04:
Common Name: ' SPECIES CODE: FLAG:
Adult Juvenile YOY
TOTAL MUSEUM II MEASURED TOTAL MUSEUM II MEASURED TOTAL MUSEUM ! II MEASURED
FOR lENGTH: FOR lENGTH: FOR lENG'04:
IF> 5 SPECIES ARE COLLECTED. CHECK HERE AND USE A TALLY CONTINUATION FORM-
. FLAG
SPECIESCOOE
.ANOMALyr .
STOCKING CODE
#OF
. FISH.
IS THERE EVIDENCE OF STOCKING (circle)?
YES
NO
SPECIES CODE.
.A.N......A1.V/"
. . .."." .: WJwuIUi,..~,.:..
. . StOCKING CODE
.#OF>
FISH
FLAG
AN MAL Y T KIN DE: D - Deformities E - Eroded fins L = Lesions or ulcers T - Tumors X = Multiple
D.E.L.T anomalies F= Fungus B = Blind in one or both eyes K = Emaciated P = Heavy Infestation of External
parasites M = Excessive mucus Z = Other (explain in comments) S = Stocking.
.. .. .. ...
FLAG.. I::... COMMENTS
FLAG CODES: K=No MEASUREMENT OR OBSERVATION MADE; U= SUSPECT MEASUREMENT OR OBSERVATION; F1. F2. ETC. = MIsc. FLAGS ASSIGNED Bv1
CREW. EXP\AIN ALL FLAGS IN COMMENTS SECTION. ATTACH SEPARATE COMMENTS SHEET IF NECESSARY.
REVIEWED BY (INITIAL):-
Rev.6/94 (ftally1.94)
Fi.h Tally Form- Lake.. 2
-------
LAKE ID:
FISH TALLY CONTINUATION FORM-LAKES
L
1
2
SITE ID:
F
Page
VISIT #:
of
liD IBarcodel: TAG ID:
ommon Name: SPECIES CODE: FLAG:
Adult Juvenile YOY
TOTAL MUSEUM , MEASURED TOTAL MUSEUM , MEASURED TOTAL MUSEUM ' MEASURED
FOR lENGTH: FOR lENGTH: FOR lENGTH:
Common Name: SPECIES CODE: FLAG:
Adult Juvenile YOY
TOTAL MUSEUM , MEASURED TOTAL MUSEUM , MEASURED TOTAL MUSEUM ' MEASURED
FOR lENGTH: FOR lENGTH: FOR lENGTH:
Common Name: SPECIES CODE: FLAG:
Adult Juvenile YOY
TOTAL MUSEUM , MEASURED TOTAL MUSEUM , MEASURED TOTAL MUSEUM ' MEASURED
FOR lENGTH: FOR lENGTH: FOR lENGTH:
mmon Name: SPECIES CODE: FLAG:
Adult Juvenile YOY
TOTAL MUSEUM , MEASURED TOTAL MUSEUM , MEASURED TOTAL MUSEUM ' MEASURED
FOR lENGTH: FOR lENGTH: FOR lENGTH:
Common Name: SPECIES CODE: FLAG:
Adult Juvenile YOY
TOTAL MUSEUM , MEASURED TOTAL MUSEUM , MEASURED TOTAL MUSEUM ' MEASURED
FOR lENGTH: FOR lENGTH: FOR lENGTH:
CHECK HERE IF INFORMATION IS RECORDED ON OTHER SIDE OF FORM:
REVIEWED BY (INITIAL):-
Rev. 6/94 (ftallya1.94)
Fish Tally Continuation F.orm . 1
-------
LAKEID: L FISH TALLY CONTINUATION FORM (continued I SITE ID: F VISIT II: 1 2
Common Name: SPECIES CODE: FLAG:
Adult Juvenile YOY
TOTAL MUSEUM II Mi:ASURED TOTAL MUSEUM II MEASURED TOTAL MUSEUM II MEASU
FOR lENGTH: FOR lENGTH: FOR lENGTH:
Common Name: SPECIES CODE: FLAG:
Adult Juvenile YOY
TOTAL MUSEUM II MEASURED TOTAL MUSEUM II MEASURED TOTAL MUSEUM II MEASURED
FOR lENGTH: FOR lENGTH: FOR lENGTH:
Common Name: SPECIES CODE: FLAG:
Adult Juvenile YOY
TOTAL MUSEUM II MEASURED TOTAL MUSEUM II MEASURED TOTAL MUSEUM II MEASURED
FOR lENGTH: FOR lENGTH: FOR lENGTH:
CHECK HERE IF AN ADDITIONAL CONTINUATION FORM IS REQUIRED:-
SPECiES CODE<.
. ...ANOM~YI .
...StOCKINGCODE! .
if OF .
FISH .FLAo)
.. .. ... .
u.. .. .
... .. .
... . .. .
:SPEetESCODE .
..ANOMALY'..
.StOCKINOCOOE
#OF
FISH.
ANOMALY 1ST KIN DE: D - Deformities E - roded fins L - esions or ulcers T - Tumors X - Multiple
D,E,L,T anomalies F= Fungus B = Blind in one or both eyes K = Emaciated P = Heavy Infestation of External
parasites M = Excessive mucus Z = Other (explain in comments) S = Stocking.
FLAG
... .
COMMENTS ..
FLAG CODES: K-NO MEASUREMENT OR OBSERVATION MADE' U- SUSPECT MEASUREMENT OR OBSERVATION; Q~ UNACCEPTABLE
ac CHECK ASSOCIATED WITH MEASUREMENT; F1. F2. ETC. = MISC. FlAGS ASSIGNED BY EACH FIELD CREW. EXPLAIN ALL FlAGS IN
COMMENTS SECTION.
REVIEWED BY (INITIAL):
Rev. 6/94 Iftallyal.94)
Fi.h Tally Continuation Form - 2
-------
FISH LENGTH FORM-lAKES
LAKE NAME:
t LAKE ID:
L
TEAM ID (circle): 1 2
3
4
5
PAGE 01
VISIT #: 1 2
7 8 9 10 OTHER:
-
6
""
'.
. ..
.'. "'" ...
..... du.. -......
:$ITf:ID.. "SPECIESCODE:::'::":::C~~PJJONNAME::
..
..
-- ..
:TOTAL::AGE'O
LENOTH'ClASS U
"",:tmm' fA. J/VtT
(..It:
F.
L: :
'A."': ..
0"
COMMENTS
..
..
..
...
..
..
...
.
CHECK HERE IF ADDITIONAL DATA ARE RE(ORDED ON REVER
-slDE:
FLAG CODES: K= NO MEASUREMENT COLLECTED; U= SUSPECT MEASUREMENT; F1. F2, ETC. = MISC. FLAGS ASSIGNED BY
FIELD CREW. EXPLAIN ALL FLAGS IN COMMENTS SECTION.
REVIEWED BY (INITIAL):
Rev. 6/94 (fishlen1.941
Fi.h length Form - lake. - 1
-------
LAKE ID: L fiSH LENGTH fORM (continued) VISIT#: 1 2
TOTAL AGE 0 F
. LENGTH CLASS U L
Imml IA.J. VI T A
SITE ID SPECIES CODE. COMMON NAME fJI G COMMENTS
CHECK HERE IF AN ADDITIONAL FISH LENGTH FORM IS USED FOR THIS LAKE:
flAG CODES: K = NO MEASUREMENT COLLECTED; U = SUSPECT MEASUREMENT; F1. F2, ETC. = MISC. FLAGS ASSIGNED BY
FIELD CREW. EXPLAIN AU FLAGS IN COMMENTS SECTION.
REVIEWED BV (INITIAL):
Rev. 6/94 (fishlen1.94)
FISh Length Form. lake. . 2
-------
RSH TISSUE SAMPLE TRACKING FORM-LAKES
LAKE NAME: DATE PREPARED: I I VISIT #: 1 2
KE ID: L TEAM ID (circle): 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 OTHER:
I: .. ....' ",_. .. , TOTAL
... " . LENGTH" WEIGHT SAMPLE ID
... ". . . .
.'SPECIES'CODE: ... .. (KG.
.. . 'COMMON NAME" .., 'IMM) FLAG (BARCODE)
1
2
.3/:
:,4,,:
:5
"6
"7:
8
::9>::
.10>
.:.'."".
':,":'1,:::0
...,,,,,'..0
.'12
...
'., .13< .
4
15
16
17'.
I.:
18
19
20
# OF STATIONS FROM WHICH RSH TISSUE CANDIDATE SPECIMENS WERE COLLECTED:
-
TOTAL # OF STATIONS SAMPLED:
..' '''is? .... . . "...TY:" .. "..'.:"..'
.. .... . .. ...
LlN£# FLAG .. .,....".,.../. ,,:'y..' COMMENT 'OR FLAG EXPLANATION
CHECK HERE IF MORE DATA ARE REcORDED ON OTHER SIDE:
.G CODES: K= NO SAMPLE COLLECTED; U= SUSPECT SAMPLE; F1. F2, ETC. = MISC. FLAGS ASSIGNED BY R£LD CREW.
"LAIN ALL FLAGS IN COMMENTS SECTION.
REVIEWED BY (INITIAL):
Rev.6/94 (ftissue1.94)
FIsh TIS.ue Sample Tracking Form- Lake. - 1
-------
LAKE ID: L FISH TISSUE SAMPLE DATE PREPARED: I I
-----
TRACKING FORM Icontinuedl VISIT II: 1 2
TOTAL WEIGHT SAMPLE ID
LENGTH
SPECIES CODE .: COMMON NAME .IMMJ tKG) FLAG (BARCODE)
, '
1
2
3
4
5
6
t
1<8
9
10
,11'
12
13
14
15 -
"
16.
17
18
19
20
,., ',," ",;.' ,,: ".'.' " "
LlNE#/ ..'., FLAG , , , COMMENT OR FLAG EXPLANATION ,. '.
FlAG CODES: K= NO SAMPLE COLLECTED; U= SUSPECT SAMPLE; F1. F2, ETC. = MISC. FLAGS ASSIGNED BY FIELD CREW.
EXPLAIN ALL FLAGS IN COMMENTS SECTION.
REVIEWED BY (lNIlTlAL):
Rev.6/94 (ftissuel.941
F"..h T...U8 Sample Tracking Form- Lake. . 2
-------
SAMPLE COLLECTION FORM-LAKES
LAKE NAME:
.KE ID: L
IlAM ID (circle): 1 2 3
'"':''' "",::,:,'""}:,,..,'
" ,>"::":",,,::,, ,0',
DATE OF COLLECTION:
I
I
VISIT #:
1
2
SITE ID (circle): INDEX
OTHER:
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
OTHER:
'. ",..' SECCHI'DISK TRANSPARENCY
,
.. "..' """""':::':":""""':'" """/:,, ""..' ','CIJ:AR'1'o::::,::',:''',,,,
DEPTHDISKD~RS\ DfPTHD&SKRWiPEARi:SOTToMIXII,
, 'COIIMSfTt
M
M
..
"
>WA TER'CHEMISTRY'l4';LCUBITAINEAAND4 SYRINGES)
SAMPLEID#
IBarCoder ,,"
SAMPLE, ,
TYPE:::'"
..
,"DEPTH ",
: "COLLECTED' "
,":FLAG:,,:
COMMENTS
------
R1
M
------
M
: ,SAMPLE IJ:)#
" " 'IBarcoder"'"
. .. .
. ....
SAMPlEt
"TYpEL '
'=::'.-,.:-." "'"". "'.:':. ",' .".." , . . '. '.. .
:.' CfflOROPHYtL(T~RGErVOttJME=500Mll
.. ".
',,'DEPTJ:f ':": ,:' "" 'SAMPLE>.
/COUEC'TEI)"',,. ",::":',,.'("',
,cc', ',C'C', ,','
",' ',' , "', ",:"""
,:'COMMENTS"':",":' ":
FINE
R1 M
R1 M
M
M
,
SEDIMENT'CORE SAMPLES (TARGE"rCORE LENGTH = 35 TO 40 CM)
Collected at Icirclel:
INDEX
OTHER
If OTHER. record direction and distance from INDEX .ite:
" C'
"
SAMPLE
CLASS
SAMPLE fO #
"IBarcodel" ,
SAMPLE LENGTH
TYPE' 'OFCORE
INTERVAL' ,
From: ".. To
'FLAG
COMMENTS
TOP
R1
R1
CII
CII CII
CII CII
CII CII
CII CII
BOTTOM
CII
CII
CII
FLAG CODES:
K= NO MEASUREMENT OR SAMPLE COLLECTED; U- SUSPECT MEASUREMENT OR SAMPLE; F1 F2, ETC" = MISC.
FLAGS ASSIGNED BY EACH FIELD CREW. EXPLAIN ALL FLAGS IN COMMENTS SECTION.
REVIEWED BY (INITIAL):
Rev. 6/94 Isamcol1.94)
Sample Collection Form- Lake. . 1
-------
1-
BENTHOS SAMPLE lOCATION AND COLLECTION FORM-LA <:S
LAKE NAME:
'KEID:
DATE OF COLLECTION:
I
I
V SIT #:
1
2
L
TEAM 10 (circle):
1
2
3
4
6
6
7
8
9 10
OTHER: -
-- -
--\:OOTUNEMAP-OFLAKE (WITH PHYSICAL HABITAT STATIONS IDENTIRED)
"," .. ,"....'.' " .- "'.' ,", . .
INOICA1iu)CATIOIisWtBEislnIccORE SAMPtES-AIIE COUECTEDwmf THE iEmR OF THE NEAIIDT PHYSICAl. HAIlTAT Sm: fA . JI.
..
ARROW INDICA 1'ES)-:.
NORTH.-
. - -
. . . . .
. : :.: - : .'REcCIID nE:SiW.i:.oWER' oF TIE Fou.OVVINCI DEPTHS' (FROM'lAu PRoFI.£ FoRM.
- --A)TIo£DlPtMOi:-TOPOf' IlETAUllNION OR... --... - :'_.. .
.) THE- DEEPEST-DEPTH' AT WHICH DISSOlVED OXYGEN-;t: - 6 -IIOIL- --'.
TARGET DEPTH
II
COMMENTS:
.
REVIEWED BV (INITlAl):-
Rev. 61194 Ibencol1.941
Benthoa Sample location and Collection Form- lakea - 1
-------
LAKE ID: L BENTHOS COLLECTION FORM (CORE SAMPLES) VISIT # (circle): 1 2
DATE OF COLLECTION: I I
RECORD SAMPUNG START TIME: REcORD PROCESSING COMPL£'T1OH TIME HERE: I
.. . DEPTH SUBSTAA TE
... . STATION ..
SAMPl.E1D .'Barcode). .:: ID . COLLECTED TYPE. FlAG COMMENTS
A M
B M
C M
D M
E M
F M
G M
H M
I M
J M
M
M
M
M
M
SUBSTRATE TYPE CODE~: G= GRAVEL, S=SAND, C=SILT,CLAY, OR MUCK, W=WOODY DEBRIS, O=OTHER (DESCRIBE IN
CO~MENTS)
FLAG CODES: K= NO SAMPLE COU£CTED; U= SUSPECT SAMPLE; F1. F2, ETC.= MISC. FLAGS ASSIGNED BY EACH FIELD CREW. ExPLAIN ALL FLAGS IN
COMMENTS SECTION.
ZEBRA MUSSEL OBSERVATION AND COLlECTION
..:. ...
STA110II . 0IIsERvm (YJNI Cou.B:'rED (YJN)' . en ~.ITI
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
LAUNCH 8
OTtER
REVIEWED BY (INITIAL):
Rev. 6//94 (bencoI1.94)
Benth08 Sampl. Location and Collection Form- Lakes - 2
-------
LAKE ASSESSMENT FORM
LAKE NAME: DA TE OF VISIT: I I VISIT #: 1 2
~KE ID: L TEAM ID (ci,clel: , 2 3 4 . . 7 . . 10 OTHER:
. LAKE SITEACTlVITIE8 AND DISTURBANCES OBSERVED (1NnNSm': BlANK = NOT oasERVED. L-LOW. M=IIOOERAn. H=HEAVY)
I RESIDENTIAL ' , ' ',<, ,IIECRPTIONAl " AGRICUL T\JRAL IM)UBTRIAL lAKE MANAGDISIfT
,I RulOoocu p-. CAII_-. -- CllDP\MMI IIIDumIAL Pull.,. IIAC""'Mnt eoNTlIOl
- - - - -
MAIJITAIJIED LA-. I'IIMlTlVE p-. CAII-. IIucHEa - P...TUIE - M.u/QuAMD - LJ-
- -
- CON8TRUCnoN - REaollT8 - LJY£.TOCII - Powu lJoIu - 0-- WAm TIlfIlT.
- PIPE., D"""'. M_... - Powu PuII'I8 - AACIUNG PlEa...
-
- TAEATIIEJlT PuNT - T_/LnmI - Lo_a
- lANDRu.. D""Ma - au..- FILMa. 8cUll8. 011 Sueu - E- O. FtIE
- 000.
" "',,:;.::,:::',r, '::'::::>': ':, ':': 'CENERALlAKEINFORMATtON : ,::,\:::,:,::, ..,
, '
HYDROLOGIC LAKE TYPE 0 RE8EIIYOIII 0 0_- 10UTIn. ""'TI I 0 8EEP- INo 0UT1n8 CI8IEIIYm'
OUTLET DAMS 0 No. 0 AIlnRCIAL 0 NATUIIAL
Low ELEVAT10N FLIGHT HAzARDS DYES 0 NO
MOTOR BOAT DENSITY oHlaH 0 Low 0 RoTIIICTID oa-
GENERAL AESTHETICS 0 PwA8MT 0 8o_AT PwA8MT 0 ~--T
t SWlllIlABUTY 0 Gooo 0 FAlII 0 NoT SWilllI.au
LAKE lEVEL CHANGES oZalo 0 El.EvAnoN CHAM.. II
I SHOREUNECHARACTERISTICS (%of shoreline)
FoAE8T/SH- 0 RAIE 1<5%1 0 IIP- 15 TO 25%' 0 II_IIATE 125 TO 75%1 0 ExmnIY£ I> 75%'
AaliCUlTUIE 0 RAIE 1< 5%1 0 S,,- 15 TO 25%' 0 1I000llATE 125 TO 75%1 0 ExmI8IY£ I> 715%'
OI'EJlG- 0 RAIE 1< 5%' 0 IIP- 15 TO 25%' 0 1I000lATE (25 TO 75%' 0 ExmnIY£ 1>75%1
WmNID 0 RAIE 1< 5%' 0 IIP- 15 TO 25%' 0 1I000lATE 125 TO 75%1 0 ExmdIY£ 1>75%'
B- IIEAcHI 0 RAIE 1< 5%' 0 IIP- 15 TO 25%' '0 1I000llATE 125 TO 75%' 0 ExmdIY£ I> 75%'
DEvnaI'ED 0 RAIE 1< 5'J1.' 0 S,,- 15 TO 25%' 0 1I0DEllATE 125 TO 75'J1.' 0 ExmI8VE I> 75%'
SHOIEUNE 11008. IDOCIIa, 111_' 0 RAIE 1< 5%' 0 SPA- 15 TO 25%' 0 1I0DEllATE 125 TO 75%1 0 ExmI8IY£ 1>75%1
QUAUTA TlVE MACROPHYTESURVEY
MACROPHYTE DENSITY 0 "-T OS,,- 0 1I0DEllATE 0 001.
EMERGENTIFLOATING COVERAGE (% LAKE AREA) 0 OTO 25% 0 25 TO 150% 0 50 TO 75% 0 >75%
SUBIIERGENT COVERAGE (% LAKE AREA) 0 OTO 25% 0 25 TO 50% 0 50 TO 75% 0 > 75%
DESCRIPTION:
(Continued on rever.. .idel
REVIEWED BY (INITIAL):
Rev. 6/94 (lakass1.94)
Lek. A.....ment Form - 1
-------
LAKE 10: L LAKE ASSESSMENT FORM (continuedl VISIT: II (circlel: 1 2
QUALITATIVE ASSESSMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAl. VALUES
TROPHIC STATE 0 OuooTIIDMC 0 MEIOTIIOPHIC 0 EuTIIOMC 0 HvPEIlEUTIIOPHlC
VISUAL ASSESSMENT: AI
ALGAL ABUNDANCE & TYPE:
NUTRIENT STATUS:
OTHER:
FISHABIUTY: 0 EXCEUsn 0 Gooo 0 FAlII 0 PoOII
CONomoNS:
LOCAL CONTACTS:
OBSERVATIONS:
OVERALL BIOTIC INTEGRITY 0 ExcwsIT 0 IMpACTID 0 k¥EJIEI.v IIIpACTID
GENERAL ASSESSMENT:
WILDUFE OBSERVED:
.
WATERBOOY CHARACTER ICIRCLE ONEI
PRISTINE 5 4 3 2 1 DEVELOPED
APPEAUNG" 5 4 3 2 1 . UNAPPEALING
COMMENTS:
Rev. 6/94 lIakass1.941
ReviEWED BY (INITIAL).
Lak. A.....m.nt Form - 2
------- |